





w 0o 






















s?5 ^ 


















-p 






^ 



4? 









iV 



kV <P 










"^ 



? ■%. 



^ ^ 



** * 



■^% 



-,° k O 



^ ' 






^V v^ 






V 









*$> 



EGYPTIAN HIEROGLYPHICS ; 



AN ATTEMPT TO EXPLAIN THEIR NATURE, ORIGIN, 
AND MEANING. 



A VOCABULARY. 



By SAMUEL SHARPE 




LONDON: 

EDWARD MOXON AND CO., DOVER STREET. 

1861. 






" There are, or may be, two ways of seeking and finding truth. The one, from observa- 
tion and particulars, jumps to universal axioms, and from the truth of those finds out the 
intermediate axioms ; and fhis is the way in use. The other, from observation and particulars, 
raises axioms by a continued and gradual ascent, till at last it arrives at universal axioms; 
and this is the true way, but it has not yet been tried." Novum Organum, xix. 



Taylor, Printer, 39, Coleman Street. 



PREFACE. 



rpHE valley of the Nile is remarkable over every country in 
the world for the number of its ancient buildings. The 
architecture of the temples varies in style and excellence,, from 
the noble buildings of the Thebaid to the ruder copies in Ethio- 
pia and Meroe ; but they are all massive, and both in materials 
and in form suited to last for ages. The walls of these temples 
are covered with sculptures, much of which is meant for writing ; 
and the letters or characters are the figures of men, animals, 
plants, with other natural and artificial objects. Even the walls 
of the tombs hollowed out of the rock are covered with painted 
and written records ; and the mountain -like pyramids near 
Memphis, in the time of Herodotus, before they lost their outer 
casing, were not without the same ornaments. When this system 
of hieroglyphical writing began is unknown to us, but it lasted 
for more than two thousand years. It was perfectly formed 
before the Israelites settled in the Delta ; and it only fell into 
disuse after the time of the Antonines, when the idolatrous reli- 
gion of the country, together with the writing and other customs 
which were entwined round that religion, gave way before the 
spread of Christianity. 



IV PREFACE. 

The hieroglyphical writing on the walls of Egyptian temples 
was in characters so large that every body could read them as 
he ran. It had been gazed on by Moses, when he warned the 
Israelites against the misuse of sculpture, and by Plato, when he 
came to study from the priests who wrote and read it. It had 
been admired by Herodotus, Pausanias, Strabo, and other in- 
quiring travellers; but they none of them took the trouble to 
learn to read it. This knowledge was chiefly in the hands of the 
priests, who, in Egypt as in all other countries, were the great 
possessors of learning ; but it was never concealed from the vul- 
gar, or even from strangers. Hieroglyphics were not used for 
religious purposes only. On the funereal tablets they were in 
the hands of all who were rich enough to employ that method 
of honouring their deceased friends ; on the walls of the temples 
they recorded the nations victories, and the tribute from the 
conquered countries ; and they were the sculptured ornaments 
over the doors of the temples, declaring the names and praises 
of the kings who built them, 

During the reigns of the Ptolemies, who governed with a care- 
ful attention to the religious prejudices of the people, and whose 
popularity with the priests was greater than that of many of the 
native kings, we cannot suppose that any of the learned Greeks 
who ornamented the court of Alexandria would have found the 
least difficulty in getting himself taught this method of writing. 
The grammarians of the Museum might with ease have formed 
dictionaries and grammars for the hieroglyphics; but, unfortu- 
nately, the Greeks too often despised foreigners, and the Alexan- 
drians in particular looked down upon the Egyptians. Want of 
curiosity, and a fashionable contempt for the language of the 
barbarians, must have been the cause of our present ignorance. 
Like Voltaire at the court of Prussia, being courted and admired 



PREFACE. V 

for the knowledge of their own language, the grammarians had 
no wish to turn either their own attention or that of their ad- 
mirers to any other. To help us in our studies they have left us 
only a treatise on hieroglyphics of very little worth, hy Hora- 
pollo ; a few lines by Cheeremon, and a few more by Clemens ; 
but these never guided an inquirer to the meaning of a single 
word of an inscription. The hieroglyphical writing went out of 
use on the spread of Christianity ; and, soon after the conquest 
of Egypt by the Arabs, there was no living being who could read 
a single sentence of the countless inscriptions with which their 
buildings were covered. The very language itself, the Coptic, 
became a dead language ; and after a time the Bible and services 
of the church were written with a translation, that they might 
be understood in Arabic by the vulgar, while read in Coptic by 
the priest. 

After the revival of learning, the hieroglyphics on the build- 
ings naturally attracted the attention of modern travellers. A 
few inscriptions were copied and published in Europe ; but, when 
the French scientific expedition landed in Egypt in company 
with the invading army under Buonaparte, no success had yet re- 
warded the efforts of scholars to decipher the unknown writing. 
Among the works of ancient art then collected was a slab of 
black basalt, found near the town of Bosetta, which seemed to 
be the wished-for key to the secret. It contains an inscription 
in three characters. One is in hieroglyphics ; a second in what 
we now call enchorial or common Egyptian letters ; and a third 
in Greek. This last could of course be read. It is a decree by 
the priests in honour of Ptolemy Epiphanes ; and it ends with 
the important information that it was to be written in three 
characters. "The Greek was clearly seen to be a translation, by 
which the other two inscriptions might be understood. This 



VI PREFACE. 

stone is now in the British Museum, and is the groundwork 
from which has sprung all our knowledge of hieroglyphics and 
of early Egyptian history. 

It is to the sagacity of Dr. Thomas Young, and through his 
comparison of the several inscriptions on the Rosetta Stone, that 
we owe our first knowledge of this mode of writing. He deter- 
mined the meaning of all the sentences, of many of the words, 
and of several of the letters. These he published in 1816 and 
1818. This knowledge was soon afterwards enlarged and cor- 
rected by Mons. Champollion. Other students, both here and 
abroad, have since made further additions, among whom, in our 
own country, we should not omit the names of Mr. Salt, Sir 
Gardner Wilkinson, and Mr. Birch. It would be difficult to allot 
to each his due share of credit in this most interesting discovery. 
Some will think more highly of him who made the first entrance 
into a hitherto closed region of knowledge ; others will be most 
thankful to him who led us furthest and taught us most. They 
all enjoyed the pleasure which arises on making and publishing 
an original discovery ; and may they all receive the honour due 
to their services in the cause of science and literature. 

The study of Hieroglyphics is already sufficiently advanced 
to moderate our expectations as to the reward which is likely 
to be the result of future progress. The knowledge hitherto 
gained belongs to the three sciences of history, mythology, and 
language. 

In history, by obtaining a pretty correct series of the kings' 
names, dates, at least approaching the truth, have been assigned 
to most of those stupendous works of art which have attracted 
travellers to Egypt from the time of Strabo to the present day. 



PREFACE. vii 

We have at least learned the order in which those buildings 
were erected ; a knowledge which is of importance in the study 
of the architecture of any nation, and particularly important in 
the case of Egypt, where, from the scantiness of other records, 
and the abundance of these, the study of the architecture is the 
study of the civilization. 

In mythology we have learned the names of the gods, the ages 
in which some rose into importance and others fell, and the 
groups into which they were arranged. We have learned many 
of their attributes, and their union of several characters in one 
person. 

In the department of language we have learned the origin Of 
writing, that most wonderful of the arts, by which, more than 
any other, we are enabled to use and to enjoy the faculties with 
which we are blessed. By writing we can speak to those who are 
at a distance, and even those who are not yet born. By means 
of writing the world grows wiser as it grows older ; and we pos- 
sess a memory almost boundless in its powers. 

But as for the knowledge to be gained from the contents of 
the inscriptions when they shall have been more completely de- 
ciphered, whether in respect to Egyptian astronomy, philosophy, 
or arts of life, it may be safely asserted that it will not be great. 
Were our knowledge of Greek and Roman literature limited to 
what could be gained from the writings on the marbles, on what 
subjects would it throw much light, except on those before spoken 
of ? And we know of no funereal writings of other nations which 
authorize us to complain of the scantiness of the information 
contained on Egyptian tablets. 



Vlll PREFACE. 

Since here the system of writing is to be explained rather than 
the language, it is clearly necessary to give instances of words 
written in several ways. Hence a dictionary of hieroglyphics, 
to be complete, would be far more bulky than most other dictio- 
naries. The present Vocabulary is, however, very far from com- 
plete; it is limited by the author's knowledge on the subject. 
His plan of giving no meanings to words which he could not 
support by referring to a published inscription, added to some 
little distrust, has forbidden his quoting from the writings of his 
eminent predecessors in the same path of study. Most of them 
have been accustomed to write the hieroglyphical words in Coptic 
letters, and thus to produce a word apparently Coptic, but in 
reality only of their own making. To avoid such a misunder- 
standing the author would remark that all words which are here 
printed in the Coptic character may be found in the Rev. Henry 
Tatham's Lexicon Mgyptiaco-Latinum. 

Many of the author's predecessors have also relied far more 
than he has ventured to do upon the unaided spelling. We can 
often find many words in the Coptic language, any one of which 
might be supposed to be meant by the very scanty number of 
letters which are seen in a group of characters in an inscription. 
When the vowels are often omitted, and the consonants have 
more than one force each, a group of letters becomes of very 
uncertain meaning ; and without the help of a context of words 
certainly known, and of a pretty large number of pictorial words 
sprinkled over a sentence, the reading of the others by means 
of the spelling only is often unsafe. 

The more important cases in which the author differs from his 
learned predecessors are in the force of the character No. 1625, v 
which he reads as M E S, and translates battles in the group 



PREFACE. IX 

No. 1629, NEB-MESE, lord of battles ; and again, in the let- 
ters B 10 and s 13 ; and again, in sometimes giving to the th the 
guttural force of CH. The reading of many kings' names, and 
thence the chronology of the earlier part of the Egyptian history, 
depend upon the force given to these characters. 

There are several ways in which the words or groups of cha- 
racters in such a work as the following might be arranged. First, 
argumentatively, or in the order most convenient to convince the 
reader that the right meaning had been assigned to each group, 
beginning with those words which are translated upon the Ro- 
setta Stone, and proceeding nearly in the order that the author's 
own investigations proceeded. But this would be very inconve- 
nient to the reader, except at the time that he had the plates 
referred to actually before him, and was reading for the purpose 
of testing the author's correctness. Secondly, they might be 
arranged according to their pictorial similarity, in the same way 
that words are placed alphabetically in a dictionary. This, al- 
though the one most convenient for a reader new to the book, 
who wished to find the meaning of an unknown hieroglyphical 
group, would have been wholly confused when it was read through 
as a treatise on the language. The third mode, the one actually 
here adopted, is of arranging the groups according to the resem- 
blance of their meanings, which sufficiently approaches to the 
method of a dictionary, and has the additional advantage of ma- 
king the book useful to the reader, when neither using it as a 
dictionary nor testing the author's correctness. 

The names of the gods are placed first, and form a short my- 
thology ; next follow the groups relating to the temples, to kings, 
and to other objects in succession. References are given in all 
cases to those inscriptions which seem most satisfactorily to jus- 



X PREFACE. 

tify, or rather to render probable, the meanings there assigned, 
though, in almost all cases, the proof will be found to rest more 
upon the connection of each group with the similar ones by 
which it is surrounded, than by the single quotations which are 
offered to support it. 

The Alphabet is placed at the end of the volume, because the 
sound of the words is to be proved first, and thence is afterwards 
learned the force of the letters. 



WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

The History of Egypt, 2 vols. 8vo. Fourth edition. 

Egyptian Inscriptions ; two hundred and sixteen Plates in folio. 

The Chronology and Geography op Ancient Egypt. 

Alexandrian Chronology. 

The Triple Mummy-Case of Aroeri-ao, with Drawings by Joseph Bonorai. 

Historic Notes on the Books of the Old and New Testaments. Second edition. 

Critical Notes on the authorized English Version of the New Testament. 

The New Testament, translated from Griesbach's Text. Fourth edition. 



EGYPTIAN HIEROGLYPHICS 



EGYPTIAN HIEROGLYPHICS. 



1 HE ancient Egyptians have left us, on stone and on papyrus, 
four sets of characters. These are the Hieroglyphics, or sacred 
carving ; the Hieratic, or sacred writing ; the Enchorial, or vul- 
gar writing, also called the Demotic ; and the Coptic alphabet. 

The Hieroglyphic characters are several hundred in number, 
and often cut on the hardest stone with great beauty and neat- 
ness. They are arranged in lines, sometimes horizontally and 
sometimes vertically. They are figures of men, animals, birds, 

fishes, and their parts ; insects, plants, flowers, and a variety of 
artificial objects, such as the house, the plough, the sword, the 
boat, with many others of unknown purpose. 

The Hieratic writing is borrowed from the former, and differs 
from it only as much as writing differs from carving ; as much as 
letters formed rapidly with a brush or reed pen, and employed 

in long manuscripts on papyrus, are likely to differ from those 
carved slowly with a chisel, and fitted to the architectural orna- 
ments of a building. Hieratic writing is not found of so early 
a date as some hieroglyphical inscriptions, possibly from the 
frailty of the materials on which it was usually written ; but it 
continued in use till about the same time. They both had been 
employed in the service of the old Egyptian religion, and went 
out of use on its fall, and on the spread of Christianity and the 
Coptic alphabet. 



2 INTRODUCTION. 

The Enchorial or common writing is also called epistologra- 
phic and demotic. The characters were no doubt taken from 
the Hieratic, and some few retain their resemblance ; but most 
of them are wholly different. 

Unfortunately we have no enchorial writing formed neatly and 
elegantly like the hieroglyphic, or even like Greek and Roman 
inscriptions. Hence the true shapes of the characters are doubt- 
ful. The enchorial characters of two inscriptions or manuscripts 
often differ as much as with us the bad handwriting of one man 
differs from that of another. 

The Coptic alphabet is formed on the model of the Greek, 
with the addition of six sounds unknown to Europeans, or not 
represented by Greek letters. This alphabet came into use after 
the second century of our era, when the Bible and the christian 
writings were first translated into the language of the country. 
It was employed in the service of Christianity by the teachers, 
who wisely thought it better to avoid the hieroglyphics, which 
had been for so many centuries dedicated to the old pagan super- 
stitions. The language of these Coptic translations sometimes 
differs in part from that of the hieroglyphics, which were mostly 
written many centuries earlier ; and we should be led into mis- 
takes by assuming that it was altogether that of the unknown 
characters which are now to be deciphered. But when, by other 
modes of investigation, we have learned both the meaning and 
the sound of an hieroglyphical word, it is no small proof that we 
are right if we find one nearly the same in the Coptic language. 

The Ethiopic alphabet, or that used in Abyssinia, may as well 
be here mentioned, because it was probably formed with Egyp- 
tian help. It is rather more modern than the Coptic; and the 
letters so far resemble the hieroglyphics as to be used for sylla- 
bles. They are seven times twenty-six in number. Every one 
of the twenty-six letters has seven forms according to its syllabic 
sound. This alphabet, though called Ethiopic, belongs to Abys- 
sinia, and was never known so far north as the country usually 
called Ethiopia. 



INTRODUCTION. 3 

We find hieroglyphics wherever the Egyptian language and 
religion were cultivated ; from Alexandria to the island of Meroe, 
and from the Oasis of Ammon to Feiran at the foot of Mount 
Sinai. We have hieroglyphical inscriptions from Thebes of the 
reign of Osirtesen I., and from Memphis while the great pyra- 
mids were being built, before the country was under one sceptre ; 
and we have others two thousand years later, in the reign of the 
Roman emperor Commodus, when Egypt was the ruined pro- 
vince of a sinking empire. In all of these the system of writing 
is the same. In the last, as in the first, some characters are 
letters, and some are syllables. The sacred writing never arrived 
at the simplicity of an alphabet, though it had given birth to the 
alphabets used by Moses and by Homer : it had changed less 
than the language itself. To the last it was written indifferently 
from right to left, or from left to right, while all other languages 
had taken up with a fixed direction. 

The sentences are usually in horizontal lines, with the charac- 
ters often arranged in small vertical groups. But the lines are 
sometimes arranged in vertical columns, and are so short that 
the sentences may then be said to be written from top to bottom, 
like the Chinese. In all cases, with very few exceptions, the 
reader, in following the order of the words, meets the faces of 
the animals, and the points and openings of the other letters. 
This is the reverse of the rule in the neighbouring alphabets, the 
Hebrew, Greek, Arabic, and Ethiopic, and even in the Egyptian 
enchorial writing. In all of these the reader follows the backs 
of the letters. So in our own printed alphabet, which is taken 
from the Greek and Roman, the reader seldom meets the points 
of the letters : he follows the backs of the C, E, F, G, K, L, P, 
Q, and R. Of these two rules however, that of the hieroglyphics, 
to judge by our own habits, seems to be the most natural; and 
accordingly, in our hand-writing, without altogether altering the 
forms of the letters, we often throw the points and openings to 
the other side, so that they meet the reader as he proceeds, as 
in the &, M, ^ <$3, Si, J, J, y, and y. 

The hieroglyphics are not picture-writing like the Mexican 
pictures brought to Europe by Humboldt, which represent ac- 

b2 



4 INTRODUCTION. 

tions and thoughts directly without the use of words. But the 
Egyptian hieroglyphics represent words and the parts of words. 
The agent,, the verb, and the object require three words in hiero- 
glyphics, and often call for the further help of pronoun, article, 
and preposition ; whereas in picture-writing the action is ex- 
pressed by the position of the agent and the object, without the 
help of a verb or particle. 

Nor are the hieroglyphics formed on any philosophical plan. 
Wilkins, in his Essay towards a Real Character, which might be 
used without regard to language, expresses an idea, as a natu- 
ralist describes a plant, by pointing out first its class, then its 
genus, then its species. Thus, to write the word king by signs 
which may be called letters, he expresses first a man; secondly, 
related to us in our character of citizens ; thirdly, the highest in 
rank of those so related to us. This order of ideas, which is very 
suitable for a mode of picture-writing, is directly the reverse of 
what we find in the construction of all languages. In these the 
root of a word rarely expresses that most important circumstance 
of whether a man, an action, or an object be the thing meant. 
Thus, for instance, in- sacrificer, sacrificing, and sacrificed, the 
root of the word belongs equally to each of those three great 
classes of ideas ; and it is only by a little syllable added to the 
root that we are enabled, in the language of the naturalist, to de- 
termine the class to which it belongs, although we were already 
acquainted with its specific character. In No. 350, libations, 
and No. 354, a priest, the resemblance in the characters tells us 
that the words were alike in sound. 

Of all known modes of writing the Chinese comes nearest to 
this philosophical system. It can be read by nations and tribes 
that cannot understand one another when they speak. The cha- 
racters, like our numerals, represent ideas, not words. When 
modified by prefix or affix, it is in agreement with a modification 
in the idea, but very often not in agreement with the change in 
sound ; and while, in some Chinese dictionaries, the words are , 
arranged according to the characters, in others they are placed 
according to the sound. 

The hieroglyphics, unlike these modes of writing, truly repre- 



INTRODUCTION. 5 

sent the Egyptian language, its nouns, its verbs, its pronouns, 
its articles, and its prepositions. To this the Egyptian numerals 
form no exception. The only clear exception is in the case of 
the written names of the twelve months. These are formed philo- 
sophically. Every name expresses, first, that it is a month ; se- 
condly, to which of the three seasons of the year it belongs ; and 
thirdly, by means of a numeral, its place in that season. These 
written names of the months are older than any remaining Egyp- 
tian monuments : they are older than the pyramids, and they 
are not the same as the spoken names. And this disagreement 
between the written and the spoken names goes far to prove 
that, like our numerals, they are not of native growth. They 
may, perhaps, have been brought from Chaldaea to Heliopolis ; 
but it must have been long before the arrival of the Israelites. 

Home Tooke, in his Diversions of Purley, has beautifully di- 
vided words into those which are necessary for the communica- 
tion of our ideas, and those abbreviations which are found con- 
venient for the sake of precision and dispatch. Now, when in 
hieroglyphical inscriptions we meet with conjunctions and pro- 
nouns, which belong to the latter class, they are never abbrevia- 
tions of hieroglyphical nouns or verbs, but in many instances 
they are spelt laboriously and at full length, even while the nouns 
and verbs in the same sentences are expressed shortly by means 
of symbols. Thus, those words which in all languages, Coptic 
included, are short and of frequent use, are, in this mode of 
writing, more cumbersome than the other words, and for that 
reason are frequently omitted at the risk of bringing obscurity 
into the sentences. 

The hieroglyphical characters are for the most part syllables ; 
and no doubt they were originally all so. But of the remaining 
inscriptions we have none so old as to be written without any 
words spelt by means of letters. So we are left to imagine the 
number of centuries that must have passed since this mode of 
writing first came into use, when the characters were used for 
the objects only. The first great change in the art was to use 
the characters for the names of the objects; and thus they got 
the power of representing a syllable or part of a long word. The 



b INTRODUCTION. 

names of these objects were mostly monosyllabic ; and, by means 
of these syllables, they represented the names of thoughts and 
feelings which cannot themselves be copied in a picture. 

In making this step the Egyptians were helped by the nature 
of their language. In English our monosyllables have usually 
two well-sounded consonants, as bat, bet, bit, boot, but. In 
Coptic, on the other hand, they have more often only one, as 
ma, me, mi, mo, mu. And it is clear that it would be much 
more easy to write words by means of characters with these 
Coptic sounds than with our English monosyllables. Thus these 
characters would come into use for mere convenience sake much 
more often than others in their language which are like ours. 
Had the writers chosen their characters upon any system, they 
might, at this stage of their progress, have formed an alphabet 
like the Ethiopic, with about seven times twenty-six letters. 

The next step was to use some of these simplest characters, 
not for the syllables, but for the consonants, and to make a syl- 
lable by placing another character for a vowel before or after it. 
This is the plan of a perfect alphabet. But though the Egyptian 
priests, even before the pyramids were built, had arrived at this 
use of some of the characters, they never discovered the supe- 
riority of the alphabetic over the syllabic writing. The Hebrews 
learned their alphabet from them ; the Greeks learned their al- 
phabet from them ; but even in the latest hieroglyphical inscrip- 
tions, like the earliest, we find some characters for syllables of 
two consonants, and others for syllables of one consonant; though 
certainly the alphabetic use of the characters for consonants only 
was always increasing. 

Thus the hieroglyphics seem to disclose to us the origin of 
writing, that most wonderful of arts, with every important step 
in its progress, from pictures of objects to pictures of words, pic- 
tures of syllables or sounds, and characters for letters or parts 
of a sound. Thence also all the neighbouring alphabets seem 
to have been copied. The Hebrew annals teach us that their 
great lawgiver and earliest known writer had been educated at 
or near Heliopolis, in Egyptian learning. The Greek antiquaries 
believed in the tradition of their nation that Cadmus and the 



INTRODUCTION. 7 

other founders of their cities and civilization came from Sais, in 
the west of the Delta. The Hebrew and the Greek alphabets 
confirm this tradition, and most clearly declare their Egyptian 
origin. More than half of the letters in each, notwithstanding 
the changes they may have since undergone, retain enough of 
their hieroglyphic form to prove their descent. The Arabic let- 
ters also seem to have been formed from the enchorial alphabet, 
which was more common in Lower Egypt. The arrow-headed 
characters of Persia and Assyria are formed from the square 
Hebrew characters. 

In the reign of Commodus, one of the last of the Homan em- 
perors whose name and titles we now read carved in sacred 
characters on the temples, lived the christian writer Clemens of 
Alexandria. He has left to us, in a few words, an account of the 
Egyptian writing, which must have been given him by one of 
the learned priests, who was fully acquainted with .the subject. 
His words are as follows : 

"Those who are educated among the Egyptians learn first 
that mode of writing which is called 

Epistolographic [or enchorial, common] ; secondly, the 
Hieratic, which the sacred scribes use ; and lastly, the 
Hieroglyphic Of this, one method is 

Kuriologic [not figurative, but spelt] by means of the 

first letters ; the other is 
Symbolic. Of the symbolic, one is express, or written 
Imitatively, another is written 
Figuratively, and the third is 
Allegorical, like some riddles." 
This division of the subject agrees pretty closely with. the re- 
sults of modern inquiry. The Kuriologic words are those spelt 
alphabetically by means of the first letters of the monosyllabic 
names of the objects represented. And in this method of forming 
an alphabet, the class of suitable syllables before spoken of was 
further increased by the omission of the last consonant, in other 
words, through careless pronunciation. Thus the word ton had 
the force of a T, the word men of an M, the word noun of an N, 
and so forth. 



» INTRODUCTION. 

Of the Imitative class of characters we find a large number. 
Ox, goose, temple, obelisk, mummy, are mere pictorial imita- 
tions of the objects themselves. 

For the Figurative class it is not easy to produce certain ex- 
amples. A landmark, No. 1419, when used for permanence, and 
a bull, No. 1624, for brave, seem to be used figuratively; but as 
in the Coptic language the words sound nearly the same, they 
need not be so considered. A sceptre, No. 1425, for power, a 
crown on a man's head for gold, No. 1201, and for kingdom, 
seem figurative. 

Of the Allegorical class, or of words used in two senses, we 
have numerous instances. A mallet, No. 268, means God, be- 
cause the two words sound nearly alike, or the one word has two 
senses. For the same reason a goose, No. 1789, means son-, a 
vulture, No. 1826, mother; a palm-branch, No. 955, year; with 
many others. 

But these Imitative, Figurative, and Allegorical words seem 
all at the same time to be phonetic. And though we have found 
instances which support the classification proposed by Clemens, 
yet they by no means contradict our general remark that all 
words are written by means of objects whose names give us the 
sounds required. 

There are no divisions or breaks between the words in a sen- 
tence ; but the characters run on in a continual stream from the 
beginning to the end of an inscription however long. This would 
nause no more trouble to the reader than it does in a Greek or 
Latin inscription, if the words were spelt with the same careful 
regularity. But unfortunately, in the hieroglyphical writing, 
there are peculiarities which must often have made the reading 
doubtful to the most learned of the priests. First, there was the 
uncertainty before mentioned of the force belonging to some 
characters ; as, for instance, whether one was the letter M, the 
syllable AM, ME, or men. There was also an entire want of 
regularity in the spelling of the words. To remove these causes 
of uncertainty they often made use of what we call a determi- 
native sign ; that is, after a noun spelt by characters, they placed 
a picture of the object, to give to the word an exactness which 



INTRODUCTION. 9 

the spelling failed to give. We may explain this by an example 
in English. If after the letters SP we add the picture of a boat, 
it means ship ; if the picture of a quadruped, it means sheep ; if 
the figure of a man, it means Esop. The rude spelling, or the 
rude picture, could neither of them alone declare with certainty 
what the word meant, but together they do it perfectly. 

This determinative sign is one of our chief helps in reading 
the hieroglyphics ; but unfortunately it is not used so often as 
it might be. On the other hand it is sometimes used very un- 
necessarily, when the word to be explained is itself a picture, 
and needs no such explanation. Thus, in No. 1771, we have two 
human figures, the first is a soldier, the second a simple man, 
and the whole group may be translated soldier-man. We have 
the same two figures in the names of several foreigners, any one 
of which might be translated & foreigner-man. See No. 1933. 

There is, of course, only a small number of words in the lan- 
guage that can be explained by the help of the determinative 
sign. All verbs, adjectives, adverbs, pronouns must be left in the 
uncertainty in which a loose mode of spelling places them. Sub- 
stantives denoting abstract ideas must be often read with the 
same doubt. In short, the meaning of every hieroglyphical 
word must be determined very much by the context, and not so 
much by the spelling, as with us. It seems probable even that 
the very priest who wrote an inscription would often be puzzled 
to know the meaning of a word, if it were taken away from those 
words which surround it. And this remark may guide us when 
we now attempt to read the hieroglyphics. It may teach us that 
we must, in the first place, depend on the art of deciphering 
by means of the context, and only in the second place on our 
knowledge of the language. We must begin by determining 
from the context the approximate meaning of a word, as that it 
is a title, or an adjective, or a liquid placed in bottles; and 
then only can we trust to the spelling, and thereby learn that 
it is king, or holy, or wine. Some of our scholars seem to have 
been often misled by venturing to rely too much upon the spel- 
ling, instead of confining themselves to those sentences in which 
the meaning of a word is proved by the context. 




10 INTRODUCTION. 

The kings' names, however, are removed from this uncertainty 
by being written within an oval ring, which sometimes, though 
less frequently, contains also some of the 
titles. We might almost suppose that when 
the ring was first introduced these names 
were the only words spelt alphabetically. 
J||> bJLb These kings' names, which include even the 

J I \J \^ 5/ first fifteen of the Roman emperors, form a 
safe foundation for our knowledge of the al- 

King Amunothph I. _ , ' 

phabet. 

The habit of contracting words and sentences has also added 
great difficulty to our attempts to learn their meaning. Articles, 
pronouns, prepositions, and the other smaller parts of speech are 
very much dropt. The inflections of nouns and verbs are often 
omitted ; and we find one character made use of for either gift, 
give, gave, giver, or gifted with. Words are also very much 
shortened by the omission of characters, particularly if one is of 
a pictorial nature. Even a man's name, which is spelt with six 
letters at the beginning of an inscription, will have four in the 
middle, and at the end will be represented by the first letter 
only. 

There is, however, a second help to the reader, not unlike the 
use of the determinative sign, which arises from the pictorial use 
of the characters having been more or less attended to, even after 
they had gained a syllabic and alphabetic force. And this choice 
of character was also attended to in words where they can have 
no pictorial meaning. Thus the words beloved, deceased, place, 
water, bom, all begin with M, but with letters of a different 
form ; and these letters are seldom changed one for the other in 
these words ; although, as they are followed by vowels, it is not 
necessary to attend to the syllabic force of the character. There 
are also some characters which are only used in sacred and royal 
subjects, and seem to be too important to be introduced into 
smaller, matters, or into particles and terminations of words. 

Nouns are made feminine by having the feminine article either 
postfixed or inserted before the last letter; whereas in Coptic 
the article is prefixed to the noun. This has preserved for us an 









INTRODUCTION. 11 

older form of the language, of which we see a trace in the word 
mout, a name mentioned by Plutarch for the goddess Isis, which 
in modern Coptic would be temau ; the mother. But the artist 
seems often to have added the feminine termination rather to 
convey an idea than a sound. The TS at the end of the names 
of Queen Berenice and Queen Arsinoe were most probably not 
sounded. The same remark applies to the personal pronoun I, 
which is sometimes followed by a feminine termination, though 
not so in Coptic. 

Nouns are made dual by being repeated twice. They are made 
plural by being repeated three times, and occasionally even nine 
times ; but more often by the addition of three small strokes. 
These plural forms were of course at first symbolic, but they 
were afterwards phonetic, and carried the sound as well as the 
meaning of a plural termination. The name of the god Anepo 
or Anubis has a plural sound in Coptic, and therefore a plural 
form in hieroglyphics, as the words Charles and James have in 
English, without carrying any plural idea with them. 

The possessive pronouns sometimes vary with the gender in a 
double sense; first, as in English, like his, her; and secondly, 
as in Latin, his masculine, and his feminine. Even the personal 
pronoun I, as before remarked, is sometimes written with a fe- 
minine termination. 

The sign denoting abstraction, or the state of being, may be 
seen in kingship, No. 623 ; priesthood, No. 355 ; and liturgies, 
or priesthood-things, No. 357. 

Year is made yearly, No. 957, by a syllable prefixed, which 
prefix is the same as that in the Coptic words having the same 
meaning; thus, lampi, year, etelampi, yearly, and, with the 
same prefix, month, No. 968, becomes monthly, No. 969. 

Several adjectives have a duplicate form, in which they resem- 
ble the Coptic ; thus, two twigs is the word splendid, No. 660, 
probably SOLSEL ; two landmarks, remaining, No. 1420, proba- 
bly TASHTASH ; so also thousand- thousand means numerous, 
No. 1079. 

We are able to detect in the writing several peculiarities in 
the Egyptian pronunciation, or perhaps slovenly habits of utte- 



12 INTRODUCTION. 

ranee. They did not use the sound of D, and wrote the first 
letter of Darius by NT. They had one sound which was either 
an L or an R, for they knew no difference between those two 
letters. When a vowel was at the beginning of a word, they 
sounded it but slightly, and therefore often omitted it in writing. 
Thus Serapis ought to be written Osirapis; Mnevis, the name 
of one of the sacred bulls, should be Amunevis ; our word Naph- 
tha should begin with an E. And this may explain why the 
patriarch Joseph was called Zeph, as we find him in the book of 
Genesis; Zeph-net-Phcenich, Joseph the Phoenician. Their use 
of a guttural sound shows itself in the confusion between K, CH, 
TH, and H. The name of the god Khem, No. 66, no doubt be- 
gan with that indistinct sound, as it is sometimes spelt with an 
H, and sometimes with th. In the name of the Hebrew patri- 
arch Ham, we have the same word ; and it is still less easily 
recognized in the name of the city Thoum or Etham. 

The hieroglyphic words have also furnished us with several 
etymologies which we could not have traced by the help of the 
Coptic. We thus learn that Osiris-Apis is the origin of the 
name of the god Serapis; Amun-Ehe became with the Greeks 
Mnevis, one of the sacred bulls ; Nen, No. 1639, a dwarf, is the 
root of the Greek and Latin Nanus ; Hino, No. 1673, the eternal 
ones, on changing the Egyptian plural termination into a He- 
brew form, became Hinnum ; and thence, perhaps, the spot near 
Jerusalem, in which the bodies of the dead were burned, was 
called the Valley of the children of Hinnum, and in the Greek 
Testament Ge-henna. Uk, No. 976, seems the original of our 
word week. Mum, No. 1672, is our word mummy. 

Before we can hope wholly to overcome the difficulties of this 
language, in part lost, we naturally attempt to master its mode 
of writing. In the case of another language we usually separate 
the two studies. But in the case of hieroglyphics this seems im- 
possible. It is probable that no knowledge of the subject would 
allow us to make a vocabulary of the words in Roman or Coptic 
letters. Such is the variety in modes of spelling, and in the 
writer's choice of characters, that it is necessary to collect many 
forms of every word. The two thousand hieroglyphical groups 



INTRODUCTION. 



13 



in the following plates do not represent perhaps more than about 
five hundred words. But, by comparing together the several 
forms, we learn what letters are interchangeable, and how words 
are gradually shortened down to a single letter. 

Besides attending to the rules of writing, the sculptor was a 
good deal guided in the choice of what characters he should use 
by his taste as an artist. When his sentence formed part of the 
ornaments over the portico of a massive temple, he chose those 
which were more full and less linear : he chose figures of men 
and animals. When, on the other hand, his aim was to save his 
labour, he chose the more simple forms. As to the greater or 
less completeness of a sentence, and the number of words which 
he ventured to omit, he was guided by the subject matter of the 
inscription. If it were one of the common sentences, recording 
the titles of the king, or the deceased person's offerings to the 
gods, all prepositions and smaller parts of speech were omitted. 
If, on the other hand, the inscription related to any less usual 
topic, like the decree on the Bosetta Stone, more prepositions 
and pronouns were used. 

The less simple taste of the later artists is shown in the kings' 
names. For the great kings who ruled in Thebes, when Egyp- 
tian art was in its purest state, we usually find three or four cha- 
racters within the first oval, and perhaps six within the second. 



Chebra. 



Xerxes. 



-5-4. 



Ml 

Ptolemy. 




Cleopatra 
Tryphsena. 




V^ !^£ 



Vespasian. 



But for the later Ptolemies, when bad taste rioted in the palace, 
and flattery corrupted the people, we find as many as thirty cha- 
racters crowded within the oval ring. 



14 INTRODUCTION. 

Although several inscriptions are published which were cer- 
tainly sculptured before the time of M oses, yet all of them con- 
tain many words spelt with letters ; none of them are sufficiently 
ancient to show the original introduction of letters among the 
symbols. But, as none of them contain any peculiarities which 
would lead us to suppose that they were among the first speci- 
mens of carved hieroglyphics, it seems probable that future re- 
search may throw light upon this interesting subject, by making 
us acquainted with inscriptions of a more primitive form. It is 
not impossible that we may find inscriptions in which we may 
perceive the absence of letters felt as a want, and the mode in 
which that want was first supplied. 

In the later inscriptions, however, the number of words writ- 
ten by means of letters certainly increased, as also the number 
of letters used to form a word ; and indeed the number of letters, 
and the complexity of the words, may at all times be admitted as 
strong evidence in proof of the modernness of an inscription. 

We may be sure that, when in any language we find a word 
written in a longer and shorter form, the longer is the original, 
and the other has been shortened by hasty or slovenly utterance. 
There are very few cases in which it would be true that the 
shorter was the original word, and that the other was lengthened 
for euphony's sake. Guided by this rule, we must suppose that the 
Egyptians pronounced but slightly, and often dropped, the final 
consonant ; and by those means they more readily formed con- 
sonants out of monosyllables. A palm branch, benne, or bet, 
was first pronounced BAI, and then used for the letter B. Meri, 
love, became mei. Shel, a son, is in hieroglyphics spelt she; 
and was then used for an s. Thal, a hill, became tau, and 
was used for a T. The N in particular was often dropt, as SHE N, 
wood, became SHE. The hieroglyphic NOUN, water, became 
moume, and then moou. Hems i, a chair, became isi in hiero- 
glyphics, as in the name of the goddess Isis. It was from this 
mode of pronunciation that an R, No. 1950, was sometimes used 
in hieroglyphics for the word ran, a name-, that the same cha- 
racter, No. 1714, was used for K, and for kame, black-, and the 
same for MEN and M ; and again the same for TON and T. 






INTRODUCTION. 15 

Helped, perhaps, by this mode of pronouncing, the Egyptian 
language possessed a good many monosyllables which, having 
only one consonant, readily became used in the place of a letter. 
Unlike our Saxon rat, cat, dog, which could not often be made 
use of as syllables in writing the longer words, the Coptic cha- 
racters for PEE, MEE, kee, REE, would find admittance on all 
occasions, and gradually become the consonants of an alphabet. 
They became like letters, from the greater frequency with which 
they got used, to the exclusion of others less suitable. Thus we 
have in the hieroglyphics clear traces of how an alphabet was 
formed out of a syllabic mode of writing by means of the pictures 
of objects. The Egyptians, however, did not complete their great 
discovery ; they did not, even in their less ornamented running- 
hand, fix upon one character, and one only, for each consonant 
and vowel sound. That improvement was left to be made by the 
Hebrews, the Phoenicians, and the Greeks, who learned the use 
of the alphabet from Egypt, through the Phoenicians. 

The Chinese characters, which have some points of resem- 
blance with hieroglyphics, are in other respects too unlike to 
suppose that either of them came from the other : the Egyptian 
and the Chinese, perhaps, both began with picture-writing. The 
more ancient Chinese characters, as used in some of their books, 
evidently represent the objects themselves. The Chinese cha- 
racters for water, an eye, a field, a man, a mountain, the sun, 
the moon, are the same as the hieroglyphics for those objects. 
These pictorial Chinese characters were in use, according to Dr. 
Morrison, as late as five or six centuries before our era, when the 
other alphabets were already formed. But in improving upon 
the first rude idea, these two nations at once took different 
routes. The hieroglyphics, as we have seen, were soon used for 
the sound or name of the object, while the Chinese character, in 
all its improvements, continued to mean the idea or the object 
itself. It must, however, be left to those who have studied the 
antiquities of China, to explain the origin of the Chinese cha- 
racters ; but it seems possible that the Chinese and the Egyp- 
tians may both have gained their knowledge of the art of writing 
from the same source. 



16 



INTRODUCTION. 






As the hieroglyphics have certainly given us one instance of 
an original discovery of a mode of writing, it will be interesting 
to inquire what neighbouring nations made use of this discovery. 
The Israelites, the Greeks, or the Assyrians might have made 
the same discovery for themselves. But it is more natural to 
suppose that when one nation heard that another nation had 
already learned a method of expressing their thoughts or words 
on stone or other materials, the second would inquire how it was 
done, and would make use of that experience which the former 
had already been ages in gaining, rather than set about to make 
the same discovery for itself. On a comparison of the alphabets 
such seems to have been the case, and it is not improbable that, 
on future inquiries, it may be shown that every nation using an 
alphabet is indebted for it to the Egyptians. 

The following wood-cuts show the hieroglyphics from which, 
as we may conjecture, were borrowed the Hebrew alphabet, 
the Greek alphabet, 
and those few Coptic 
letters which, when 
the Coptic alphabet 
was formed from the 
Greek, were not there 
to be found. 





HEBREW. 




a 




k 


P 


F-1 


a a 


g 


<Bs~ 


a 


d t 


"i 


i 


e 


C"D 


n n 


f 


* 


i 


z 


% 


T 


th t 


«» 


& 


i 


I 


i 


k 


LJ 


3 P 


1 r 


*J* 


S«> 


m 


/ — 


72 


n 


/ww\ 


2 


sh s 


* 


D 


n 


V 


V 


s sh 


ma 


V 2 


t 


s=> 


n 





] 


[NTRODUCTION. 








GREEK. 






COPTIC. 




JSV 


A Si 


M 


sh 


s B2 


ffl 


*-< 


n 5/ 


N 


f 


__ i > 


^ 


A 


r S 
a tP 


O 


k 


^T3 




W 


E e Mil 


5 


h 


£ 


a 


*~ 


F ii 


c 


J 


s 


x 


5l 


?Z ^ 


<T 


sh 


s * 


<r 


n 


H ^ 


T 








© 


fr 


T 








1 


I ■§■ 


<J> 








LJ 


K T 


X 








>4 


A L JL 


¥ 









17 



It must, however, be remarked that the borrowed letters by 
no means keep the same position with their hieroglyphic origi- 
nals. Thus the Roman L is the same as the Greek, Hebrew, and 
hieroglyphic, though in every case in a different position. The 
Hebrew D, has its mouth downwards in hieroglyphics, as in the 
Greek n. In the hieroglyphic originals the Hebrew D and the 
Greek C and E have the mouth upwards ; the Hebrew 2 has its 
mouth downwards. This derivation of the alphabets from the 
hieroglyphics is further proved by our finding that the Hebrew 
names for some of the letters are the Egyptian names for the 
objects which the hieroglyphics represent; as Nun, water, Pe, 
the heavens, and Teth, a hand, are borrowed from the Coptic. 

We possess so little of hieroglyphic writing accompanied with 
a Greek translation, beside the fourteen broken lines of the Ro- 
setta Stone, that we naturally seek for help in our studies from 
every indirect source. The most valuable of these will probably 
hereafter be the enchorial or common writing on the papyri, 
which, by the help of several bilingual manuscripts, might pro- 
bably be made a key to the hieroglyphics. But this is at present 
even less studied than the characters which we wish to explain 
by its help. We therefore turn, in the next place, to the few 

c 



18 INTRODUCTION. 

sentences which the Greek writers have given us as translations 
from Egyptian ; for though we have not got the hieroglyphics 
from which they were taken, yet we may sometimes learn from 
them a phrase, a title, or a mode of expression, which we may 
recognize in an hieroglyphical group. The longest of these sen- 
tences, which are translations, but of which the originals are 
lost, is the other part of the Rosetta Stone. It is published in 
English among the author's Egyptian Inscriptions, and it con- 
tains numerous titles of the young king Ptolemy Epiphanes, 
which prove that of this valuable triliteral and bilingual decree 
the Egyptian is the original and the Greek the translation. 

In the first book of Diodorus Siculus we have three sentences 
which seem to be of the same class, and may be here given. 
" The epitaph on Osymandyas. 

" I am Osymandyas the king of kings ; if any body wishes to 
know how great I am, and where I am lying, let him surpass 
some one of my works." 

u The epitaph on Isis. 

Ci I am Isis the queen of the whole land, who was taught by 
Hermes, and whatever I have decreed nobody can unloose. I am 
the eldest daughter of Cronos the youngest god. I am the wife 
and sister of Osiris the king. I am the mother of Horus the king. 
I am she that riseth heliacally with the dog-star. The city Bu- 
bastis was built for me. Hail, hail, Egypt that nourished me." 
" The epitaph on Osiris. 

"" My father is Cronos the youngest of all the gods, and I am 
Osiris the king, who fought against every land as far as the un- 
inhabited parts of India, and against the parts lying towards the 
north as far as the sources of the river Danube, and again, against 
the other parts as far as the ocean. I am the eldest son of Cronos, 
and was born out of a beautiful and noble egg, a seed related to 
the day ; and there is no place in the inhabited world to which 
I have not come distributing ; to all of which I was the bene- 
factor." 

In these sentences there are phrases which we know as hiero- 
glyphical groups, and they explain to us how far we are at liberty 
to insert the smaller words among the detached hieroglyphics to 



INTRODUCTION. 19 

make a connected sentence ; as the student who is familiar with 
inscriptions will easily see which words have been added by the 
priest who translated them to Diodorus. Like these, we find 
many inscriptions speaking in the first person, particularly in 
Egypt. Inscript. pi. 45, 65, and 75. 

Euphantus, quoted in Porphyry De Abstinentia, lib. iv., has 
left us an Egyptian prayer, which, however, is not so like to any 
of the inscriptions as to help us in our attempts to read them. 

Theocritus, in his 15th Idyl, has told us the offerings which 
were presented to the temple of Osiris at the annual feast. These 
were palm fruits in silver vessels, Syrian myrrh in golden vases, 
cakes of whitest flour, honey, oil, birds, beasts, green branches, 
ivory, and gold, most of which we find mentioned on the tablets, 
as in Egypt. Inscript. 39, 9 ; and in other places. The compari- 
son of the tablets with the poet confirms the translation given 
to the hieroglyphical groups in the Vocabulary. 

But the most valuable of our translations is that which was 
made from one of the obelisks of Rameses II., by Hermapion 
an Egyptian, in the reign of Constantine, and has been preserved 
by Ammianus Marcellinus. It is much the same in style and 
matter as the hieroglyphical inscriptions on many of the obelisks ; 
and, to assist the comparison, it is here arranged, as is usual with 
those inscriptions, in three columns, beginning with the middle 
one. The king's name, whether translated or not, has been in- 
closed in an oval, and the usual square pendant placed under 
the word Apollo, to complete the resemblance. On comparing 
it with the obelisk in Egypt. Inscript. pi. 42, it will be seen that 
it is much shorter, but that each line begins and ends with nearly 
the same words. The king's name is preceded by the same titles. 
The whole is headed with the address of the god to the king. 
The only liberty here taken in the arrangement is dividing be- 
tween the third verse or line of the first side and the first verse 
of the second side. The original in Ammianus makes no such 
division ; but it is easily seen to be wanted by the word Apollo, 
which heads every verse, as the eagle and sun, No. 629, do ih 
the hieroglyphics. 



c2 



20 



INTRODUCTION, 



" The translation begins on the South Side. 

" Line the second. " Line the first. " Line the third. 

" The Sun to 



APOLLO 



the brave, 

who stands in 

truth, 



I I I I 



I I 



I ! II ! 

lord of the 

diadem, 

who gives glory 

to Egypt; 

who holds, and who 

gives splendour 

to the City of 

the Sun ; 

who creates the 

rest of the world ; 

who honours 

the gods 

that dwell in 

the City of the Sun; 



whom the Sun 
loves. 



King Ramestes. 



I have given 

unto you 

to reign with grace 

over the whole 

world ; 



whom the Sun 
loves ; 



and APOLLO 



the brave 
truth-loving 
son of Heron, 



I I I 



III 

III 





born of God 
creator of the world, 



whom the Sun 
approved ; 



strong in battle, 
King 



RAMESTES, 



to whom the earth 

is subject 

by his might 

and bravery ; 

King 



RAMESTES, 



son of the Sun, 
immortal. 



APOLLO 



the brave 



I I 1 I I 



!!!! 



son of the Sun, 
all- shining, 



whom the Sun 
approved, 



and great Mars 

endowed ; 

whose goodness 

remains 

to all time ; 



whom Ammon 
loves ; 



who has filled 

with good 
the temple of 
the Phoenix. 



hermapion's obelisk. 



21 



"Another second 
line. 



Line the third. 



" I the Sun, 
lord of heaven, 
have given you 

life unfailing. 



APOLLO 



the brave 



I I 



I 



lord of the 

diadem ; 

unequalled, 

who has placed 

the statues 

in this place ; 

lord of Egypt ; 

and has beautified 

the City of 

the Sun ; 

like the Sun 

himself, 

lord of heaven ; 

he hath done 

a good work, 

son of the Sun, 



" To whom the gods 

have given 

length of life. 

APOLLO 



the brave 
son of Heron, 



I I I I 1 
Ml! 



Ill 

king 
of the world 



RAMESTES, 



who has guarded 

Egypt, 

who has conquered 

the foreigners ; 



whom the Sun 
loves, 



to whom the gods 

have given 

great length of life ; 

lord 

of the world 



RAMESTES 



" I the Sun, 

god, 

lord of heaven, 

to the king 



RAMESTES 



have given 
strength and power 

over all ; 
whom APOLLO 



truth-loving 



ill 



II 



11 hi in 

lord of times, 

and Vulcan 

father of the gods, 

have approved 

for his bravery ; 



• king, 
all-gracious, 
son of the Sun, 
and 



loved by the Sun. 



immortal. 



immortal. 



22 



INTRODUCTION. 



" On the North Side. 
" Line the first. 



' The great god 

of the City of 

the Sun, 

heavenly 

APOLLO, 



the brave 
son of Heron, 



I I I I I 
I MM 



whom the Sun 

begot, 

whom the gods 

honoured ; 

king 

of all the earth, 



whom the Sun 
approved. 



The king 
brave in war, 



whom Ammon 

loves, 

and the 

All-9hining 

has tried, 



for a king for ever.' 



CH.EREMON. 23 

Tzetzes the grammarian, in his Exegesis on Homer's Iliad, 
has saved for us a fragment from the lost work of Chseremon 
on hieroglyphics. It is too valuable to be omitted. Some of his 
explanations confirm those given in the Vocabulary. Others 
seem to be mistakes, but they may be of use in our future in- 
quiries. The words of Tzetzes are as follows : 

" For Homer says this, after he had been taught carefully all 
the learning of the symbolic iEthiopic letters. For the iEthio- 
pians have no elements of letters, but instead of them various 
animals and their parts ; and when the ancient priests wish to 
keep concealed the physical nature of the gods, they explain 
them to their own children by means of allegories and such like 
symbols and letters. As Chseremon the sacred scribe says, for 
joy they paint a woman playing on a drum, and for misfortune, 
an eye weeping ; for not having, two empty hands outstretched ; 
for rising, a snake coming out of a hole ; for setting, the same 
going in; for return to life, a frog; for the soul, a hawk; the 
same for the sun, and for God; for a child-bearing woman and 
mother, and time, and heaven, a vulture ; for a king, a bee ; for 
birth and self-born and male, a beetle; for the earth, a bull. 
The foreparts of a lion signify according to them all government 
and guard-, a lion's tail, necessity, a stag, the year, and a palm- 
branch the same ; a boy signifies increase ; an old man, decay. 
A bow, sharp force; and there are a thousand other such." 

Upon this we remark the hands outstretched, No. 1555, mean 
give ; the hawk means the soul, as in the wood-cut in the Title- 
page ; and it means the god Horus, in No. 114 ; the vulture, No. 
1826, is mother ; the ant or bee, No. 663, is king ; the foreparts of 
a lion, No. 1587, mean victorious; a stag, No. 960, the year; a 
palm branch, No. 955, the year. The other characters mentioned 
do not so well agree with the modern interpretation. 

The work entitled the Hieroglyphics of Horapollo Nilous pro- 
fesses to have been written in Coptic, and translated into Greek 
by one Philip ; but in its present state it is Greek in more than 
its language. It always speaks of the Egyptians as " they" and 
" them," and sometimes blunderingly attempts to explain Egyp- 
tian words by the help of the Greek language. Upon the whole 



24 INTRODUCTION. 

it seems more probable that it is a Greek work written by Philip, 
from explanations given to him by Horapollo, and which he did 
not understand. He gives, clause by clause, the description of 
the hieroglyphical characters, and the reasons, founded on figu- 
rative considerations, for the characters having such meanings. 
As the greater part of the characters which he describes are not 
found in any of the numerous inscriptions known to us, and as 
most of the meanings are such that it is scarcely possible they 
could have existed on the monuments at all, the work must be, 
both on external and internal evidence, rejected as of little 
worth. It is full of puerile reasoning. Out of the one hundred 
and eighty-nine groups which Horapollo undertakes to explain, 
it would be difficult to point out forty in which he has a know- 
ledge of the true meaning ; and in most of these he is remark- 
ably mistaken in the reasons which he assigns for the meaning. 
He is not aware that the characters represent sounds, but sup- 
poses them all to be figurative or allegorical. 

We are told by Suidas that Horapollo was a grammarian of 
the reign of Theodosius, who, after teaching for some time in 
the schools of Alexandria, removed to Constantinople ; but we 
may fairly doubt whether our author is the person he is speaking 
of. Beyond this doubtful account nothing else is known of him. 

The following quotations will explain Horapollo' s mode of 
reasoning and the extent of his knowledge. 

HOEAPOLLO. 

Book I. 

Chap 1. To denote an age [or period, alcov], they draw the 

sun and moon, because their elements are lasting for an age 

[aitovia]. But to write an age otherwise [meaning eternity], 

they draw a serpent with its tail covered by the rest of its body. 

Note. Thus in each of the hieroglyphics, for the words 

c year/ No. 953, < month/ No. 968, and < day/ No. 1004, 

which are the more common periods of time, we find a 

sun ; and in the word ' month/ a moon, as well as in the 

names of the several months. We find the serpent with 

a long tail forming part of the words c for ever/ No. 594 ; 



HORAPOLLO. 25 

and the asp with a twisted tail is the word ' immortal/ 
No. 286. 
Again, This serpent the Egyptians call Ouraius, which is in 
Greek basilisk. 

Note. ChfpO is the Coptic for king, and hence the 
Greek name for the animal, No. 286, a basilisk. 
Chap. 3. When they wish to denote the natural year, iviavros, 
they draw Isis, that is to say, ( a woman/ By the same they also 
represent ' the goddess/ And Isis with them is a star, called in 
Egyptian Sothis, and in Greek the Dog-star, which seems also 
to rule the rest of the stars. 

Note. I do not find the word c year' represented by a 
woman ; but in the zodiac of the Memnonium, the twelve 
months are enclosed within two female figures, each of 
which, as No. 37, represents the heavens ; and c the be- 
ginning of the year/ the heliacal rising of the dog-star, or 
time when that star rises with the sun, is a woman in a 
boat, No. 1049 ; and in the planisphere on the temple of 
Dendera we have a cow in a boat, No. 1048, for the same 
part of the heavens, each meaning the goddess Isis. 
Again, When they write a natural year otherwise, they draw 
a palm -branch. 

Note. As we have seen, in No. 953 and No. 954, a 
palm-branch, &A-I, and a T^ is the hieroglyphical word 
' year/ The Egyptian word was bait. 
Chap. 4. When they write a month, they draw the moon 

inverted, because they say that on its heliacal rising, 

when it has come to fifteen degrees [from the sun], it appears 
with its horns erect ; but in its decrease, after having completed 
the number of thirty days, it sets with its horns downward. 

Note. In all the hieroglyphics for ' month/ the moon 
has its horns downward, as in No. 977 ; but on the sar- 
cophagus of the wife of Amasis, in the British Museum, 
where the deceased is addressed ( Thy name is New Moon/ 
the horns are upwards, as in No. 962. The resemblance 
of this figure of the moon rising heliacally, when one day 
old, to the moon in a boat, seems to be the reason why 



26 INTRODUCTION. 

the other constellations, when rising heliacally, in the zo- 
diac of Dendera, are all in boats, as Nos. 1048 and 1049. 
Chap. 5. When writing the current civil year, iros, they draw 
the fourth part of an aroura [their term in the square measure 
of land] . 

Note. No. 954 seems to be the hieroglyphic here 

meant, and it may be compared with No, 953. But the 

palm-branch with a square is used when a number of 

years are spoken of; and a palm-branch with a ring is 

used in dates ; which is the reverse of what seems to be 

Horapollo's meaning. 

Chap. 7. Moreover the hawk is put for ' the soul/ from the 

meaning of the name; for among the Egyptians the hawk is 

called baieth. 

Note. In many sculptures we see a bird over the mouth 

of the dead man, meaning the soul which has quitted the 

body. In Coptic, iL^IT" is a hawk. In chapter 34 this 

bird is called the Phoenix. 

Chap. 8. When writing Ares and Aphrodite, they draw two 

hawks. 

Note. Horus is often drawn as a hawk and as a hawk- 
headed man, see No. 114; and the name of Athor, here 
called Aphrodite, is written with a hawk within a house, 
as No. 173. The word { Athor' is obtained from its re- 
semblance in sound to the Coptic words for ( House of 
Horus/ HI T" £/J0p. 

Chap. 9. To write ' mother/ or ' Minerva/ or c Juno/ 

or ' two drachms/ they draw a vulture . . . ; Minerva and Juno, 
because among the Egyptians Minerva is thought to preside over 

the upper hemisphere and Juno over the lower, and 

two drachms, because among the Egyptians the unit [of money] 
is two drachms. 

Note. The vulture, as in No. 1826, is the usual hiero- 
glyphic for ' mother/ In No. 39 we have the two god- 
desses Neith and Isis, representing heaven and earth. As 
our author remarks, a didrachm is the unit of money ; and 
in Coptic there is a close resemblance between JUL<LT, 



HORAPOLLO. 27 

mother, and Jta^LTA.^/Tj alone ; and in No. 635., mean- 
ing { sole king/ the vulture means sole. 
Chap. 13. When signifying a mundane god, or Fate, or the 
number five, they draw a star. 

Note. We find the star part of the word { God' on 
many occasions, as No. 296. 
No. 1069 is the numeral ' five.' 
Chap. 16. Again, when signifying the two equinoxes, they 
draw a cynocephalus sitting. 

Note. On the ceiling of the Memnonium at Thebes a 

sitting cynocephalus, or dog-headed monkey sitting on a 

landmark, marks the summer solstice, as No. 1065. We 

do not find it meaning the equinox. 

Chap. 17. When they wish to denote f courage/ they draw a 

lion. 

Note. A lion seems to have this meaning in the hiero- 
glyphics. See No. 1579 and No. 1584. 
Chap. 18. When writing ' strength/ they draw the foreparts 
of a lion. 

Note. No. 1587 is the word XOp,, victorious, and the 
latter half of the word Neit-cori, or Nitocris, c Neith the 
victorious/ It is spelt thor, but the instances are com- 
mon of th and ch being interchanged through the gut- 
tural sound. 
Chap. 21. When signifying the rising of the Nile, which in 

Egyptian they call NOUN, they sometimes draw a lion, 

and sometimes three large waterpots, and sometimes heaven and 
earth gushing forth water. 

Note. In Coptic we still have the word ItOTrt for 
ivater; and the god of the Nile is called Hapinoun, or 
( waterman/ No. 185; though more usually Hapimou, 
No. 184. 

We also meet with the title 'lord of the waters,' as 
No. 690, with a waterpot. 
Chap. 24. When they wish to write c protection/ they draw 
two human heads, that of a man looking inwards, and that of a 
woman looking outwards. 



28 INTRODUCTION. 

Note. No. 1354 and No. 1357 each mean ' guardian' 
and ' belonging to ;' and No. 1467 means ' hero/ 
Chap. 26. When they wish to denote an opening, they draw 
a hare. 

Note. Horapollo probably means a rabbit, as there is 
a resemblance between the hieroglyphic name of the ani- 
mal SO AT, No. 1877, and the Coptic word (TtUT^, to 
burrow. "When a rabbit occurs in the hieroglyphics it 
has that syllabic sound, and, with the letter It, it forms 
the very common word COTTeiT, just, as in No. 1692. 
Chap. 32. When they would represent ( delight/ they write the 
number sixteen. 

Note. We have a coin of Hadrian, with the figures 
Sixteen over a reclining figure of a river god, to denote 
that sixteen cubits was the height of rise in the Nile at 
all times wished for. We have other coins on which the 
river god is surrounded by sixteen little naked children 
or Cupids ; and it would almost seem that the Alexan- 
drian artist had, in this case, had in his mind the simila- 
rity in sound, in the Latin language, between Cupids and 
cubits. 
Chap. 28. To denote Egyptian letters, or a sacred scribe, or 
a boundary, they draw ink, and a sieve, and a reed. 

Note. In No. 328 the hieroglyphic for ' scribe' and 

( letters' we perhaps have these objects. On the Rosetta 

Stone this character is not used when Greek letters are 

spoken of. 

Again, And among the sacred scribes there is a sacred book, 

called Ambres, by which they judge as to a person lying sick, 

whether he will live or not. 

Note. We recognize this word on the Gnostic gems in 
the word { chambre.' 
Chap. 39. And again, when they would write e sacred scribe,' 
or prophet, or embalmer, or spleen, or smelling, or laughter, or 
sneezing, or government, or a judge, they draw a dog. 

Note. Anubis was the god of embalming; and the 
priest whose duty it was to embalm the dead is repre- 



HORAPOLLO. 29 

sented with a dog's head. See No. 148. He probably 
wore a mask of that form, for his dog's head is always 
large enough to hold a man's head concealed under it. 
A dog-headed sceptre, No. 1425, is also the hieroglyphic 
for c power/ But, by the help of the next chapter, we 
see that our author more particularly meant the dog 
Cerberus, which is more correctly an hippopotamus, and 
stands before Osiris in the judgment scene on the papyri, 
as the accuser of the deceased. 
Chap. 40. But when they would write ' government/ or a 
' judge/ they place before the dog a royal garment. 

Note. This is always the case in the judgment scene : 
it is the skin of some spotted beast, hanging on a pole, 
as No. 152. 
Chap. 43. When writing ' purity/ they draw fire and water. 
Note. We find a flame of fire and a bucket of water 
with this meaning. See No. 361, ' purifications/ 
, Chap. 44. When anything unlawful or hateful, they draw a 
fish. 

Note. The nearest hieroglyphic to this is the word 
' dead,' No. 1655, in which the letter M is a fish. 
Chap. 46. To denote manliness with prudence, they draw a 
bull. Note. No. 1624 is the word ' brave.' The arm is only 
the final vowel. From XX.&.CI, a bull, we get JUL^-Ce^ to 
fight, by the similarity of sound. 
Chap. 52. And when writing e knowledge/ they draw an ant. 
Note. The group, No. 663, forms the title of one of 
the four chief orders of the priesthood, and was also used 
by the king. 
Chap. 53. And when they wish to write < son/ they draw a 
goose. 

Note. No. 1789 is < son/ and No. 1797 ' daughter.' 
Chap. 54. For an unjust and ungrateful man they draw two 
claws of an hippopotamus turned downwards. 

Note. No. 1673 and No. 1475 the hieroglyphical 
groups for ( enemies' and ' fallen' begin with the charac- 
ter here spoken of. 



30 INTRODUCTION. 

Chap. 59. The serpent's name,, among the Egyptians, is meisi. 
Note. We find this name in hieroglyphics, as No. 1848, 
where it is followed by the determinative sign, to distin- 
guish it from c born/ We have the same word in Coptic 
for f serpent,' JULICI. 
Chap. 60. And otherwise, to denote a watchful king, they 
draw a serpent watching ; and in the place of the king's name, 
they draw a watcher. 

Note. There seems to be a mistake in this sentence ; 
and I should conjecture that, instead of the last word, 
cf>v\a/ca, a watcher, we should read ryv7ra, a vulture ; and 
that the group meant was No. 653, a f sole ruler,' or 
' monarch.' 
Chap. 62. When denoting a people obedient to a king, they 
draw a bee. 

Note. Our author seems to be thinking of the twig 
and insect, No. 642, the well-known title of the kings. 
It is strictly a double title, each used by an order of 
priests, and one peculiar to the upper, and one to the 
lower country. Hence it is to be translated ' king of 
Upper and Lower Egypt.' 
Chap. 70. When they speak of darkness, they draw the tail 
of a crocodile. 

Note. No. 1714 may be meant for a crocodile's tail. 
It is the word ' black,' and has that meaning from the 
similarity in sound between ^a/^77, Herodotus's name 
for a crocodile, and K<LJUL6, the Coptic for black. 

Book II. 

Chap. 3. Two feet joined, and walking, signify the path of 
the sun in the winter solstice. 

Note. In the zodiac of Dendera the twelve signs are 
enclosed within two female figures, representing the hea- 
vens, as in No. 39, where the feet represent the summer, 
and the hands the winter solstice. 
Chap. 5. The hands of a man, one holding a shield and the 
other a bow when drawn, denote the front of the battle. 



HORAPOLLO. 31 

Note. The hieroglyphic nearest to this is No. 1777, a 

man's arms, one holding a shield and the other a club. 

This is the word ' brave' or ' victorious/ 

Chap. 9. When we would denote the loins or constitution of 

a man, we draw the backbone; for some say that the seed is 

brought from thence. 

Note. No. 1807, which is a thigh-bone with the flesh 
on it, is the word ' son/ and may be the hieroglyphic 
here meant. 
Chap. 11. Two men joining their right hands denote concord. 
Note. We find this group in the hieroglyphics, as No. 
1494, and it seems to mean f friends/ 
Chap. 12. A man armed with a shield and a bow denotes a 
crowd. Note. We find a man with a bow for the word c sol- 
dier,' as No. 1765 ; and a man with an arrow, as No. 1 766 } 
with the same meaning. 
Chap. 29. Seven letters enclosed in two rings signify a song, 
or ' infinite/ or f fate/ 

Note. This seems to allude to the seven tens in No. 
1070, which mean the seventy days of mourning and em- 
balming between the death and burial, during which the 
funeral song may have been sung. 
Chap. 30. A straight line, together with a curved line or a 
ten, signify prose writing. 

Note. I know no such group as our author speaks of; 
but as we have seen, in No. 1070, a curved line is a ten. 
Chap. 32. When they wish to draw a woman who remains a 
widow till death, they draw a black dove. 

Note. The vulture, No. 1826, which is more often the 
word ' mother/ is also ' widow / as with us, the queen- 
mother is the queen-widow. Moreover, in Coptic, the 
words e mother' and { solitary' are nearly the same. 
Chap. 41. When they wish to signify a man that caught a 
fever and died from a stroke of the sun, they draw a blind beetle. 
Note. This is a good instance of how our author blun- 
ders about the meaning of a group, without quite under- 
standing it. The scarabseus rolling up a ball of dung 



32 INTRODUCTION. 

between its feet, as in No. 123, is one hieroglyphic for 
Horus-Ra, the sun. 
Chap. 56. When they wish to signify a king that governs 
absolutely and shows no mercy to faults, they draw an eagle. 

Note. The eagle and globe, No. 629, is the usual title 
of a king. The eagle is an A, the globe is Ra, the sun, 
making the word onf po, king ; and, with the article pre- 
fixed, the well-known word Pharaoh. 
Chap. 57. When they wish to signify a great cyclical renova- 
tion, they draw the bird phoenix. 

Note. We have a coin of the emperor Antoninus, with 
the word AIX2N, the age or period, written over an ibis, 
with a glory round his head. This was coined at the end 
of one sothic period, or great year, and the beginning of 
another. On each of these occasions the ibis or phoenix 
was said to return to earth. In hieroglyphics, the palm- 
branch, &&.1, with the letter T, No. 953 and No. 954, 
is the word c year ;' and the bird seems to have that 
meaning from the similarity of sound between that word 
and fL^-IT", a bird. In Greek the fabled bird seems only 
to have obtained its name phoenix from §oivi\;, the palm- 
branch. 
Chap. 72. When they wish to denote a man that passes fear- 
lessly through the evils which assail him, even until death, they 
draw the skin of an hyaena. For if a man clothe himself in this 
skin, and pass through any of his enemies, he will be injured by 
none, but pass through without fear. 

Note. The skin of an hyaena, as No. 152, is hung be- 
fore Osiris in the judgment scene, when the dead man is 
brought to his trial. And again, on the funereal tablets, 
we sometimes see the deceased clothed in an hyaena's 
skin. Either of these may have given rise to our author's 
remark. 
Chap. 73. When they wish to signify a man skilled in hea- 
venly matters, they draw a crane flying. 

Note. No. 307 is the word f high-priest/ in which the 
flying crane is the first syllable. 



HORAPOLLO. 33 

Chap. 115. When they wish to signify a prolific [or a gene- 
rous] man, they draw a house-sparrow. 

Note. No. 1600 is the word c great/ of which the first 
character is a sparrow or swallow. 
Chap. 116. When they would signify a man that is constant 
and uniform, they draw a lyre. 

Note. The character No. 1283 is the word ' like/ 
Chap. 118. When they wish to signify a man that distributes 
justice equally to all, they draw the feather of an ostrich. 

Note. No. 253 is the god or goddess of Truth. The 
letters are MO, forming the word JULHI, true. 
Chap. 119. When they wish to signify a man that is fond of 
building, they draw a man's hand. 

Note. No. 1718 is the word f to set up/ or build. 

The Tablet of Abydos may also be considered as a translated 
monument, by comparing it with Manetho's lists of kings. This 
is a slab of limestone discovered by Mr. W. J. Bankes, in 1818, 
on the wall of a ruined temple at Abydos, or This, one of the 
early capitals of Egypt. It contains three rows of kings' names, 
and had originally twenty-six ovals in each row. In the bottom 
row the two names of King Barneses II. were repeated thirteen 
times in various forms. The names in the top row are all broken, 
and hitherto they have added nothing to our knowledge. But 
the middle row is the most valuable historical record yet found 
in Egypt. It ends with the two names of Barneses II., before 
which are placed in single ovals the names of his predecessors 
on the throne. These were, when it was discovered and copied 
by Mr. Bankes, sixteen in number, and they have been, in all 
probability, twenty-four. These single ovals contain, in every 
case except one, the kings' first names, which have not usually 
been used by the Greek writers. But the second names which 
belong to each, and by which we name the kings, are repeatedly 
found on other monuments. The one excepted case is that of a 
queen ; and the queens have no second name. 

The following are the names in this tablet, with the second 
names added from other monuments, and the translations of 

D 



34 



INTRODUCTION. 



both, at the side. Remark, however, that the titles over some 
of the names in the following list are not those used in the 
tablet. 



First Names, 
being those of the Tablet. 



IAS 









Second Names, 
being those used in the authors. 

AMNMi ThR. 

Amunmai Thori. 



Ra Mes Ho. 

Meshophra. 






S R T S N. 
Osirtesen. 



Ra Mes Ko. 

Meskora. 






S R T S N. 
Osirtesen. 



Ra NSMAT. 




AMNMi ThR. 

Amunmai Thori. 




Ra S M A oB O. 

Scemiophra. 



Ra KB. 

Chebra. 




A MS. 

Amosis. 



TABLET OF ABYDOS. 



35 



First Names, 
being those of the Tablet. 



Ra Seb K. 

Sebekra. 




Second Names, 
being those used in the authors. 



A M N Th Ph. 
Amunotliph. 



Ra A Ho K. 




ThothMS MesHRa. 

Meshopkra Thothmosis. 



Ra A Ho N. 




Thoth M S Mes oB Ho. 

Meshoph Thothmosis. 



Ra Men Ho. 

Menhophra. 




ThothMS oBHo. 

Thothmosis. 



Ra A Ho 0. 

Ahora, or Horus. 






UUM 



£i 



d2 



A M N Th Ph. 
Amunothph. 



36 



INTRODUCTION. 



First Names, 
being those of the Tablet. 



Ra Men Ho 0. 

Menhophra. 



Ra Mi K. 

Mykera. 




2T-®ib -ft*" 






^itttfV 



Second Names, 
being those used in the authors. 



Thoth M S Mes Mes 0. 

Thothmosis. 



A M N 0, 4fc. 

Amunothph. 



AMNMi ANMNeb. 

Amunmai Anemneb. 



v^/ 



Ra Men P T T. 






HIP 
ft. 



Ra MSSO. 

Rameses. 



Ra Men Mi. 




PTH M 01 N. 

Oimenepthah. 



Ra Amun Mi M S So. 

Amunmai Rameses. 



MANETHO. 



37 



This list of kings' names on the Tablet of Abydos, or rather 
the second names which belong to them, may be now conveni- 
ently compared with the names given by the historian Manetho. 
A few other names have been added in italics, from other monu- 
ments mostly in the British Museum, in order to make the 
comparison more satisfactory, and to explain why the two lists 
differ. The first two names are from other tablets. Manetho 
has no earlier Theban names than these. 



From the Monuments. 



Amunmai Thori I. 

Osiri-gesen, or Osirtesen I. 

Amunmai Thori II. 

Osirtesen II. 

Labaris, on Tablet o/Karnak. 

Osirtesen III. 

Amunmai Thori III. 

Scemiophra. 

Chebra, on Tablet o/Karnak. 

Chebra-Amosis. 

Amunothph I. 

His widow Ames Athori. 

Meshophra Thothmosis I. 

Meshoph Thothmosis II. 

Thothmosis III. 
Amunothph II. 
Thothmosis IV. 
His widow Mautmes. 
Her daughter Amun Rathos. 
Amunothph III. of the vocal 

statue. 
Perhaps a brother. 
Amunmai Anemneb. 



From Manetho. 

11th dynasty of Thebans. 

Sixteen kings, of whom the 
last was Ammenemes. 
12th dynasty of Thebans. 

Sesonchosis, or Geson Goses. 

Ammenemes. 

Sesostris. 

Labaris of the Labyrinth. 

Ammeres. 

Ammenemes. 

Queen Scemiophris. 
18^ dynasty of Thebans. 

Amosis. 

Chebros. 

Amenoph. 

Amersis. 

Misaphris. 

Misphr agmuthosis . 

Tuthmosis. [tue. 

Amenophis of the vocal sta- 

Horus. 

Acherres. 

Eathos, or Athoris. 

Chebres. 
Acherres. 
Armeses, or Armais. 



38 INTRODUCTION. 

Rameses I. Harnesses. 

Oimenepthah I. Amenophath. 

19th dynasty of The bans. 
Rameses II. Sethos, or Rameses. 

Thus we have a record made in the reign of Rameses II., 
about the year b.c. 1150, and, in its broken state, reaching back 
through seventeen reigns, or nearly four hundred years, and 
teaching us how far we may rely upon the lists of kings in Ma- 
netho, Eratosthenes, Herodotus, and Diodorus. It agrees closely 
enough with Manetho to make us value highly his list of names, 
and at the same time to prove that he did not mean us to under- 
stand his numerous dynasties as all following in one succession. 
It shows that what he calls the Xllth dynasty was immedi- 
ately followed by his XVIIIth, which were both of Thebes, while 
the intermediate kings were at the same time reigning in other 
parts of Egypt. It agrees very little with Eratosthenes ; and it 
shows that Herodotus and Diodorus are for the most part writ- 
ing about the kings of Lower Egypt, and very little about these 
kings of Thebes. 

This tablet was first published by Mr. Bankes, in Salt's Essay, 
and since in Wilkinson's Materia Hieroglyphica, and in Burton's 
Eoocerpta. 

Lastly, the Greek authors have given us a long list of names, 
both those of the gods of the country and those of the kings, in 
which we may include the Ptolemies and the Roman emperors. 
All these are to be found in the hieroglyphics, though not always 
spelt very closely after the Greek pronunciation. Upon these 
names we chiefly rely for the force of the characters. 



VOCABULARY. 



The abbreviations made use of in these pages will be best 
explained by the following examples : 

JR. S. 5. means Rosetta Stone, line 5. 

E. I. 118, 20. The author's Egyptian Inscriptions, plate 118, 
line 20. 

M. H i. 33. Sir Gardner Wilkinson's Materia Hieroglyphica, 
part i. plate 33. 

H 66, Im. Hieroglyphics of the Egyptian Society, by Dr. 
Young, plate 66. I m points to the spot on 
the plate. 

S-E. 5. - Hieroglyphics of the Syro-Egyptian Society, 
plate 5. 

M. R. 115. Rosellini's Monumenti Regale, plate 115. 

M. C. 39. Rosellini's Monumenti Civile, plate 39. 

B. 57. - Burton's Excerpta, plate 57. 

K. 153. - The author's Chronology and Geography of An- 
cient Egypt-, the 153d name in the list of 
kings. 



41 



VOCABULARY. 



1. The Sun, in sound ra, from the Coptic pH; " Sevechus, 
beloved by Pthah tbe lord of Memphis, living like Ra for ever/' 
E. I. 36, 1. " Oimenepthah, beloved by Pthah-sokar-Osiris, 
giver of life, like Ra" E. L 37, b 5. The character is a simple 
imitation of the sun itself. 

2. The same; ei The boat of Ra" is written under the prow 
of the vessel in the ceremony of carrying out the statues of the 
gods on the Nile, E. I. 28. Here the globe is the letter R, and 
a vowel is added to complete the word RA. 

3. The same, with the sacred asp as an ornament; " His fa- 
ther, a priest of the great Ra; his mother, a priestess of the 
great Ra," E. L 39, 3. 

4. The same, with two asps ; u The priest, the son of Ra, 
lord of battles, Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah and Isis, 
loving his parents, loving his sister," H. 65, K o. 

5. The same, forming the last syllable of the word OURO, 
king; H. 7. The character for 'life/ which hangs from the asp, 
is only an ornament. 

6. The same ; a figure of the god. In numerous places it is 
the first syllable of the name of Rameses. 

7. The winged Sun, at the head of numerous funereal tablets. 
" The lord of the country, the great god, the sun," E. L 3. 

8. The Sun, with another form of the A ; see No. 19. 

9. The figure of the Sun, which follows his name in E. I. 15. 
He is there presenting the word ' life' to the word c king/ the 
title of Rameses II. This is not unlike the enactment in the 
Rosetta Stone, that the god shall present the weapon of victory 
to the statue of the king. 

10. A female Ra, over the head of the goddess in B. 38. The 
first letter is the feminine article prefixed. She presides over the 



42 VOCABULARY. 

month of Thoth, or rather over the sign of Cancer in the zodiac. 

11. Amun, the name of a god; " The high priest belonging 
to Amun" H. 43, F r. He was the god of Thebes, which city, 
in Nahum, ch. iii. 8, is called No-Amun, the great Amun. Most 
of the kings of Thebes were called Amunmai/ beloved by Amun/ 
The word may be derived from £JUloru, to govern. 

12. The same ; " The priest of Amun, Osorkon," H. 43, H 1. 
This is spelt with the letters M, N, for Amun, as in Coptic 
JULOttl is used for ^JULOttl. 

13. The same, being the figure of the god, distinguished by 
his high crown and the ostrich feather in his hand ; it is often 
the first two syllables of the name Amunmai Rameses. 

14. Amun-Ra, a god uniting the two characters of Amun 
and Ra. He was particularly worshipped at Thebes. "Amun- 
Ra king of the gods," E. I. 43, 3, 1. 

15. The same; u Amun-Ra, lord of cities, lord of heaven," 
E. I. 22, where the god is presenting life and power to Amun- 
othph III. 

16. The same; " The deified priest of Amun-Ra," E. I. (se- 
cond series) 2, 4. The syllable Ra is here spelt with characters 
not usually used in the name of the god. 

17. Over the figure of a god in B. 49. It is also part of the 
prenomen of Rameses II., K. 98 and 99, which is translated by 
Hermapion " Whom the Sun approves." The Anubis staff is A, 
the ostrich-feather mun, and the globe RA. 

18. The same, in the prenomen of Shishank II., K. 153. The 
ostrich-feather alone is in the place of the god with the feather 
on his head in the last word. 

19. The same; E. I. 59, 29. The letters are M, N, R, A. The 
letter m has the force of AM. 

20. The same ; " On the grand festival days, at the going out 
from the temple of the portable statue of the god Amun-Ra, they 
shall also carry out the shrine and portable statue of the god 
Epiphanes most gracious," R. S. 8. 

21. Adon-Ra, a god mentioned on the sarcophagus of the 
wife of Amasis, a few years before Cambyses, E. I. 117, 17; and 
also in the reign of Tiberius, E. I. 119, 2. 



VOCABULARY. 43 

22. The same. At Alabastron he was worshipped as a Sun, 
every one of whose rays ends in a hand, a sculpture probably of 
the reign of Artaxerxes Longimanus ; B. 6. The name is pos- 
sibly from the Hebrew word \1&, lord, 

23. The same ; over the figure of the god Ra, in a tablet of 
the reign of Rameses II., B. 57. It must be read Adon-Ra-Hfo ; 
see No. 34, where Hfo is a name for the god Nef or Knef. 

24. Oben-Ra ; over the figure of a god on the sarcophagus of 
Amyrtseus, E. I. 30. The god's two horns are added as a de- 
terminative sign. Also without the horns on the sarcophagus of 
the queen of Amasis, E. I. 118, 17. 

25. The same; under the figure of the sun, on the triple 
mummy-case in Dr. Lee's museum, of about the same date. It 
may possibly be the Persian mode of pronouncing Amun-Ra. 

26. The same ; on an ivory fragment in the British Museum, 
found at Nineveh. It is spelt Aobeno-Ra. 

27. Nef, followed by the figure of the god with a ram's head ; 
E. I. 4, 4. He was worshipped at Syene, where there is a Greek 
inscription to him, of the time of Caracalla, under the name of 
Jupiter Ammon Cenubis. Strabo says that Knuphis was wor- 
shipped at Elephantine. From rtJCJI 5 a spirit. 

28. The same ; " Amunothph III., the holy son of Nef," H. 
56, E s. 

29. The same; " Nef, lord of the Nile," over the sitting fi- 
gure of the god, H. 57, C d. " Nef lord of Upper Egypt," E. I. 
39, 7. 

30. Probably the same, see No. 33 ; over a god represented 
by the scarabseus, and called "Eather of the gods," M. H. i. 20. 
This character for NP was in later times used for a B. See the 
Alphabet. 

31. Nef-Ra, a god uniting the two characters of the spirit 
and the sun; H. 56, Yu, where Amunothph III. is sacrificing to 
the boat of Nef, which holds statues of several gods, and is orna- 
mented at each end with a ram's head. 

32. The same; E. /. 39, 7. Here the word f Nef has a 
plural termination, in which it agrees with Anubis, No. 140 and 
No. 141. The three strokes did not merely convey the idea of 



44 VOCABULARY. 

plurality, but the vowel sound or syllable with which plural 
nouns usually ended. Thus the god's name was Nefo-Ra. In 
No. 29 and No. 31 it also ends with o. 

33. The same; E. I. 59, 3. This confirms our No. 30. 

34. The same ; E. T. 28, where he has the usual figure with 
a ram's head and the sun between his horns, and is being carried 
in his boat on the Nile in grand procession. The name is Hfo. 

35. The same; M. H. i. 3, where he is accompanied in his 
boat with seven other gods, a steersman, and the deceased wor- 
shipper. 

36. Amun-Nef ; H. 43, I q. 

37. The goddess Neith ; Denon, pi. 129, where she is sur- 
rounded with stars, and represents the canopy of the heavens. 

38. The same ; M. H. i. 3, where the god Nef-Ra is standing 
under this serpent as a canopy, and is accompanied by the name, 
No. 35. 

39. Neith and Isis, the goddesses of the heavens and earth ; 
Denon, pi. 129. These three are pictures, not hieroglyphics, but 
here introduced to explain the following groups. 

40. The same, or rather the Heavens and the Earth ; " Pthah 
ruler of the heavens and the earth," B. 56. 

41. The Heavens; " Isis the great mother-goddess, like Ra, 
queen of the heavens" E. I. 4, 1 . Also heavenly ; " The hea- 
venly king, the brave son of Amun," is at the head of the obelisk, 
E. I. 42, 3. Also the ; " Chief of the soldiers" is a title of 
Hapimen, in E. I. 44, 28. In Coptic, TIK is both the and the 
heavens. In No. 630 it is the first syllable of the word Pharaoh, 
or Pa-ouro, the king. 

42. The same; " The gods rulers of the heavens" E. I. 57, 
14. Also the goddess Neith ; " Neith, mother of the gods and 
queen of heaven," M. H. i. 12. It is the letters N, T, followed 
by the determinative sign. 

43. The same, followed by the feminine termination ; " Ho- 
nour to Neith" M.H. i. 12, where the goddess is distinguished 
by a jar on her head, which is the letter n of this group. 

44. The same, used as an adjective; " Honour to the Neith- 
like, Osiris-like divine wife, the queen deceased," E. I. 57, 8. 



VOCABULARY. 45 

45. The same, used for the heavens; "Isis-Athor queen of 
the heavens" E. 1.2. 

46. The same, followed by a common determinative sign for 
this goddess ; E. I. 16. 

47. The same, followed by another determinative sign; 
" Neith, queen of Upper Egypt, the great divine mother ;" 
" Neith, queen of Lower Egypt, the lady of Sais," E. I. 16. This 
goddess was sometimes taken for the Minerva of the Greeks. 

48. The same, being the first syllable of the name of queen 
Nitocris ; K. 61, translated by Eratosthenes ' Minerva the vic- 
torious/ 

49. The determinative sign following the name of this god- 
dess in H. 66, Q o. She has the sun and an asp on her head ; 
and her sex is marked by the lotus flower in her hand. 

50. Chonso, a god who forms a trinity with his father Amun- 
Ea and his mother Maut or Athor ; M. R. 48. Like Horus, he 
has a large lock of hair hanging over one ear, as a mark of youth- 
ful rank. The three gods above quoted formed, in later days at 
least, a regular trinity in unity. According to Plutarch, Amun- 
Ra made himself three-fold, because everything perfect has three 
parts. We find this name as part of the name Pet-chonsis, or 
priest of Chonso, on a papyrus in Young's Discoveries. 

51. The same; M. H. i. 24. Here the twig has the force of 
S, while in the last it was the syllable so. 

52. Seb; " Seb, father of the gods," M. H. i. 11. " Honour 
to Seb, god of gods, with offerings of oil, oxen, and geese from 
the lady," E. I. 51. Seb was the god to whom the seventh day 
was sacred, and it is not improbable that the Hebrew word sab- 
bath was borrowed from the Egyptian, being the day of Seb. 

■53. Probably the same ; it is one of the titles of Sevechus, 
M. H. i. 36. 

54. The same; over the figure of the god, B. 22. 

55. Seb, and the other gods, those probably that were wor- 
shipped in the same temple with him ; E. I. 36. 

56. A female Seb ; B. 22. The name is followed by the asp, 
the determinative sign of a goddess. 

57. Sabak ; written under the figure of the crocodile-headed 



46 VOCABULARY. 

god, B. 15. He is probably the same as Seb. He was the god 
of Ethiopia, where crocodiles are more common than in Egypt. 
King Sabakothph was named after him, as also was king Seve- 
chus. 

58. The same; M. H. i. 35, and E. L 53, b 13. 

59. The same; the figure or determinative sign after the 
name, in M. H. i. 35. 

60. The same; part of the name Sabakothph, No. 1961. 

61. Sabak-Ra, a god formed of the two gods; " Sabak-Ra, 
lord of Ombos," M. H. i. 35. 

62. Chem, a god who takes his name from KKJULH, Egypt ; 
M. H.i.6; B. 50, 4. It is spelt KEMF. The bull is e&e, and 
also the determinative sign, being the bull Mnevis of Heliopolis. 

63. The same; he was the god of generation, and had the 
attributes of Priapus. He holds a whip in his right hand, while 
his left is under his dress, H. 12 ; M. H. i. 6. 

64. The same ; over the figure of a god in the boat of Ra, 
E. I. 28 and 31. It is spelt km. 

65. Amun-Ehe-Chem ; over the same god, on the temple of 
Karnak, H. 12; M. H. i. 6. We have here a T instead of a K; 
but we shall see many other words in which it has that force. It 
probably was sounded as a guttural. The first half of this name, 
Amun-Ehe, is the word Mnevis, the Greek name for the bull of 
Heliopolis. 

66. Chem, spelt thm ; but, as in the last, the T is the gut- 
tural. This is the god worshipped in the neighbourhood of He- 
liopolis ; and he gives its name to the city called Thoum in the 
Itinerary, and Etham in Exodus xiii. 20. He forms a trinity 
with Aroeris and Ra, in E. I. 46, 4. In M. R. 39 he wears the 
double crown, and is in company with Mando, who has the sun 
on his head. " Chem, lord of the land of San," E. I. (second 
series) 79, 7. 

67. The same; E. I. 59, 33. 

68. The same, without the final M, which in many words was 
dropt from indistinct utterance ; " She is Adon-Ra, defender of 
Tanis ; she is Chem, the father of the gods," E. I. 117, 17. " Ho- 
nour to Chem, lord of Tanis, with various offerings," E. 1.51. 



VOCABULARY. 47 

69. The same ; " Amunmai Rameses, beloved by Chem the 
bull/ 3 B. 51. This is on the fallen obelisk of Alexandria, which 
once stood at Heliopolis. 

70. Probably the same ; E. I. (second series) 34. It may be 
compared to No. 64. The tall crown peculiar to the god Amun 
may have the force of an M. 

71. Amun-Ra-Chem, a trinity in unity, or god with the attri- 
butes of three ; " Honour to Amun-Ra-Chem } lord of the palace," 
meaning the Memnonium of Thebes, B. 46. 

72. The same ; M. H. i. 2 ; E. I. (second series) 34. 

73. Horus-Chem. He is called Lord of Tanis on an inscrip- 
tion in that city, B. 40. 

74. Probably Chem, though spelt khb ; " The temple of the 
lord Chem, guardian of the city of Hanes," E. 1.16. B is some- 
times interchanged with M, as D with N, arising from the use of 
MP to represent B, and NT to represent D. 

75. Amun-Chem ; " Son of the priest of Amun-Chem, a guar- 
dian," E. I. 35, a 14. 

76. Isis ; " Isis, the great mother-goddess, like Ra, queen of 
heaven, mistress of the gods," E. I. 4, 1. The throne is the 
word I SI ; it is followed by the feminine termination. Plutarch 
says that Isis was sometimes called juuovd, evidently from JUULV, 
mother, with the article postfixed. In the Greek inscriptions she 
is called the goddess with ten thousand names. She is known by 
the throne worn on her head as an ornament. 

77. The same ; E. I. 28, where she is in the boat of Ra, and 
is in the form of an asp. 

78. The same ; M. H. i. 14, where she has the cow's head, 
and is suckling her son Horus. It is spelt Hisi. 

79. The same ; over her figure in H. 67, K y. The first cha- 
racter is probably a vowel. 

80. The same, being the letter s, with the feminine termina- 
tion ; over the usual figure of the goddess, H. 68, K s. 

81. The same, spelt Isiti; M. H.i. 1. 

82. The same; " Ms, queen of heaven," E. I. 1, 1. It is in 
sound like the last, from C^^ an arrow. 

83. Probably the same ; over the figure of an asp, H. 7, X v. 



48 VOCABULARY. 

84. The same ; " Isis, queen of Upper and Lower Egypt/' 
M. H. i. 39. 

85. The same ; " Son of the great priest of Isis, queen of the 
land/' E. I. 77, 6. It is spelt Hisi, as this serpent is an H. 

86. The same ; over her figure holding the infant Horus in 
her arms, M. H. i. 16. The cross-bars are arrows, and have the 
force of S. 

87. The same ; " Honour to Isis the queen of Dendera," M • 
H. i. 44. The first letter is perhaps an S. It is known else- 
where only in the name of a city, and followed by an N, which 
may be San or Tanis. 

88. The same; M. H. i. 44. 

89. The figure of the goddess following her name, as the de- 
terminative sign; H. 68, Kf. 

90. The same ; M. H. i. 47. The star that follows is probably 
the letter S. 

91. The same; " Horus the son of Isis" M. H. i. 17. 

92. Mother-goddess, a common title of Isis ; H. 67, R i. 

93. The same; presenting the character for c victory' to the 
title of king Psammetichus, H 7, V m. 

94. The same ; presenting the character for ' life' to the title 
of king Nectanebo, H. 9, Fe. 

95. The asp, a determinative sign for any goddess, but for 
Isis the favourite goddess in particular ; presenting the character 
for ' victory' to the title of king Nectanebo, H. 7, X v. 

96. Hecate, one of the countless titles of Isis; "Isis the 
great Hecate," M. H. i. 14. From &IK, a witch. The three k's 
have the force of KOU. 

97. The same ; " The mother-goddess Isis, the great Hecate," 
M. H. i. 9. She has a lion's head. Apuleius says (Metam. lib. 
xi.) that Hecate is another name for Isis. 

98. The same ; M . H. i. 10 and 14, followed by the asp as the 
determinative sign of a goddess. 

99. Probably Sorceries; E. I. 23, a 3. It is the word 
Hecate, followed by the termination of a noun in the plural. If 
we compare these latter groups with No. 1153, we shall see that 
£,IK, a witch, or magician, may be written with the same cha- 



VOCABULARY. 49 

racters, as thok the mast of a ship, and hence the use of the 
determinative sign to distinguish them. 

100. Pasht; but the first character is better drawn in the 
Alphabet. " Honour to the great Pasht, beloved by Pthah, queen 
of heaven, mistress of the world/' M. H. i. 8. She presides over 
the fourth month, or the fourth sign in the zodiac after the sum- 
mer solstice, B. 58. Amunothph III. is beloved by this goddess, 
E. I. 47, d 1. She gave her name to the city of Bubastis, or 
Abou-pasht; and she was most probably the same person as 
Nepthys the sister goddess, as Ovid in his Metamorphoses, ix. 
686, calls her so. 

101. Osiris ; " Prayers to Osiris/' E. I. 6. The throne is 
I Si, and the eye Rl, though in every other case the eye is a 
vowel. It is probably here used for the mouth, as more charac- 
teristic of the god. Plutarch says that Hellanicus called the god 
Hysiris. 

102. The same, followed by the determinative sign of the 
god ; ' ' A royal offering dedicated to Osiris lord of Amenti, the 
righteous good king immortal," E. I. 2, 1. Also as an adjec- 
tive applied to dead persons, Osiris-like, or deified; "The 
Osiris-like king Amyrtseus," E. I. 29. In the same way we often 
see the deceased persons hold the two sceptres of Osiris, the whip 
and crosier. 

103. The same ; " Horus the son of Isis and the son of Osi- 
ris/' M. H. i. 17. This less usual way of writing the god's name 
is perhaps that which Plutarch describes when he says that Osiris 
was spelt with a sceptre for OS, and an eye for iri. 

104. The same, followed by the word ' god' instead of the de- 
terminative sign ; " Honour to Osiris, lord of Amenti," E. I. 3. 

105. The same, followed by the word ' king / " The Osiris-like 
Amyrtseus deceased," E. I. 31. 

106. The same ; " Horus the son of Isis and the son of Osi- 
ris/' M. H. i. 17. Also on the temple of Dendera, B. 21. This 
use of the sun in this word instead of the eye is perhaps not older 
than the Ptolemies. 

107. The same, with a couch in place of the throne ; over 
the figure of the god, M. H. i. 13. Also as an adjective ; " The 

E 



50 VOCABULARY. 

Osiris-like priest of Amun-Ra, king of the gods, Osorkon de- 
ceased, son of the priest of Amun-Ra, king of the gods, Shishank 
deceased, the royal son of King Amunmai Osorkon," Denon, 
pi. 137. 

108. The same ; " Osiris the son of Neith and the son of 
Seb," M. H i. 13. "In the year LXIL, on the twenty-ninth day 
of Pachon, of the reign of King Rameses II., beloved by Osiris 
lord of Amenti," E. I. 8. As the king was beloved by this god 
he was probably dead, and thus his series of dates may have been 
continued by his successors : he could hardly have reigned sixty- 
two years. 

109. The same, with his peculiar crown ; it forms part of the 
name of the father of Rameses II. As an o, the name is Oimen- 
epthah ; as OSI, Osimenpthah, or Osimundyas. 

110. The same, spelt OSRA; with the figure of the god; 
M. H i. 13. 

111. The same; " I am Osiris, lord of the deified persons," 
E. I. 59, 48. 

112. The same as an adjective; in the sentence last quoted. 

113. The same as a plural adjective; " She is Osiris, the dei- 
fied mistress of the deified persons, Osiris deceased," E. I. 58,43. 

114. Hours; " Horus the avenger of his father, the son of 
Isis, the son of Osiris," M. H. i. 17. He has a hawk's head, and 
wears the double crown of Upper and Lower Egypt. 

115. The same ; " Horus the son of Isis," M. H. i. 17. Be- 
hind the hawk is the sacred whip often held by Osiris. 

116. The same ; " Thothmosis III. beloved by Horus, lord of 
the temple," E. I. (second series) 41, 4. 

117. Horus the son of Isis, so called to distinguish him from 
the elder Horns who stands beside him ; E. I. 8 ; E. I. 34. 

118. The same, spelt Hora, as the scarabseus has the force 
of H or HO ; " King Amunmai Rameses, beloved by Horus, iy 
E. 1. 15. The figure of the god has a sun on his head. It is one 
of the three characters into which the god Horus was divided, 
namely, Horus the king the son of Isis, Horus the sun, or Horus- 
Ra, and Horus the scarabseus. 

119. The same; E. I. 15. 



VOCABULARY. 51 

120. The same ; " Like Horus victorious in battles/' B. 50, 3. 

121. Chem-Horus ; « Thothmosis III. beloved by Chem-Ho- 
rus/ 3 E. I. (second series) 41, 2. 

122. Ra-Horus, or Aroeris ; followed by a figure, E. I. 32. 

123. The same ; E. I. 29, at the bottom. Horapollo says that 
the scarabseus meant the world, OO, but it also meant dung, 
&COpI; hence it may have the force of HOR. 

124. The same; E. I. 37, b 2, where Oimenepthah is in his 
prenomen called beloved by this god. This group is Ra-Horo, 
and it may be compared to Ba-Amun, No. 18. 

125. The same ; " Horus-Ra lord of heaven/' E. I. 46, where 
he is in the boat with the sun on his head, accompanied by 
Horus. He presides over the twelfth month, or the sign of the 
zodiac which precedes the summer solstice ; B. 59. 

126. The same ; over the hawk-headed god with the sun on 
his head, M. H. i. 4. 

127. Amunra-Horus, a god with the same figure as Horus- 
Ra; M.H. i. 2. 

128. The same, spelt rara; E. I. 46, 4, where he forms a 
trinity with Horus and Chem. 

129. The same; H. 67, S n. 

130. The same ; " Like Horus victorious in battles, like Ho- 
rus-Ra/' B. 50, 3. 

131. The same; " Honour to Horus-Ra the great god, lord 
of heaven/' E. I. 34, where he has a hawk's head, and the sun 
as an ornament. This is spelt ar-ra, which is not far from the 
Greek name Aroeris. On the mummy-cases and papyri, where 
the gods are most numerous in their various characters, we find 
three with the name of Horus and the hawk's head ; one with the 
double crown, one with the sun, and one with the scarabseus. 

132. A female Horus-Ra; M. H i. 46. She has the sun 
between cow's horns on her head. 

133. Antjbis, spelt ANP; over the figure of the god, who has 
the head of a dog or fox or jackal, and wears the double crown, 
M. H. i. 18. 

134. The same ; " Anubis the god, the son of Osiris," M . H. 
i. 18. 

e 2 



52 VOCABULARY. 

135. The same, spelt Anepo; over the animal in E. I. 1. 

136. The same; "A sacred gift to Osiris Pet-amenti, the 
good judge ruling for ever, to Pthah-Sokar lord of the temple, 
and to Anubis," E. I. 2, 1. 

137. The same ; E. L 32, where each of the gods is a spitting 
serpent standing on the point of his tail. The horns have the 
force of N, or rather of an. 

138. The same; " She is Horus, she is Thoth, she is the 
moon, she is the holy Anubis/ 3 E. I. 116, 27. 

139. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Osiris Pet-amenti, lord 
of Upper Egypt, lord of Lower Egypt, king of the gods ; to Ho- 
rus the avenger of his father ; to Isis the great mother-goddess ; 
to Anubis of Upper Egypt ; and to Anubis of Lower Egypt," 
E. I. 39, 6. The latter half of this character is a B or P. 

140. The same; "The thrice good Anubis" is followed by 
the determinative sign, E. I. 6. 

141. The same; "The priest Osirtesen III. deceased, he- 
loved by Anubis" E. I. 6. Here the three p's have the force 
of PO. 

142. The same, the determinative sign which follows his 
name ; E. I. 6. The straight tail is hardly that of a dog, though 
Ovid calls him ' latrator Anubis'; and Laborde has drawn the dog 
of Arabia Petrsea exactly like this figure. Perhaps it is meant 
for the jackal. 

143. The same ; the funereal tablet E. I. 14 is dedicated to 
this god; and at the head of the tablet E. I. 1 are two such 
gods, one of Upper and one of Lower Egypt. 

144. The same, with the sacred whip ; E. I. 4, 2. See E. I. 
72, 4, where we have six gods of the name of Anubis distin- 
guished by the part of Egypt to which each belonged. 

145. The same; he is called "like his father Amun-Ra;" 
M. R. 77. It is spelt anbte. 

146. The same ; M. H. i. 30, where the figure is the square- 
eared dog, No. 149. 

147. The same, the determinative sign which follows his 
name; H. 72, Nr; H. 71, Yp. 

148. The same; H. 68, L o. He is here, as in the sculpture 



VOCABULARY. 53 

beneath the inscription, laying out an embalmed body on a lion- 
shaped couch. This was one of the peculiar offices of Anubis, 
and he was particularly addressed on the funereal tablets, in com- 
mon with Osiris, the judge of the dead and lord of Amenti. 

149. The same ; " Beloved by Anubis lord of Thebes/' B. 40, 
10. Also in E. I. (second series) 43, 6, where King Oimenepthah 
is said to be beloved by this god. This square-eared dog with 
an upright tail was perhaps the older form of the god. It seems 
meant for the Abyssinian feneck, so remarkable for its ears. 
Afterwards he may have been changed into a jackal. 

150. The same; B. 45, 14. This character in numerous in- 
scriptions is the first letter in the name of King Oimenepthah, 
though in numerous other inscriptions it has been carefully cut 
out to make way for the figure of Osiris, No. 109, which has also 
a vowel force as a letter; the one is A, the other o. 

151. The same; E. I. 23, b 2. 

152. This leopard's skin hanging on a pole accompanies Anu- 
bis, E. I. 4, 2 ; E. I. 1 . It also accompanies Osiris when he is 
judge of the dead. 

153. Nephthys, a goddess who usually accompanies Isis; 
cc Nephthys the divine sister, the powerful great daughter of 
Ba," M. H. i. 16. " Nephthys the great sister-goddess," H. 73. 
She is called Bubastis by Ovid, in Metam. ix. 686. Her name 
is written by means of a dish neb, and a house El, or rather the 
house tha-ei. She usually wears this character as an ornament 
on her head. 

154. The same ; E. I. 28, where she is in the form of an asp, 
and accompanies the rest of the gods in the boat of Ba. 

155. Sister-goddess, the usual title of Nephthys, meaning 
that she is the sister of Isis; E. I. 4, 1. See Sister, No. 1843. 

156. This is not a hieroglyphic, but a picture at the head of 
a funereal tablet; Denon, pi. 137. It is the god with arms out- 
stretched over the world, as in some Italian pictures. Some of 
the earlier Boman Catholic artists painted the Almighty as in 
this figure, with the head downwards. 

157. Fortune, or Providence, copied from the last; " The 
blessings of a kingdom remaining to himself and his children for 



54 VOCABULARY. 

ever, with good fortune" R. S. 5. Beneath the arms is a human 
head turned downwards. 

158. Funerals; "Gave for their funerals/' R. S. 3. This 
character probably gained this meaning from being at the head 
of funereal papyri. 

159. The name of the winged sun at the head of the tablet 
E. I. 4. 

160. The same title applied to the Sphinx, on the tablet be- 
tween the fore legs of the colossus near Memphis, H. 80. 

161. The same applied to Horus-Ra, H. 62. This may per- 
haps be the title Armachim, which is given to the sun in a Greek 
tablet addressed to C. Balbillus in the reign of Nero, in the Bri- 
tish Museum, published in Boechk's Corpus, No. 4699. 

162. The name of the winged sun at the head of tablets 
E. I. 1 and 34. 

163. The good genius, at the head of tablet E. I. 6. The 
three lyres, or arrows, are thrice good. From fLOv, an eye, we 
seem to have the word Baal, the name of the Babylonian and 
Phoenician god. 

164. The name of a god represented as an eye, E. I. 51. It 
may also be the word eye, when the star Aldebaran is called the 
bulFs eye. See No. 1040, which may so be translated. 

165. Thoth, the thrice great Hermes of the Greeks, the god 
of letters, " Thoth the lord of the scribes." " Thoth, lord of Osh- 
moonayn the great city," M. H. i. 26. The prop on which the 
bird stands is the second t. The god is often represented as a 
man with the head of an ibis. 

166. The same; M. H. i. 26. 

167. The same ; n Thoth, lord of the priests," E. L 39, 7. 

168. The same; M.H. i. 26. 

169. The same ; " Beloved by Thoth, the righteous ruler of 
Ethiopia," if. 93. A hand is the letter T. 

170. The same, followed by the ibis as the determinative 
sign; M. H. i. 26. It is spelt A, TH, A, T, E. 

171. Thoth-Hfo, two names united to make one; B. 57. 

1 72. A female Thoth, who is counting the years on a notched 
stick, like Thoth. She is called " mistress of the scribes," M. H. 
i. 40. ' 



VOCABULARY. 55 

173. Athor, the goddess of love and beauty ; " King Ptolemy 
and Queen Cleopatra, gods Philometores, beloved by Athor" on 
the temple at Philse, H. 64. The city of Atar-bechis was called 
Aphroditopolis by the Greeks, which identifies her with Venus. 
Also the month of that name, H. 35, where it is followed by a 
Greek translation. It is spelt HI, house, &&., of, OTpo 5 Horus. 

174. The same, with the usual feminine termination; M. H. 
i. 17. 

175. The same; on the temple of Philse, H. 64. Within the 
oval the characters are the house, and a sceptre for OTpo^ king, 
thus spelling the word as above. 

176. The same; " Sacred to the mother, the great goddess 
Athor," M. R. 86, where she forms a trinity with Amun-Ra and 
Rameses II., who is in the character of their son. 

177. The same ; " The mother, the great queen Athor," E. I. 
119. The name is followed by the figure of a lioness as the 
determinative sign. 

178. The same; M.H. i. 17. But this' figure of the cobra 
capella snake is not peculiar to any one goddess. 

179. The name of a goddess with a mouse's head, M. H. i. 20. 
Probably Athor, as Strabo says that the mouse was worshipped 
by the Athribitse, whose city Athribis was named after her. 

180. The name of a god called the son of Athor, and in figure 
like Horus; M. H. i. 17. It is spelt Am. He may be Chonso, 
who was the son of Amun-Ra and Athor. 

181. The same; M. H. i. 17. 

182. This also seems to be the name of a god; E. I. 32, 4. 
He is holding up both arms in the act of giving praise. It may 
be derived from T^LIA., honour. 

183. Hapimou, the god of the Nile; B. 59. As from ctjH, 
wood, is formed £/*JUUloje ? a carpenter, and from rtOT^ gold, 
g^HItcnffij a goldsmith, so is this name for waterman formed 
from JULCJ0OV, water, with the same prefix. 

184. The same, over the hermaphrodite god of the Nile in 
M. H. i. 42, where he is called the father of the gods. The name 
is here followed by the determinative sign for water. 

185. The same, spelt Hapinou. In his left hand he carries 



56 VOCABULARY. 

flowers, with his right he pours water out of a jar ; B. 17. The 
word for water must have been originally spelt NOU ; and after 
its change the sign for water kept the force of N. 

186. The same; " Honour to Hapimou father of the gods/' 
E. I. (second series) 45, 4. 

187. Mando; probably the god of Mendes and of Hermon- 
this, to whom the goat was dedicated. He is, like Horus-Ra, 
with a hawk's head, M. H. i. 33, and M. R. 39. 

188. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Amun-Ra lord of the 
world, Mando lord of Hermonthis, and Osiris lord of Amenti," 
on a statue of Mandothph, E. I. 35, a 5. 

189. The same, with another form of the D or T ; M. H. i. 33. 

190. Mando-Ra, a god formed of the two names. 

In the British Museum are several monuments on 
which the name and figure of Amun-Ra are carved in a 
deep cutting, over an alteration. It seems probable that 
the name in these cases is a restoration ; that Amun-Ra 
was the god originally honoured ; that his name was cut 
out to make way for a new god, and then at some future 
time Amun-Ra was restored. There is however one mo- 
nument in the Museum in which, from the incomplete 
restoration of Amun-Ra, we learn that this god, Mando- 
Ra, was the usurper of the honour. 

191. The goddess of the year; her name is spelt BAI ; M. H. 
i. 46. As &<LI is also a palm-branch, we find the palm-branch 
used for the word ( year/ If this word is pronounced with an ini- 
tial vowel it becomes IB I, and hence the ibis was used for the 
year. Again, as the palm-branch was by the Greeks called phoe- 
nix, from its country Phoenicia, they called the bird also phoenix. 

192. The same, from pOAAJII, the year; over the goddess 
carrying a palm-branch, B. 25. Callixenes, as quoted in Athe- 
nseus, lib. v., says that a woman carrying a palm-branch walked 
in the procession on the accession of Ptolemy Philadelphus, and 
was meant for the lustrum of five years. 

193. Perhaps the same, spelt Ranno ; M . H. i. 48. She pre- 
sides over the eighth portion of the zodiac, B. 59. 

194. The god of the day; E. I. 28, top. See No. 1006. 



VOCABULARY. 57 

195. Pthah ; " Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah," three 
times on the Rosetta Stone. He was the Vulcan of the Greeks, 
and the god of Memphis ; and when Diodorus Siculus says that 
Vulcan presided at the birth of Sesoosis or Sesonkosis, he meant 
that he was a Memphite king. 

196. The same ; " Ptolemy, beloved by Pthah, immortal," is 
the name of Euergetes II., K. 236. This is the usual figure of 
the god; in other places it follows his name. Like Osiris he is 
in profile, and with his feet bandaged like a mummy. 

197. The same, following his name as the determinative sign ; 
E. I. 38, 2 and 9. 

198. The same, in the pigmy form in which he was a god to be 
feared, carrying a sword or club, and father of the Cabeiri, the 
punishing gods, and thus worshipped at Memphis ; H. 70, N s. 

199. King of Memphis, the usual title of Pthah ; " Sevechus, 
beloved by Pthah king of Memphis," E. I. 36, 1. 

200. 201. The same; E. I. 4, 4; E. I. 4, 13. 

202. The Ethiopian Pthah ; at the head of a tablet at Aboo 
Simbel, B. 60. See the word Ethiopia, No. 894. 

203. Sokari, an adjective applied to Osiris, possibly because 
he was worshipped on the hill of Sakara, near Memphis ; M. H. 
i. 19. 

204. The same, used as the name of a god ; M . H. i. 19. 
" Amenothph III., beloved by Sokar," B. 30. 

205. Pthah-Sokar-Osiris ; "A gift dedicated to Pthah-So- 
kar-Osiris," E. I. 5. " Oimenepthah, beloved by Pthah-Sokar- 
Osiris, and by Osiris lord of Amenti," E. I. 37, b. These are 
the two usual characters of Osiris. 

206. Pthah-Sokaji; " A gift dedicated to Osiris lord of 
Amenti, righteous good king for ever ; to Pthah-Sokar lord of 
the temple, and to Anubis," E. I. 2, 1. The tablet E. I. 60 is 
dedicated on one side to Pthah-Sokar, and on the other to Osi- 
ris lord of Amenti. This therefore is only a short way of writing 
Pthah- Sokar-Osiris. 

207. Sokar-Osiris ; " A gift dedicated to Sokar-Osiris, lord 
of the temple of Sakara, and to Apis-Osiris lord of Amenti, king 
of the gods," E. I. 4, 1, a tablet of the reign of Cleopatra. 



58 VOCABULARY. 

208. No doubt this is meant for Pthah-Sokar-Osiris, though 
spelt Pthah-Osiris; E. I. 4, 14. 

209. Apis, spelt Api, with the word ( living ;' "Costly libations 
and other similar fittings for the temple of Apis/' R. S. 4. This 
is the sacred bull of Memphis, and the last character, which is 
the word ( living/ distinguishes it from the statue of a god. 

210. The same ; " Imo a woman deceased, daughter of the 
priest of Pthah, the priest of Apis" E. I. 27, 13. Here it is 
followed by the bull, as a determinative sign. 

211. Probably the same; E. I. 27, 13. 

212. The same, followed by the figure of the bull ; E. I. 4, 4. 

213. The same, in the above quotations. The animal holds 
its head high, and is not like the sacred bull of the Hindoos. 

214. The same; B. 42, 1. 

215. Apis-Osiris ; H. 71, N p, and H. 72, N f, where Anubis, 
Horus, and this god are introducing the deceased person into 
the presence of Osiris lord of Amenti. Of the two gods who 
bear the name of Osiris, here Apis-Osiris is the least important. 

216. The same; " Apis -Osiris, lord of Amenti, king of the 
gods," E. I. 4. Here he has the head of a bull, and is in com- 
pany with Sokar-Osiris ; and, being judge of the dead, is the 
most important of the two. The Greek fashion is so far followed 
that the word Apis is spelt with a final S. 

217. The same, but written Osiris-Apis, thus forming the 
word Serapis of the Greeks ; a Priest of the gods Euergetse, of 
the gods Philopatores, of Isis, and of Serapis," E. I. 48, a 4. 
Here also we have the final S to the word Apis. Clemens Alex- 
andrinus, in his Cohort, ad Gent., says that the word Serapis was 
formed of Osiris and Apis. It is however in hieroglyphics more 
usually written in the other way, Apis-Osiris. In E. I. (second 
series) 96, 6, this word is also spelt with the final s, evidently 
copied from the Greek word. 

218. Probably the same; on the sarcophagus of Amyrtseus, 
E. I. 29, 3. The vowel A may mean Apis. 

219. Imothph ; " Honour to Imothph the son of Pthah," 
M. H. i. 30. 

220. The same ; " The son of the sun, Ptolemy Epiphanes, 



VOCABULARY. 59 

beloved by Imothph the son of Pthah," H. 65. This is from a 
small temple at Philse, where the Greek inscription calls this god 
Asclepius. 

221. The same; M. H. i. 30. 

222. The same name, but called a daughter of Pthah ; M . H. 
i. 5. The M has the syllabic force of am or im. 

223. One of the four lesser gods of the dead. They are usually 
represented with the heads of a man, an ape,, a jackal, and a 
hawk respectively. Sometimes these heads are on four vases, as 
in M. H. i. 50, of which there are many in the British Museum, 
and which the Greeks, without distinguishing them, called cano- 
bic jars. Sometimes they are on human figures, as on a stone 
mummy-case, E. I. 23. In E. I. 8, and in H. 5, they stand on 
a table in front of Osiris ; in E. I. 31, they are four human heads 
on the back of a serpent. They represent the offices of the priests 
who attended to the funeral. This first is Amset, who made 
the mummy-case. From ^JULCtje, the carpenter) M. H. i. 50. 
He has a man's head. 

224. The same ; E. I. 44. 

225. The second of these gods, called Hepi, with the head of 
an ape; he dug the grave. From &HTU, a cave; M. H. i. 50; 
E. I. 31 ; E. I. 45. 

226. The same; M. H. i. 50. 

227. The third of these gods, Smotef, with the head of a 
jackal; M. H. i. 50. He perhaps bandaged the body. From 
CJUIOT", the shape. 

228. The same god, though with a different name, Sottef ; 
E. I. 44. Perhaps the cutter; or perhaps the purifier, from 
ccnrq, pure ; or more probably from COTqeq, a knife. 

229. The fourth of these gods, Snouf, with a hawk's head; 
M. H. i. 50. He may be the washer; from Cltoq, Mood. The 
second character has the force of SON ; the plural signs have the 
force of ou. 

230. The same; E.I. 45. 

231. The goddess Selk, to whom the scorpion was dedi- 
cated; H. 66, I m. From (TXh, a scorpion. She seems to be 
Isis under another of her numerous names and characters. 



60 VOCABULARY. 

232. The same; E.I. 9, 2. 

233. Meroe, the goddess of Upper Egypt ; M. H. i. 47. Her 
name is followed by the lily, which was distinctive of that half 
of the kingdom, while the lotus was distinctive of Lower Egypt. 
According to Diogenes Laertius, when Democritus wrote on 
hieroglyphics, about b. c. 450, he called Upper Egypt Meroe; 
and though that name was afterwards given by the Greeks to the 
country above Ethiopia, yet the Egyptians continued to call the 
Thebaid AA£.pHC 5 or the southern land, though they had become 
acquainted with others so much more to the south. 

234. Tape, the goddess of Thebes • M. H. i. 59. Her name 
is composed of, first, the name ^.TIH^ the capital; second, T, the 
feminine article ; third, K, the character for city, from Kl^gjl, 
land; fourth, the sitting figure, the determinative sign of a per- 
son ; and fifth, the feminine termination. 

235. Taphne, probably the goddess of the city called Daphnse 
by the Greeks, and Tahpenes by the Hebrews ; M. H. i. 49. The 
true name of the city had been Hanes, see Isaiah, xxx. 4, named 
perhaps after an Egyptian queen ; but it was also called Tape- 
hanes, the city of Hanes. It would seem to be a mistake in 
1 Kings, xi. 19, to give the name of Taphenes to the queen. 

236. A goddess, lady of Dendera and Oshmoonayn, the daugh- 
ter of Horus-Ra; M.H. i. 43. It is spelt NEMAO, and it may 
be the latter half of the word Oshmoo-nayn. 

237. Amenta, goddess of the place of the dead ; M. H. i. 41. 
From AJUterrri, hell 

238. The figure of this goddess, which itself spells her name. 
The bird is A; the feather M or MUN; the perch T; and the 
ground A. She stands among other gods in E. I. 73. 

239. The name of the same; "Amenta the mother of the 
gods," E. I. 73, 2. Here the feather is AM UN. The last cha- 
racter is the determinative sign for a place, although the whole 
is the name of the goddess. 

240. Perhaps the same ; E. I. 4, 2. But this also closely re- 
sembles Thoth, No. 166. 

241. A-menti, the abode of the dead; " The everlasting peo- 
ple in Amenti," E. I. 62, 2. In the inscription here quoted it 



VOCABULARY. 61 

will be observed that, though the characters are in the usual 
order, the order of the vertical lines is the reverse of what is 
usual. 

242. The same ; " A man deceased in Amenti, righteous and 
good/' E. L 2. 

243. Lord or Amenti, a title peculiar to Osiris ; M. H. i. 14. 
He is represented on various papyri as sitting in judgment on 
the dead; H. 5, and Denon, pi. 141. 

244. The same; H. 9, I p. 

245. The same, spelt Pa-amenti; M. H. i. 13. TUL means 
belonging to. 

246. The same ; a title given to each of three goddesses in 
E. I. 28. The fish is the letter M. 

247. The same, spelt Pet-amenti; " Apis -Osiris, lord of 
Amenti, king of the gods," E. I. 4, 1. The first syllable pet is 
from the Coptic UGTe. 

248. The same, over the figure of the god ; H. 67, I v. 

249. The same ; " Amunmai Rameses II., beloved by Osiris 
Pet-amenti/' E. I. 8. " A gift dedicated to Osiris Pet-amenti, 
righteous good king for ever," E. I. 2, 1. 

250. The same, with another character for lord; E. I. 14, 
and E. I. 2, 1. 

251. The same; M. H. i. 13. These titles, or one of them, 
was read to the Greeks as pO- r T-&.AA.esVTl, king of Amenti, 
whence their name Rhadamanthus. 

252. A god with a leopard's head ; M. H. i. 10. The word is 
perhaps xexpRC, a leopard. See No. 1721 for the force of the 
first letter. 

253. The god Truth ; " Oimenepthah deceased, beloved by 
his father Truth, beloved by his mother Neith," E. I. 67, 1. It 
is spelt MO, perhaps from AXHI^ true. 

254. The same ; " Truth, the son of Horus-Ra," M. H. i. 15 ; 
also B. 25. 

255. The goddess Truth ; " The king, the brave, the truth- 
loving," E. I. 42, 2; and (second series) 53, 5. 

256. Probably the same, spelt SME; B. 57. In M. C. 135, 
this goddess introduces the dead man into the presence of Osiris 



62 VOCABULARY. 

to be judged, which, on most papyri, is the office of the goddess 
of Truth. 3\c is a prefix for a past tense, which may here per- 
haps be used. 

257. The same ; E. I. 76, 31, where a small figure of this god- 
dess sitting in a dish is being presented to the gods by the de- 
ceased person, who thereby claims a verdict of acquittal. This 
figure is the weight against which the conduct of every man is 
weighed in the scales of Osiris at the judgment. 

258. Ioh, a goddess with a cow's head; M. H. i. 45. From 
e £> e * cow, followed by the T, the feminine article. Lucian, 
who had lived in the country, mentions with ridicule the Greek 
Io being carried into Egypt, and turned into a cow. 

259. 260. The same ; B. 56. One of the various gods under 
this form. 

261. The same; E. I. 25, 6. 

262. The same, in the feminine ; E. I. 2, where the animal 
is looking from behind a hill. 

263. The same, in the masculine ; M. H. i. 29. The animal's 
ear, like the human ear, has the force of o. 

264. The hippopotamus that stands before the throne of Osi- 
ris, when he judges the dead; M. C. 135. Hence the Greeks 
seem to have taken the dog Cerberus into their mythology. He 
was one of the Cabeiri, or punishers. 

265. Typhon, the god or goddess of evil ; over his hermaphro- 
dite figure, with a boar's head and feet, in M. H. i. 51. It is 
here spelt TH, p, O, with the feminine termination. The figure 
of Typhon is the Great Bear in the planisphere at Dendera, De- 
non, pi. 130. He was the boar that killed Adonis in the Greek 
fable, as he killed Osiris in Egyptian story. 

266. A trinity in unity, of Isis, Osiris, and Nepthys ; E. I. 
36, 4. The three names have only one determinative sign. 

267. The same, of Isis, Horus, Nepthys ; E. I. 36, 5. In this 
case, as in the last, one god is between two goddesses. 

268. God ; " Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah, god Epi- 
phanes most gracious," R. S. 12. Also Goddess ; " Goddess of 
Upper and Lower Egypt," E. I. 16. Also as an adjective, Di- 
vine. This character is the mallet which we see in the hands of 



VOCABULARY. 63 

criminals working in the mines. It has the force of nou ; or 
NOUT, from ItOTT, to bruise or grind; and hence is used for 
ItOTXe, god. 

269. The same ; " Isis the great goddess-mother" E. I. 4, 1. 

270. A different form of the same word ; E. I. 42, 3. 

271. Gods; " Sacred to Amun-Ra, king of the gods" E. I. 
43, 3. The addition of the t here and in other cases shows that 
the mallet alone has the force of nou. 

272. The same ; " A libation to the gods of Upper and Lower 
Egypt/' E. 7.35, a 13. 

273. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Osiris Pet-amenti, lord 
of Upper Egypt, lord of Lower Egypt, king of the gods" E. I. 
39,6. 

274. The same ; " Apis-Osiris Pet-amenti, king of the gods" 
E. I. 4, 1. 

275. The same; " Gods, lords of the world," E.I. 2, 1. 
« King of the gods," E. I. 1, 2. 

276. The same ; " Hononr to Neith, mother of the other 
gods," E. I. 51. Also E. I. 36, 18 and 19. As the writers do 
not mention nine principal gods, this seems only another form 
of the plural. 

277. The same ; " The deified queen deceased, with the gods," 
E. I. 57, 42. 

278. The same, in the singular, both masculine and feminine ; 
" The god Seb, the goddess Neith," E. I. (second series) 9, 3. 

279. The same; E. I. 57, 12. This plural termination per- 
haps means all; perhaps from KCOXe, full. 

280. 281. The same;. E. I. 57, 13; E. I. 57, 14. 

282. Goddess ; " Daughter of the sun, queen of the world, 
Cleopatra, goddess loving her mother," H. 45. " Queen Arsinoe, 
goddess loving her brother," H. 77, S h. 

283. The same ; " Her mother, the goddess Neith- Acoret, 
deceased," E. I. 116, 25. As the word ItOTTe^ god, has one 
T, the second t in this word may be the feminine termination. 

284. The same ; " The illustrious deified goddess," E. 1.57,1. 

285. The same ; " Isis the goddess," E. I. 34. This is clearly 
the feminine of No. 278. 



64 VOCABULARY. 

286. Immortal, applied to gods and goddesses. This is the 
asp, a serpent of the genus Naja. It has folds of skin near its 
head resembling a crown, and hence its name basilisk, from 
fiacriXevs. Hence also its Coptic name, which, according to 
Horapollo, was ovpatos, from OYpo, king. It has the power of 
raising its ribs and thereby swelling its chest. It walks upright 
upon the strong folds of its tail, like the cobra capella of Hindo- 
stan ; and was probably in the mind of the writer of the third 
chapter of Genesis, as the serpent there seems to have walked 
upright before it was caused to creep upon its belly. 

287. Asps, in the dual ; " In like manner to the two grand 
asps placed upon the shrines," R. S. 9. The kings' and gods' 
crowns are often seen thus ornamented with two asps ; see De- 
non, pi. 115. When Hermapion, on the obelisk, page 20, uses 
the title 'lord of the diadem/ he probably means the group No. 
635 or No. 636, as these asps, being part of the royal diadem, 
are no doubt the objects meant. 

288. Immortal Gods, as opposed to deified mortals ; " For 
this to him the immortal gods gave victory, health, power, and 
the other blessings of a kingdom remaining to him and his chil- 
dren for ever," R. S. 5. 

289. The same ; " Chief of the priests of the immortal gods, 
the rulers of Upper and Lower Egypt," E. I. 4, 6. 

290. Goddesses ; " Libations to the gods and goddesses of 
Egypt," B. 57. 

291. The same; " The gods and goddesses of the Egyptian 
groves," E. I. 61. This is the same in sound as No. 278, and 
proves that the mallet is NOU, or at least N. 

292. Goddess, or Immortal, following the name of the god- 
dess Neith; M. H. i. 33. 

293. Gods ; " Sacred to Amun-Ra, king of the gods," B. 22. 
Horapollo says (book i. 13 andii. 1), that the star was the hiero- 
glyphic character for god. The star is followed by the masculine 
sign, and then by the plural sign. 

294. Goddess ; " The deified wife the goddess, the queen de- 
ceased," E. I. 58, 29. The star is followed by the feminine sign. 

295. Gods; E. I. 28. 



VOCABULARY. 65 

296. Immortal gods ; " Anubis, Horus, and Apis-Osiris, im- 
mortal gods" H. 71, 1. 

297. The same ; " Immortal, like the immortal gods" or more 
literally, " living like the living gods" E. I. 59, 23, This is spoken 
of the deceased queen. 

298. Priest ; frequently a title of the king, " On the ap- 
pointed last day of Mesore, the birthday of the priest living for 
ever," R. S. 10. The first character is NOU, the second oub, or 
B; hence UOTH^ a priest, a word formed from 0'X&.&. ) holy. 

299. The same ; u As an offering for the priest of Amun," 
E.I. 35, All. 

300. The same; " His father & priest of the great Ra;" and 
again, " His grandfather a priest of the great Ra," E. I. 39, 3. 
The basket is a B. 

301. Priests; " Set up a tablet in the temple carved in let- 
ters for the priests," R. S. 14. Here the Greek translation has 
' letters sacred/ 

302. The same; ^.7.4,10. 

303. Some kind of priest ; " Imo, deceased son of the priest 
of Pthah," E. I. 27, 11. " Imothph, deceased daughter of the 
priest of Pthah," E. I. 4, 3. The second of these tablets is of 
the reign of Cleopatra ; and no doubt the first is of the same 
time, and for the same family. In this group we have an M used 
for a B. 

304. Nearly the same; H. 71. This tablet is for another 
member of the same family. 

305. 306. Nearly the same; E. I. 24, b 1. 

307. High-priest ; " Pahoe the high-priest, a man deceased 
in the temple," E. 1. 26. " The high-priest of Amun," H. 43, E q. 

308. A title of a priest ; E. I. 40, 17. And also of the god- 
dess Neith, E. I. 16. It seems to mean e ruler of the temples/ 

309. Priestess, with the usual feminine termination ; 
(< Priestess of Pthah, king of Memphis," E. I. 4, 8. 

310. The same; E.l. 4, 6. 

311. The same, in the plural; E. I. 72, 11. 

312. Female musician ; a priestess in the temple of Pthah 
in Memphis; E. I. 4, 4; also E. I. 23, b 1. She holds in her 

r 



t>b VOCABULARY. 

hand the sistrum, and her sex is shown by her clothes being tight 
round her legs. 

313. The same, with the feminine termination ; E. I. 27, 13. 

314. Sculptor, as known from the paintings which repre- 
sent him employed on his work. 

315. Sculptors; E.I. 11, 11; E. I. 4, 11. 

316. The same; E.I. 4, 11. 

317. Chief of the sculptors; a title of the deceased priest 
in E. I. 2. The man seems to be in the act of carving against 
the wall. 

318. Servants, or some kind of priests; E. I. 78, 13; E. I. 

319. The same; E. I. 6. [106, 6. 

320. Serve, or worship ; " They shall worship the statue of 
the god in the city of San thrice a day," R. S. 6. This trans- 
lated group determines the meaning of the last two. 

321. Some kind of priests, perhaps embalmers, as that service 
belonged to Anubis, whose name forms part of this word. 

322. Attendant ; "A woman deceased, attendant on the lady 
Nepthys, the sister goddess/' E. I. 77, 5 ; also E. I. 59, 28 ; and 
B. 36. Perhaps from €I<LT~, attention. 

323. Services ; " Services of the deified wife, the divine 
queen deceased," E. I 59, 6. This word is formed from the last, 
with the addition of a very usual termination for substantives in 
the plural. 

324. Attendant, written over the heads of the female ser- 
vants carrying baskets, in E. I. 86. 

325. Some kind of priest; E. I. 16 and E. I. 35, a 14. 

326. The same ; " Amunothph III., like Ra, the royal scribe, 
the priest beloved by Amun," E. I. 22, 11 ; also E. I. 22, 18. 

327. Letters ; " A tablet in the temple carved with letters 
for the priests, letters for writing, and Greek letters," R. S. 14. 
In the copy of this decree at Philse this character is also used in 
speaking of ' Greek letters/ Salt, pi. 5. Also scribe; "The 
royal scribe/' E. 1. 22, 11. The scribe was not always a priest, 
because, in E. 1. 26, " the scribe of the soldiers," or secretary to 
the army, has hair upon his head, while his father, who is a priest, 
is shorn. 



VOCABULARY. 67 

328. Scribe ; the same character more carefully drawn,, E. I. 
41. It represents the wooden inkstand or palette and the reed 
pen. Horapollo says that writing was represented by ink, a 
sieve, and a reed. 

329. The same ; where the man holds the pen in his hand ; 
E. I. 83, 6. In the temple of Dendera the figure of Thoth holds 
one half of this character in each hand; B. 23. 

330. Letters ; " Letters for Greek proclamations," R. S. 14, 
where we remark that the character is not the same as that used 
for sacred letters. From C^)A.I 5 a letter. 

331. Decree; "This decree shall be set up on a tablet," 
R. S. 14. 

332. Perhaps scribe, as the letters are SKA; " The great 
scribe of the country," B. 33, 68. 

333. Scribes ; « Chief of the scribes," E. I. 89, 4 ; also E. I. 
86, 8. The first two letters are the word TO^, a rush, meaning 
perhaps the papyrus. 

334. Writing ; " The appointed writing in honour of the 
scribe, full of honours," E. I. 33, a 1. 

335. The same; " Letters for writing" is the way in which 
the hieroglyphics of the Rosetta Stone express Enchorial, or vul- 
gar, or demotic letters. 

336. A title applied to the deceased person ; E. I. 9, 8. It 
seems analogous to Prize-bearer and Basket-bearer, offices men- 
tioned in the Greek of the Rosetta Stone. 

337. Fittings ; " Sacrifices, jewels, and other similar fittings 
for the temple of Apis," R. S. 4. In the Greek we read u He 
fitted up the temple of Apis with costly works." 

338. Learned ; " The learned chief of the temple, Hapimen 
deceased," E. I. 44, 2. From cfiCU, to learn. 

339. The same ; " The learned Pepe," E. I. 14. 

340. The same, in the plural ; E. I. 74, 32. The palm-branch 
is a B. 

341. The same; E.I. 16. 

342. The same; E.I. 13, 6. 

343. Flute-player; over a sitting figure playing on a pipe, 
in Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt, ii. 233. From ce&l, a reed. 

e2 



68 VOCABULARY. 

344. Learned men; over each of five priests, E. I. 115. 
The second character is B. 

345. The same, over a priest; E. I. 115. 

346. Priests ; " It has pleased the priests of Upper and 
Lower Egypt," words with which the enactment begins on the 
Rosetta Stone, line 5 ; " The priests of the temples of Egypt 
shall wear crowns during the proclamations of the god Epipha- 
nes," R. S. 12. But in this latter quotation the plural is formed 
by the figure being repeated three times instead of by the three 
lines. 

347. Libation ; " Other holy libations," E. I. 5 ; E. I. 17, 2. 
The leg is here, as in other places, used for a man, but the de- 
terminative sign shows that it is the liquid, not the actor, that is 
here spoken of. 

348. The same ; " Thousands of oxen and geese, and thou- 
sands of other libations" E. I. 35, a 7 ; also E. I. 2, 2. 

349. The same ; " Thousands of libations of wine and honey," 
E. I. 39, 9. Also waters of the Nile ; " Nef, lord of the waters" 
H. 56, D g. 

350. The same, in the plural; "Libations, jewels, and other 
similar fittings for the temple of Apis," R. S. 4. 

351. The same; " Oxen and geese, libations of wine, and 
other good libations," E. I. 2, 2. 

352. The same ; " Libations to the gods of Upper and Lower 
Egypt," E. I. 35, a 13. 

353. The same; mentioned among other gifts to the gods in 
E. I. 25, 3. 

354. Priest ; u His brother a priest of the great Ra," written 
over the head of a man with a shorn head, E. I. 39, 4. This cha- 
racter, which is so much more suitable for a libation, is a happy 
instance to show how indistinct was the Egyptian manner of 
writing. Its force is made clear by the picture to which it be- 
longs. 

355. Priesthood ; " A priesthood to the god Epiphanes 
thrice gracious," R. S. 13. The sign for abstraction, or state of 
being, may be the Coptic syllable AA.6T", which is so used in 
JULGTOTH^ priesthood, JULeTOnrpo, kingdom. 



VOCABULARY. 69 

356. Probably the same; E. I. 41, 11. 

357. Liturgies ; " The priests of the temples of Egypt shall 
wear crowns during the proclamations of the god Epiphanes 
thrice gracious, in the splendid holy liturgies" R. S. 12. It is 
literally ' priest-hood-things/ and each of the three parts of the 
word is in the plural. 

358. A libation; "A libation to Ra/ J B. 57, 1. From 
cnfurrert. The letters are OTN ; followed by a rather peculiar 
determinative sign. 

359. The same, being the sign without the word ; " A liba- 
tion to Pthah, by gift of King Rameses TL." B. 56, where it is 
repeatedly used. 

360. The same, in the plural ; " The appointed libations and 
things dedicated to the temple," E. I. 64, 2. 

361. Purifications; E.I. 66,2. Horapollo says, in book i. 
43, that ' purification' is represented by fire and water. Here we 
have water and flame. 

362. Purifiers; mentioned with other priests, E. I. 4, 11. 

363. Perhaps purification ; " Guardian of the great puri- 
fication" E. I. 116, 23. The letters are tbe, and it may be 
TOY^.6, purification. It is the subject spoken of in the previ- 
ous lines of the inscription. 

364. Prayers ; " Prayers to Isis the mother-goddess," E. I. 
94, 1. It is spelt S O, perhaps from XCO, a hymn; but the figure 
is in the attitude of prayer. The o behind the figure is the plural 
termination. 

365. The same ; " Prayers to Anubis," and " Prayers to Osi- 
ris," E. I. 6. 

366. The same ; " The prayers of King Amunothph," E. I. 
94, 1. From *f"£,0, to pray. 

367. Praises ; " Praises to Osiris," E. I. 8, written over a 
figure on his knees before the god. From £-I£.Ij to praise. 

368. The same; " Great praise to the queen, the deified wife 
deceased," E. I. 116, 12; also E. L 27, 12. 

369. The same ; " Praises to the ruler of the gods, Amun-Ra, 
for the honour of the great chief of the priests," E. I. 103, 3. 
The letter R is prefixed to denote an action, as in Coptic. 



70 VOCABULARY. 

370. One who praises ; over the figure of a man holding up 
both his hands, E. I. 32. 

371 . Praise ; " Praise the deified lady," E. I. 23, b 1 ; B. 36 ; 
and E. I. 6. 

372. The same; " His praise unto Ra," E. I. 61, 

373. The same; E.I. 2. 

374. The same, in the plural ; B. 44, 13. 

375. The same ; " Praise in the assemblies," E. I. (second 
series) 41, 6. 

376. The same ; " Praise the Osiris-like immortal lady de- 
ceased," E. I. 23, b 1. 

377. The same ; " Praise the Osiris-like lady Oshirenes de- 
ceased, daughter of the priest of Mando," E. I. 69, b 7. 

378. The same; E. I. 53, b 29, and E. I. 59, 1. 

379. The same ; " Praise the Osiris-like divine wife Ones- 
vaphra, deceased ; her mother was the divine wife the goddess 
Neith-Acoret, deceased," E. I. 59, 26. 

380. Perhaps the same; E. I. 2, 1. 

381. Perhaps the same; " Libations and thousands of other 
praises/' E. I. 52, 42. Each of these letters is an H ; in E. I. 
34, 2, they are reversed. 

382. Worshippers, written over six men bowing in reve- 
rence ; E. I. 64. Perhaps from £/A)H, to obey. 

383. Prayers, or acts of worship ; " These prayers to Ra, in 
Amenti," is the sentence above that last quoted, E. I. 64. 

384. The same, beginning with a T instead of an H ; over a 
figure holding up his hands in the act of prayer, E. I. 30. 

385. A royal or costly gift; " A costly gift dedicated to 
Osiris ruler of Amenti, a gift of oil, oxen, and geese," E. I. 33, 
a 2. This is the usual beginning of the funereal tablets. (To, 
a reed, is also (To, costly, and TT<LT 5 a mountain, is TKI 5 a 
gift. A royal gift would simply mean a great gift, as a royal 
cubit, No. 1094, means a great cubit; and in Amos, vii. 1, of 
the two crops of grass, the first and largest was called the royal 
mowing. 

386. The same ; E. I. 34, a 1. 

387. A costly dedicated gift; E. I. 25, 1. The word de- 



VOCABULARY. 71 

dicated, which follows the last two groups,, is introduced into the 
middle of this. It is spelt otp ; from (JOT-S-, to consecrate. 

388. The same. The word c dedicated' is here expressed by an 
O, as a contraction of o T P. 

389. Giver, in the feminine ; " She is the valuable giver of 
valuable gifts of money," E. I. 117, 23. 

390. A gift ; over the figure of a man in the act of prayer, 
H. 62. The R is the Coptic prefix to denote an action. 

391. The same; H. 62. 

392. The same ; " A gift of wine to Amun-Ra," written by 
the side of a kneeling figure of Rameses II., who is presenting 
an offering to the god ; on the obelisk of Luxor, now at Paris, 
E. I. 42 and 43. 

393. The same; "A gift to Nef," H. 62, Qf. In this we 
have an S, instead of the T in the former groups. This is pro- 
bably the older form of the word, as in other cases the T some- 
times usurps the place of the more ancient S. Compare No. 1253 
and No. 1254, also No. 397 and No. 398. The same change took 
place in the Greek language, as is prettily enlarged upon in Lu- 
cia^ s pleadings of S versus T. 

394. Gifts ; u Gifts to Osiris" are the first words of the in- 
scription, E. I. 1, written under the figure of the deceased, who 
is presenting his offerings to the god. 

395. The same ; E. I. 35, a 6. 

396. The same; E.I. 2, 2. 

397. The same ; E. I. 4, 2. Here the arm holds out the gift 
in its hand. 

398. The same ; E. I. 44, 2. Here the T is used instead of 
the s in the grammatical termination. 

399. The same; E. 1. 23, a 3. 

400. The same; E. I. 86, 9. 

401. The same; E.l. 5. 

402. The same, the dish is the plural termination ; " Thou- 
sands of gifts/ 3 E. I. 56, b 16. 

403. The same ; E. I. 83, 13, and E. I. 19, 9. Here the hand 
does not hold its gift. This is the passive participle used for the 
noun. 



72 VOCABULARY. 

404. The same; E.I. 21,1. 

405. Probably the same; E.I. 5. 

406. By gift of, the first character is the preposition ; " A 
libation to Pthah-Sokar, by gift o/*Amunmai Rameses," B. 56. 
Every vertical line in this inscription is to be read in this way ; 
and it explains the form of the Tablet of Abydos, M. H. ii. 9, 
which is also to be read vertically ; " Unto King Amasis, by gift 
o/*Amunmai Rameses." 

407. Probably gift-bearing; E.I. 2. See Light- bearing. 
No. 1530, for another word of the same form. 

408. Giver ; " Honour to Osiris lord of Amenti, giver of 
life to the deceased/' E. I. 74, 10; also E. I. 75, 27. 

409. Perhaps giving; R. S. 10, where the sense is rather 
obscure, but where the Greek has " Which days are the givers 
of many blessings to us all." 

41 0„ Gave ; " For this to him the immortal gods gave victory, 
health, and power," R. S. 5. 

411. Probably gifts; E. I. 44, 7. 

412. Probably the same; E. I. 12, 12, and E. 1. 23, a 3. 

413. Offerings; " Offerings to Ra," E. I. 66, 2. This may 
be from ^ru^ to offer. 

414. Oxen ; mentioned among other religious offerings, E. I. 
2, 2. 

415. The same, the part for the whole, a common abbrevia- 
tion, and often without the plural sign ; " Thousands of oxen, 
thousands of geese," E. I. 56, b 14. 

416. Geese, with few exceptions, always mentioned among 
the offerings on the funereal tablets ; E. I. 2, 2. 

417. The same; E. I. 34, 1; the part for the whole. 

418. The same, with the grammatical termination; E. I. 73, 6. 

419. Oxen and geese, the two nouns being united with one 
plural sign; E. I. 4, 2, and E. I. 17, 2. 

420. The same, with a different form of the plural; E. I. 16. 

421. The same, with both of these forms of the plural; " A 
gift dedicated to Osiris, lord of Lower Egypt, great god, lord of 
Upper Egypt, of oil, oxen, geese, and money, for the happiness 
of Ki the son of Sabacothph, a man deceased," E. 1. 15. 



VOCABULARY. 73 

422. Vases ; " Oxen, geese, and consecrated vases," H. 70. 

423. The same ; forty-five of these vases are mentioned among 
the royal booty, H. 42, V f; also H. 41, X k. 

424. Haunches, but of what animal is not mentioned; E. I. 
25, 6. The haunch is a common object among the offerings lying 
on the table in the pictorial part of the funereal tablets. 

425. A haunch; E. I. 83, 14. 

426. Some kind of fruit mentioned among the offerings, and 
seen lying on the altar ; E. I. 83, 14. 

427. Leeks, mentioned among the offerings; E. I. 34, 2. 
From U.K(Te, a leek. It was held sacred, because it bore the 
same name as the goddess Pasht, the Diana of Egypt. 

428. The same; E. I. 25, 5, and E. I. 72, 6. 

429. Some kind of liquid in bottles ; it begins with the word 
rtOTRJl, priestly. Eight hundred and twenty-eight of these 
bottles are mentioned among the tribute, H. 42, U k. 

430. The same, without mention of bottles; E. I. 25, 5. 

431. The same; E. I. 21, 2. 

432. The same; E. I. 35, a 12. 

433. The same ; E. I. 34, 2. In this and the last four groups 
the word seems the same, though spelt differently. 

434. Holy water ; E. I. 39, 9. It is spelt H K, followed by 
a bottle for the determinative sign; from &IK, magical. See 
No. 96, Hecate. 

435. Some kind of offering; E. I. 39, 9. 

436. The same as No. 434; E. I. 17, 2. 

437. Fruit of the palm, mentioned among other offerings ; 
E. I. 39, 9. The second character is a palm-branch. 

438. Dedicated ; " A gift dedicated to Osiris," is the most 
common beginning of the inscriptions on the funereal tablets. 
This word is also the last half of the name of King Amun-othph, 
dedicated to Amun, which Eratosthenes translates by Ammono- 
dotus, given to Amun. It is spelt O T p, from COTeH, to con- 
secrate. 

439. Things dedicated; among the offerings mE. /. 25, 5. 

440. The same, but with another termination; E. I. 31, 3. 

441. The same; among the offerings in E.I. 5. The word 



74 VOCABULARY. 

is expressed by means of its first letter, which practice is most 
frequent in the less ornamental inscriptions, and in the Hieratic 
writing. So King Amunothph's name is often spelt Amuno. 

442. The same ; E. I. 52, 42. The noun is repeated three 
times, and the whole followed by a K, as a second plural termi- 
nation. 

443. The same; E. I. 12, 10. 

444. The same ; E. I. 52, 44, and E. L 48, b 3. The word 
is here spelt o, TH, which irregularity explains how King Amun- 
othph is by the Greeks sometimes called Amenophis and some- 
times Amenothis. 

445. Dedicated; E. I. 38, 8, a slab of the reign of Seve- 
chus, where the departures from the established rules of the lan- 
guage are so frequent as to make it a not very good authority. 

446. A class of priests whose name is derived from the same 
word, and spelt Othphto ; E. I. 32, where three other classes 
of priests are mentioned, namely, the Soteno, the Nouto, and the 
Bochano. These Othphto were monks in the temple, called by 
the Greeks Xaro^oc. 

447. Sacrifices; among the offerings in E. I. 21, 2. The 
character seems meant for an altar. 

448. Perhaps the same; E. I. 56, b 4 and 15. 

449. To make feast ; ' ' And it shall be lawful for proper per- 
sons to make feast, and set up a similar shrine to god Epiphanes 
thrice gracious, according to these decrees," R. S. 13. This is 
an imitative character, representing the action of setting out 
food upon a table before the statue of a god. 

450. Ceremonies ; " Clothe the statue for the ceremonies like 
to the gods of the country in the assemblies," R. S. 7. 

451. Meat-offerings; " Offerings of oil, oxen, geese, fyc., as 
meat-offerings for the honour of the deceased," E. I. 4, 2 ; also 
E. L 35, a 7. 

452. Offerings; being the table, with food upon it, E. I. 
35, b 2. 

453. Some kind of offering which was presented in numbers ; 
E. I. 56, b 15. It is the letter B, and may mean OYAJij holy. 
It may perhaps be a pot holding coals, with a flame rising out 
of it. 



VOCABULARY. 75 

454. The same, with a double plural termination ; E. I. 56, 
b17. 

455. An offering of a ring; H. 9, where it is written by 
the side of the figure of King Nectanebo, presenting a ring of 
this kind to a god. From the size it would appear to be a neck- 
lace ; but in our museums there are small china rings exactly of 
this shape, and in size suitable for ear-rings, with holes through 
the upper part, so that a straight pin could pass through the two 
holes and the ear. 

456. An offering of some other kind, which is also presented 
by King Nectanebo to a god ; H.9. It is handed to the god upon 
a small tray. 

457. Make libations ; " Also make libations, and perform 
sacrifices and other sacred rites in the assemblies," R. S. 11. 

458. Probably men bearing vases ; H. 41, P m. 

459. Wine; spelt erp, from the Coptic word HpH. It is 
followed by a bottle as the determinative sign, E. I. 39, 9, and 
many other funereal tablets. 

460. The same, in the plural ; H. 41, N o. 

461. The same; E. I. 34, a 2. The word is followed by two 
leathern skins, instead of earthen bottles, as the determinative 
sign. 

462. The same, not made from the grape, but from some 
other plant, which is here used as the determinative sign, per- 
haps the lotus ; E. I. 34, a 2. 

463. Lotus -flowers; "These lotus-flowers to Amun," is 
written in front of King Oimenepthah, who is on his knees pre- 
senting two bunches of flowers to Amun-Ea, M. R. 122. 

464. Wine in bottles; six thousand four hundred and 
twenty-eight of these are mentioned in H. 41, T g. The word 
is followed, first by a bottle as the determinative sign, and then 
by the words ( in bottles.' 

465. Milk; among the offerings, E. I. 98,2. Prom epurre, 

466. The same; E. I. 39, 9; E. L 34, a 1. [milk. 

467. Some kind of liquid in bottles ; if the insect be a bee, 
it may be honey ; four hundred and seventy bottles of this are 
mentioned in H. 41, T e. 



76 VOCABULARY. 

468. Pomegranate ; " This pomegranate to his father Amun- 
Ra," M. H. ii. 7, 17. From &.$L,food, followed by the fruit for 
a determinative sign. 

469. The same ; over the figure of a man carrying the fruit 
in his hand, E. I. 29. 

470. The same ; over another man carrying the same fruit in 
the same procession, E. I. 29. 

471 . The same ; " A gift of pomegranates" is written in front 
of the figure of Philip Arridseus presenting the fruit to the god 
Chem, B. 31. This single letter is a poor substitute for the word 
and picture of No. 468. 

472. A radish; over a man carrying the same, E. I, 29. 
From ItOTtte, a root. 

473. Probably oil, mentioned on all occasions among the 
offerings on the funereal tablets; E. I. 34, a 1. 

474. The same ; " Oil from the olive," is written beside a 
servant carrying a jar in his hands, S-E. 1. 

475. The same; over a servant carrying a jar in his hands, 
S-E. 1. 

476. Loaves ; among the offerings, E. I. 25, 4. 

477. Perhaps the same ; E. I. 12, 10. It is spelt A K o, from 
&.IK, bread. 

478. Sacred loaves; E.I. 25, 5. 

479. A reed; over a priest carrying a reed as an offering, 
E. I. 28. It is spelt R N P T E, but not met with in Coptic. Hence, 
however, p£JULniT€ 5 an archer; and hence a branch is used 
as the hieroglyphic for pOAXTTG^ a year. 

480. A staff ; over a man carrying a staff in the procession, 
E. I. 28. Hence, perhaps, g^U^T, an ell measure. 

481. The same; E.I. 28. 

482. The same ; over a third man carrying a staff in the same 
procession, E. I. 28. It is spelt SH, R, bot, from ey^.p.&UD'T, 
a stick. The last character is a scraper for bathers, and pro- 
nounced BOT, from UtOTe^ to wipe. 

483. 484. Probably the same; E. I. 28. The first is in the 
plural, and has the club as the determinative sign. They are 
both spelt SARBOT. 



VOCABULARY. 77 

485. Palm-branches; carried in the hands of priests in the 
procession, E. I. 28. It is spelt T R, from OOOpi, a twig. 

486. The same; E.I. 28. 

487. The same; E. I 28. It is spelt ahri ; the figure of a 
man is only the final vowel. 

488. The same ; E. I. 28. As the first character is the syl- 
lable AN ; it may mean OTCJOIItl^ a palm. 

489. Palm-bearings ; E. I. 30. 

490. The same ; E. I. 30. In this the word ' branch' is spelt 
thorthor, from OUOp. In the last we had the object itself. 

491. Olive-tree; " Oil from the olive" S-E. 1. It is spelt 
B S, and followed by a branch as the determinative sign. From 
■&-HOJ, green fruit. 

492. A house ; " Amunmai Anemneb, king of battles, in the 
house of his father Amun/' M. R. 62. Also a temple ; " Priests 
in the temple of Thebes/' E. I. 27, 12. It is more often used in 
composition. 

493. The same, in the plural; " Aroeris, great king in the 
temples," H. 67, K, o. 

494. The same; " A priest in the temples" E. I. 24, b 1. 

495. The same, with a double form of the plural, written by 
the side of a row of men and doors. The men are called " guar- 
dians of the houses" E. I. 65 ; also in E. I. 62. 

496. A roofed house ; E. I. 62. From xeiteiiuop, a roof. 

497. Temple of Amun ; " Builder of the temple of Amun, 
like the temple of Ra," E. I. 42, 3. " Son of the priest in the 
temple of Amun" E. I. 52, 43. It is spelt Amun-ei, and may 
mean any temple as well as that of Amun in particular ; as in 
the Enchorial language of Lower Egypt, Apid-ei, the house of 
Apis, meant other temples beside that of the sacred bull. 

498. Temples ; the plural of the last, as the ostrich-feather 
has the force of Amun ; " Which are set up in the temples of 
Egypt/' R. S. 14. 

499. Temple ; " Other gods of the temple," E. I. I, 7. 

500. The same; E.I. 1, 2. 

501. The same; " Pahoe, high-priest deceased, in the tem- 
ple," E. I 26. 



78 VOCABULARY. 

502. The same; E.I. 17, 5. 

503. Mi-amun-ei, or Memnonium, the house of one be- 
loved by Amun; E. I. 24, a 2. But the first letter may be the 
preposition of; and this group then means of the house of 
Amun. 

504. Palace, or house of the king, E. I. 80, 4. See King, 
No. 629. 

505. House of Pthah, meaning the city of Memphis; E. I. 
72,4. 

506. House ; " A libation to the mother-goddess, ruler in 
the house of Pthah," B. 56. But it occurs chiefly in composi- 
tion. The first letter is probably the feminine article T, and in 
this dialect the word must have been feminine, though in Coptic 
HI, a house, is masculine. 

507. Temple, or house for the gods ; " Ruler of the temple" 
E. I. 41, 8. The star is the word < god/ See No. 293. 

508. The same; " Scribe in the temple," E. I. 83, 7. The 
letter M may mean Amun. 

509. Some kind of temples ; R. S. 4. 

510. Palace, or king's house; R. S. 2. But possibly this is 
only a mistake for the following. 

511. The same; H. 41, L e. 

512. The same, or perhaps temple ; E. I. 58, 21, and E. I. 8. 

513. Temples; " A gift dedicated to Osiris ruler of Amenti, 
lord of Upper Egypt, in his temples, with various good libations," 
E.L 17, 1. 

514. The same; "Anubis, chief of Egypt, lord of Ethiopia, 
ruler of Amenti, lord of Thebes, in the temples," E. I. 25, 3. 
Here the word ( house ' is omitted, and we have the character 
which describes the kind of house, in the plural. 

515. The same, with another form of the plural; E.I. 13, 2. 
See No. 279 for this termination. 

516. The same; "A priest in the temples, making libations 
to Chem-amun," E. I. 24, b 1 . 

517. A temple, literally a temple-house, in which respect it 
is the same as the Coptic word ep<J>GI ; " Other similar fittings 
for the temple" R. S. 4. 



VOCABULARY. 79 

518. Temples ; R. S. 4. The character for f god' is placed 
within that for c temple/ 

519. The same; E. I. 31, 2. 

520. Temple ; E. I. 27, 27. 

521. The same; E. I. 27, 10. Here the character for ' god' 
is before the temple, not in it. 

522. Temples; E. I. 27,12. 

523. The same ; "A priest in the temples of Memphis/ ' H. 70. 

524. The same ; E. I. 4, 6. Compare the place of the three 
strokes, which mark the plural in this group and in No. 522. 

525. The same; " Sacred to Pthah in the temples" B. 56. 

526. The same ; " Builder of the temples, lord of the world, 
Rameses TL." Flaminian Obelisk. 

527. A shrine or small portable temple ; " On the going 
out from the temple of the statue of Amun-Ra, in the procession 
of the boats, they shall also carry out the shrine and the statue 
of the god Epiphanes thrice blessed, with the others," R. S. 8. 

528. Temple, or shrine-house ; " Defender of Egypt, lord of 
Ombos, dedicated in the temple" H. 65, D v. 

529. The same ; H. 7, R u. 

530. The same; " Set up a tablet in the temple, carved with 
letters sacred," R. S. 14. In this and the last the club is pro- 
bably the word OV&.&., holy. 

531. The same; " On the going out from the temple of the 
statue of Amun-Ra," R. S. 8. Here a vase, with water flowing 
from it, meaning a libation to the gods, describes the kind of 
house meant. 

532. The same; E. L 57, 31, and E. L 58, 28. This, like 
the last, is literally a libation-house. 

533. The same ; E. L 105, 16. Here the temple is within a 
walled court. 

534. Temple oe Pthah, meaning, perhaps, simply a temple 
in Lower Egypt; E. I. 38, 6, and H. 80, X 1. 

535. The same; " Imo deceased, son of the priest in the 
temple of Pthah," EL 27,11. 

536. The same, or rather temple in the city of Pthah, mean- 
ing Memphis ; " A libation to Pthah, ruler of Memphis," B. 56. 



80 VOCABULARY. 

537. Temple of Ra ; " He built the Amun-ei like the temple 
ofRa," E. I. 42, 3. Also Thebes; " The Egyptians of Thebes," 
E. I. 11, 12. See No. 779. This is perhaps the group trans- 
lated by Hermapion, on the Obelisk (page 20) , ' city of the sun/ 
by which he meant Thebes rather than Heliopolis. 

538. Temple of Aroeris ; it is mentioned on the sarcopha- 
gus of the queen of Amasis, as being in the city of Tanis ; E. I. 
58, 26. See Aroeris, No. 128-131. 

539. Temples of Horits, meaning temples in general ; c< Osi- 
ris lord of the temples of Thebes," E. I. 58, 46. 

540. Temple ; " A scribe in the holy temple," E. I. 8. Here, 
perhaps, the couch is used instead of the throne in No. 523. See 
also Osiris, No. 108. 

541. The same; E. I. 8, where it is interchanged with the 
last. 

542. The same; "Also during the splendid procession by 
boat to the temple of Memphis," jR. S. 9. 

543. Palace ; " Priests and sculptors belonging to the pa- 
lace," E.I. 4, 11. The vase, which fixes the kind of house meant, 
is used as a title for King Ptolemy, in line 5 of the same tablet. 
Compare No. 694 and No. 695. 

544. The same ; E, I. 27, 13. 

545. The same ; " The statue of Osiris, ruler of the palace," 
H. 67, R f. This differs from the last in being house of the kings, 
instead of house of the king. 

546. The same ; E. I. 107, 22. The crown marks the kind of 

547. Probably the same ; E. I. 107, 27. [house. 

548. The same ; " King Amunothph III., beloved by Amun- 
Ra, ruler of the palace" E. I. 24, a 2. Here the name of the 
king is placed within the house. 

549. The Memnonium, or palace of Mi-Amun Rameses; 
" Amun-Ea, king of the gods, guardian of the Memnonium," B. 
58, an inscription on the temple of Thebes, called by the Greeks 
the Memnonium, which was built by Kameses II. 

550. The same ; " Honour to Amun-Ra-Chem, lord of the 
temple, guardian of the Memnonium, from his son Amunmai 
Rameses II.," B. 46. 



VOCABULARY. 81 

551. A grove, or walled court, which is represented in the 
picture by a wall and a row of trees ; " The gods and goddesses 
of the Egyptian groves" E. I. 61. It is spelt SB, KT, perhaps 
from CO&T", a wall, and XCJOrr 5 an olive tree. 

552. The same; E. I. 61. Here the determinative sign is 
the wall with its row of trees. 

553. The same, in the plural, without the letters that spell 
the word; E.I. 61. 

554. Columns, with capitals copied from the bud of the pa- 
pyrus ; ' ' Columns in the temples dedicated to the gods," E. I. 
(second series) 53, 1. 

555. The same, with capitals copied from a bunch of fullblown 
papyrus flowers ; E. //(second series) 53, 1. The letters are s M, 
for CJIX&., a bunch. 

556. Temple services ; R. S. 3, where the stone is too bro- 
ken to fix the meaning of the word for certain. 

557. The same; " And at the temple services and rites they 
shall clothe the statue for the ceremonies," R. S. 7. 

558. Probably the same; E. I. 1, 2. 

559. Probably the same ; E. I. 30. 

560. The same; R. S. 13. See the word Temple, No. 508, 
which begins with the same character. 

561. Offerings, or purifications, followed by a pot of fire 
and a jar of water, as the determinative sign; " Offerings to 
Aroeris, from the king the lord of the world, Rameses II.," B. 57. 

562. The same ; " Offerings to Pthah, king of Memphis, from 
King Rameses II.," B. 56. 

563. Rites ; " Holy rites, and make libations and perform 
sacrifices," R. S. 11. 

564. The same; " Other rites in the assemblies," R. S. 11. 

565. The same; " Holy rites in the temples," R. S. 11. 

566. The same; R. S. 7. 

567. The same ; '? Consecrated rites," E. I. 58, 44 ; also E. I. 

568. The same; R. S. 13. [23, a 2. 

569. The same ; " Regulating the splendid rites/ 3 R. S. 3. 

570. Probably holy, it seems to be the root from which No. 
566 is formed; R. S. 12. Perhaps from eiU), to purify. 

G 



82 VOCABULARY. 

571. Holy-days ; " The holy -days, the seventeen last days of 
the month/' R. S. 11. It is composed of the word holy, No. 571, 
and of the word day, No. 1005. 

572. Statue ; " Clothe the statue for the ceremonies like the 
gods of the country/' R. S. 7. Also honours, connected with 
the statue ; " Perform sacrifices and other honours in the assem- 
blies/' R. S. 11. It is spelt TOT, from TOTUOT, an image. 

573. Religious honours, being the same as the last with the 
addition of the noun's termination ; " In addition to the religious 
honours also set up a statue to King Ptolemy," R. S. 6. 

574. The same; R. S. 12. 

575. The same; "And his religious honours in the temples," 
E. I. 72, 8. From eiUO, to purify. 

576. Statue; " Statue of the deceased Osiris-like king Amyr- 
teeus, deceased," E. I. 29. 

577. The same, in the plural; E. I. 70, h 2. 

578. The same, in a shorter form; E. I. 70, f 5. 

579. An adjective of praise to the deceased; it is spelt to, 
perhaps honoured, from T^-IO, to honour ; " Good, honoured, 
eternal," E. I. 13, 3. 

580. The same ; " Belonging to the honoured priests," E. I. 
13,3. 

581. The same; "Holy, illustrious, honoured, holy," E. I. 
12, 15. 

582. Sacrifices ; " Also make libations, and perform sacri- 
fices and other similar honours," R. S. 11. 

583. The same ; " Perform sacrifices and other honours," 
R. S. 12. 

584. 585. The same; R. S. 3. 

586. The same ; " Thousands of things dedicated, thousands 
of sacrifices, thousands of other good libations," E. I. 52, 42. 

587. The same; E. I. 48, b 3. 

588. The same; E. I. 12, 10, and E. I. 19, 9. 

589. Sacrificial; " Sacrificial geese," E. I. 51. "Sacrifi- 
cial loaves," E. I. 25, 5. 

590. This is the first word of numerous inscriptions addressed 
to the gods, and is always followed by the preposition to. We 



VOCABULARY. 83 

may translate it honour,, or, as an adjective, sacred; " Sacred 
to Amothph the son of Pthah," M . H. i. 30. 

591. The same, in the plural; "Honours to Pthah," M. H. 
i. 5. 

592. The same; "Honours to Sabac-Ra," M. H i. 35. 
593». A sacred gift ; " A sacred gift of life and power to the 

lord of the world Thothmes," H. 80. 

594. For ever ; " A kingdom remaining to himself and his 
children for ever," R. S. 5. This is perhaps the word £/TR rt, 
death. 

595. Living for ever; u King Ptolemy living for ever, be- 
loved by Pthah, god Epiphanes thrice blessed," R. S. 6, 12 and 
14. 

596. Eternal, usually spoken of a man already dead ; "Ame- 
no, a man deceased, eternal," E. I. 39, 10. 

597. The same ; " The gods Soteres, eternal," meaning the 
deceased Ptolemy Soter and his wife, R. S. 6. 

598. The same ; " The son of the sun, lord of battles, Necta- 
nebo, gifted with life for ever by the immortal gods," H 8, I p. 

599. The same; " A man deceased, eternal," E. I. 1,1. 

600. The same, in the feminine ; " The royal wife, grand, 
beloved, eternal," E. I. c 2. 

601.. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 57, 16. 

602. King, meaning of Upper Egypt, to which this form of 
crown belonged ; " The good king, lord of battles, Amunothph 
III.," H. 13, 1. Also queen; " Neith the queen, the great mo- 
ther-goddess," E. I. 16. This is the high crown with the ball 
upon the top, described by Diodorus Siculus, as worn by the 
priests of Ethiopia. It is also the mitre of the Jewish priests, 
described in Exodus, xxviii. 39. 

603. The same, meaning king of Lower Egypt, to which this 
form of crown belonged ; " The good king, son of the sun, Pto- 
lemy living for ever," H. 64, Q q. Also queen ; u Neith the 
queen, the lady of Sais," E. I. 16. Also the letter N, the Coptic 
preposition rt^ and as such for, to, of, belonging to ; " He 
received the country of the kingdom from his father," R. S. 10. 
"Also set up a statue to King Ptolemy," R. S. 6. This is the 

g2 



84 VOCABULARY. 

crown of the Jewish priest which was worn over the mitre. Exo- 
dus, xxix. 6. 

604. The double crown, formed by the union of the former 
two. It is found on the monuments as early as the reign of 
Amunothph III.; H. 13. It was called the pshent; R. S. 9. 
This name is from 6~etVT, to govern, with the article prefixed. 

605. Queen, having the feminine termination ; M. H. i. 16. 

606. King of Upper Egypt ; E. I. 8. Also queen ; over the 
figure of a goddess, E. I. 28. This group is interchangeable with 
No. 644. 

607. King of Lower Egypt, and also queen ; in the inscrip- 
tions just quoted. This group is interchangeable with No. 663, 
and they both have the same sound, NOUT. 

608. King of Upper Egypt; E. I. 36, 11. The second cha- 
racter is the word ' lord/ 

609. King of Lower Egypt; E. I. 36, 11. 

610. King of Upper and Lower Egypt ; " The son of the 
sun, king of Upper and Lower Egypt, Ptolemy living for ever, 
beloved by Pthah and Isis," E. I. 4, 5. In these later inscrip- 
tions the titles are less simple and more ornamental. 

611. King of Upper Egypt; E. I. 36, 17 and 21. 

612. King of Lower Egypt; E. I. 36, 17 and 21. 

613. King of Upper and Lower Egypt; E. I. 36, 11. Each 
of these three sitting figures follows the title as the determina- 
tive sign, and they are well distinguished by their crowns. Also 
Horus, who is known by the double crown ; ff Defender of the 
kingdoms like Horus," E. I. 42, 4. 

614. Queen of Upper and Lower Egypt; " The queen Bere- 
nice," H. 77, Q o. 

615. King of Upper Egypt; E. I. 4, 6. The latter half of 
this is perhaps from &HIT, or eg^OTH, near, meaning upper. 

616. King of Lower Egypt; E. I. 4, 6. The latter letters 
are perhaps from cnfKOV, distant, or OTerTT, lower. 

617. King of Upper Egypt ; " King, lord, chief of the priests," 
E. I. 84, 6. This is the same as No. 615. 

618. Upper and Lower Egypt; R. S. 10. Each character 
for land or city is distinguished by its peculiar crown. 



VOCABULARY. 85 

619. The same; E.I. 4, 6. 

620. Lord ; a Chief of the scribes deceased, son of the lord 
the priest Iohmes deceased/ ' E. I. 77, 5. This is perhaps rtH&, 
lord. 

621. Probably coronations ; " The processions and corona- 
tions, with the boat of Ra, on the last year in the month of 
Chceac, of the illustrious reign of King Ptolemy/' E. I. 4, 5. 

622. Wear crowns ; " The priests of the temples of Egypt 
shall wear crowns during the proclamations/' R. S. 12. This 
character also forms part of the words gold, and silver, and 
kingdom. 

623. Kingdom, or rather king-ship ; " With the other bless- 
ings of a kingdom remaining to himself and his children for 
ever/' R. S. 5. The first character is the sign of abstraction; 
the last three are the word f grand/ 

624. The same; "Also on Paophi the seventeenth day he 
received the country of the kingdom from his father/' R. S. 10. 

625. The same ; " King of the gods, defender of the kingdom," 
Denon, 118. 

626. Kingdoms ; " Defender of the great kingdoms, like Ho- 
rus/' E.L 42,4; also B. 45. - 

627. The king ; " On Paophi the seventeenth day the king 
received the country of the kingdom from his father," R. S. 10. 

628. Upon the investiture ; " Which he wore upon the in- 
vestiture in the temple with the country of the kingdom," R. S. 
9. The first character is the preposition c on.' The ceremony 
here spoken of was that upon the occasion of Ptolemy Epiphanes 
ceasing to be a minor, in the eighth year of his reign, when he 
took upon himself the government of Egypt. 

629. King, from the Coptic OTpO, and with the article pre- 
fixed, it becomes the well-known title Pharaoh. It was not used 
by the native sovereigns only, but also by the Ptolemies and 
Koman emperors; H. 65, and elsewhere. The crown on the 
bird's head, and the asp hanging from the sun, are mere orna- 
ments. This group is translated Apollo, meaning Horus, on the 
obelisk of Hermapion (see page 20) . 

630. The same, with the article; B. 51. But in the last line 



86 VOCABULARY. 

of Hermapion's obelisk the first character in this group is treated, 
not as the article, but as heavenly. See No. 41. 

631. Queen, a title of Cleopatra Philometor ; H. 45. 

632. King; E. I. 37, a 1, and B. 52. 

633. King of Phoenicia, being on the reverse of some coins 
struck by the Ptolemies at Tyre and Sidon. The Greek artist 
has put the thunderbolt in place of the sun. The palm-branch, 
called a phoenix, marks the country. 

634. King and queen, on the reverse of the Egyptian coins 
when Cleopatra Cocce was reigning jointly with her son. The 
two eagles show that there were two sovereigns. 

635. Monarch, or sole ruler; " The monarch the illustrious 
king of Upper and Lower Egypt," R. S. 10. The vulture may 
mean ' sole/ from XSL&.'X&.&.T, alone ; the basilisk is the word 
( king/ See No. 286. This or the following is probably the group 
translated by Hermapion ' lord of the diadem/ as the asp was 
the ornament of the royal diadem. 

636. Queen ; a title of Queen Nitocris, B. 50, 3. 

637. Son of the sun, a title which usually precedes a king's 
second name ; E. I. 42. In the Greek beginning of the Rosetta 
Stone the king is called " Son of the sun, Ptolemy immortal, 
beloved by Pthah." It is the word e Zerah/ the name of an 
Ethiopian king mentioned in 2 Chron. xiv. 

638. The same ; " Son of the sun, king of Upper and Lower 
Egypt, Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah and Isis," E. I. 4, 5. 
Here the egg is used for ' son/ instead of the goose in the last 
group. 

639. Daughter, of the sun ; a title of Queen Ames-Athori, 
wife of Amunothph I., M. R. 29 ; and of Queen Nitocris, on 
her great obelisk, B. 48. It may have been read Tesera; and 
was perhaps the name Acherres, which Manetho gives to two 
queens in his list of Theban sovereigns. 

640. The same ; " Daughter of the sun, mistress of the world, 
Cleopatra, the goddess Philometor," H. 45. 

641. Son of Horus ; " The king the brave son of Horus ," B. 
52. This seems to be the sentence quoted on the north side of 
Hermapion's obelisk (p. 22), and there read as ' son of Heron/ 



VOCABULARY. 87 

642. King, a title usually placed before the first of a king's 
two names; E. I. 42. " A statue to King Ptolemy/' R. S. 14. 
It is not a single word, but the union of two titles, each denoting 
an order of priests, one chiefly used in Upper Egypt and the 
other in Lower. It is sometimes followed by two determinative 
signs; E. I. 36, 21. It was probably pronounced sot-nout. 

643. The same double title. It is used before every name in 
the middle row of kings in the Tablet of Abydos ; M. H. ii. 9. 

644. The same, meaning king of Upper Egypt ; E. I. 36, 17, 
where it is followed by the name of that country. Also royal; 
" The priest of Amun, the royal son of Tacelmothe deceased," 
E. I. 35, a 16. It may be pronounced SOT, and is perhaps the 
word meant by S ethos, which Manetho gives as a name of Ra- 
meses, at the head of his nineteenth dynasty. 

645. The plural of the same ; E. I. 31 (second part) . 

646. The same ; over the figures of these priests, who all wear 
the crown of Upper Egypt, E. I. 31. It is spelt soteno, from 
COTTer^ to govern. 

647. The same; E. I. 31 (first part). 

648. King; " Apis-Osiris ruler of Amenti, king of the gods," 
E. I. 4, 1 . Also royal ; u His mother the royal daughter," 
E. I. 35, a 15. This is the word ' Sethon/ which Herodotus gives 
as a name to a priest of Memphis. 

649. The same ; " Offerings to Aroeris, from the king, lord of 
the world, Rameses II.," B. 57. 

650. Royal; " The royal scribe Mandoo," E. I. 83, 12. 

651. The same, a contraction of the last; E. I. 83, 13. 

652. Some kind of priestess ; " His mother a priestess of the 
great Ra," E. I. 39, 3. Also distinctive of Upper Egypt ; and in 
this sense opposed to the lotus flower of Lower Egypt, E. I. 39, 6. 

653. The same ; E. I. 26, where each of the deceased per- 
son's female ancestors was of this priestly rank. 

654. Royal, or splendid ; " In manner splendid" R. S. 5 ; 
where however the Greek translation has " In the accustomed 
manner." Coptic adjectives are often of this double form. It 
maybe CoXceX^ splendid, from CoX, a reed-, or perhaps 6*"lCI, 
excellent, from 6*~e, a plant. 



88 VOCABULARY. 

655. King, being a contraction of the longer word SOTEN, 
No. 648 ; " The Osiris-like king Amyrtseus deceased," E. I. 28. 

656. The same ; " Praise to the royal Osiris-like divine wife," 
E. I. 116, 9. As this does not look like a contraction, it may 
perhaps be ctjco^ great. 

657. Possibly the same; " The son of the sun, Osirtesen, be- 
loved by the lord of Tanis," B. 28. As the goose is 6*e, the 
three geese may have the force of S o. Also used in the plural ; 
" The gods, rulers of heaven," E. I. 57, 14. 

658. An adjective, possibly illustrious; " A priest for ever 
for the illustrious gods of Egypt," E. I. 31 (second part) . This 
twig with two leaves seems distinguished from the twig with four 
leaves, though sometimes interchanged with it. It may have the 
force of o U ; and this word may be onfUMrt, light. 

659. The same ; u The learned illustrious son beloved by the 
priests, Mandothph," E. I. 13, 6. 

660. The same; E. I. 32 (third part). 

661. The same, in feminine; "The illustrious daughter of 
Ra," M. H. i. 9. ' 

662. The same; M. H. i. 33. 

663. King of Lower Egypt ; E. I. 36, 17, where the meaning 
is limited by the name of the country that follows. Ammianus 
Marcellinus (lib. xvii.) says that a bee meant a king. It is pro- 
bably spelt N o u T. 

664. The same, in the plural; E. I. 32 (second part), where 
it is one of the four orders of priests, of which No. 646 was the 

665. The same; E.I. 32. [first. 

666. One of this order of priests ; E. I. 44, 2. 

667. Servant, a title belonging to another of the four orders 
of priests ; " Son of the sun, lord of battles, servant in the tem- 
ple," E. I. 28 (second part) . It is the word &U)Kj a servant. 
The bird is the Numidian demoiselle. The name of King Boc- 
choris means ' servant of Ra.' 

668. The same; E.I. 106, 17. 

669. The same, in the plural ; E. I. 32 (second part) . 

670. The same; E.I. 32. It is spelt bochono. 

671 . A priestess of the same order ; " A priestess in Thebes," 



VOCABULARY. 89 

E. I. 59, 2. The feminine article is here inserted before the last 
letter. 

672. The same ; " Servant of the slaves/' E. I. 57, 42. 
" Priestess of the gods/' E. I. 57, 12. In these five groups the 
ball is not RA or R, but CH 9 in the Alphabet. 

673. King, but seldom used in relation to a country go- 
verned ; " A gift to Osiris, ruler of Amenti, righteous good king 
for ever," £. /. 2, 1. 

674. The same ; " Apis-Osiris, ruler of Amenti, king of the 
gods, blessed king for ever," E. L 4, 1. 

675. Queen; "The son of the sun Ptolemy immortal, be- 
loved by Pthah, and his sister his wife the queen Cleopatra, gods 
Philometores," H. 64, V. 

676. The same ; " In the reign of the queen, mistress of the 
land, Cleopatra," E. I. 4, 12. 

677. Kings; E.I. 31 (first part). 

678. King of kings, a title of Osiris ; E. I, 1, 2. 

679. The same, a title of Rameses II. ; E. 1. 42, 1. 

680. Melek, or Satrap, from the Hebrew ]Jft, the governor 
of a province, a title used even before the time of Abraham ; 
"Melek in the reign of Amunmai Thor I. deceased," E. I. 83, 5. 

681. The same, followed by the determinative sign. In the 
thirtieth year of Darius we meet with " the melek of Upper and 
Lower Egypt, Nephra, son of the melek of Upper and Lower 
Egypt, Amasis," B. 3. The owl on the very earliest of the Egyp- 
tian coins seems meant for this word c satrap/ as the eagle, No. 
633, on the coins of the Ptolemies, means the word e king/ JThose 
seem to be the coins of the satrap Aryandes. 

682. Lord, as in many of the following groups. It has the 
sound of NEB, and thus is the first syllable of the name of the 
goddess Nephthys, No. 153. From neb, the name of this vessel, 
we have the Coptic word rtee& 5 to float ; and hence it repre- 
sents the word ItR-ft., lord. Also full ; " For the blessing of Ki 
born of Crocodilothph, a man deceased, full of blessings," E. I, 
15, 4. In this sense it may be the word KCUX, a dish, and thus 
be used for K(J0T6^ full. As a plural termination, No. 442, it 
may represent ru&ert, all, or the plural article KI. 



90 VOCABULARY. 

683. Lord ; " Ruler of Amenti, lord of Upper Egypt/' E. I. 
19, 9; also^J./. 25, 3. 

684. The same, in the feminine ; " Honour to Nephthys, lady 
of heaven, mistress of the earth," M. H. i. 16. 

685. Lady of the house, a title common to all women of 
rank ; E. I. 52, 2 and 47. It is the Coptic word rte&RI 5 lord 
of the house, though in hieroglyphics it is always a feminine 
title. 

686. The same, with the feminine article ; " His wife the lady 
of the house," E.I. 39, 2. 

687. Lord of Lower Egypt, following the name of a god 
wearing the crown of the lower country ; H. 13, U v. The flower 
is the lotus of Lower Egypt. 

688. Lord of Upper Egypt ; opposed to the former, H. 13, 
N v. The flower is the lily of the upper country. 

689. Lord of writing, a title of Thoth the inventor and god 
of letters; M . H. i. 26. 

690. Lord of the waters, a title of Nef or Kneph, as he 
was worshipped at Elephantine, one of the towns in which the 
Nile's rise was measured by a nilometer ; H. 57. 

691. Probably lords of battles, meaning conquerors; "Con- 
querors of the eternal serpent/' E. I, 64. 

692. Lord of battles ; " Lord of the world, lord of battles, 
Rameses 11./' M. R. 64, and H. 87, b. The second character is 
the sword which the king there holds in his hand. 

693. A title which we may also translate lord; u Lord of 
Ethiopia" is one of the titles of the winged sun at the head of the 
tablet, E. I. 73. The character may represent Xec, a tongue, 
and thus mean Xecye, powerful. 

694. Nearly the same ; " Anubis lord of Egypt," E. I. 4, 4. 

695. Nearly the same, a title of King Ptolemy; E. I. 4, 5. 

696. The same, in the feminine ; " Isis queen of Egypt," E. L 
72, 9. 

697. Nearly the same ; " Honour to the deified lord Hapi- 
men," E. I. 4&, 13. It is probably the word X06IC, lord. 

698. A title which we may translate ruler ; " Osiris, ruler 
of Amenti," E. I. 14, 2. As the vase is neb, the three vases 



VOCABULARY. 91 

become NEBO, the name of the Babylonian god, and part of the 
name of several Babylonian kings. 

699. The same; E. I. 2, and E. /. 37, c 2. 

700. The same ; " Eor the honour of Osiris, ruler of the 
priests/' E. I. 2. The two feathers give to this group the same 
termination in sound as the last. 

701. The same; " Osiris, ruler of the temples/' H. 67, S f. 

702. Ruler of the countries ; H. 42, L r. Each of the last 
three letters is a K, and they mean K£.£,I, the earth. 

703. A title of Anubis ; E. I. 14. The last character perhaps 
denotes some part of Egypt. 

704. Lord of the world, so translated by Hermapion, on 
the obelisk (page 21). It usually stands before a king's first 
name, E. I. 15, and E. I. 22. The stroke is a T, hence the two 
strokes make OO^ the world. Or it may mean lord of the two 
countries of Upper and Lower Egypt. 

705. The same, a title of Cleopatra; E. I. 4, 12. The scara- 
bseus has the force of T H o or HO. 

706. The same, but in a bilinguar translation it is translated 
queen ; " The son of the sun Ptolemy immortal, beloved by 
Pthah, and his sister his wife the queen Cleopatra, gods/' H. 
64, V. 

707. The same ; " A royal gift dedicated to Athor the queen," 
E.L 35, b1. 

708. Most gracious, so translated on the Rosetta Stone, 
where it is a title of Ptolemy Epiphanes. It perhaps means l full 
of good/ or ' lord thrice good.' 

709. Beneficent, or Euergetes, the title of one of the Ptole- 
mies ; {e The son of the sun Ptolemy, and Queen Cleopatra, gods 
Euergeta," H. 64, q. It is literally < full of gifts.' 

710. The same, a title of Serapis ; M. H. i. 29. 

711 . Lord of heaven ; " Rameses II., beloved by Horus-Ra, 
the great god, the lord of heaven," E. I. 15. See Heaven, No. 
41. 

712. The same ; " Isis the great mother-goddess, like Ra, the 
queen of heaven," E. I. 4, 1. Before the last character is the 
article T\eo 5 the. 



92 VOCABULARY. 

713. Lords of the country; Osiris, Pthah-Sokar, and Anu- 
bis are so called, E. I. 2, 1. 

714. Queen of the two countries, meaning Upper and 
Lower Egypt; the title of a goddess, M. H. i. 39. 

715. Goddess of the two countries; a title of Neith, 
E. L 16. 

716. Lord of the countries of the world; a title of 
Amun-Ra, H. 43, A q. The three middle characters are each K, 
and represent the word K^.^,1, land. 

717. The same ; u A gift to Amun, lord of the countries of the 
world, Osiris king for ever, and Anubis, ruler of the temples of 
Egypt," E. I. 56, b 3. 

718. Lord of the country; H. 67, K s. The latter charac- 
ter means e the fields/ 

719. Lord of Lower Egypt ; " Osiris, ruler of Amenti, lord 
of Upper Egypt and lord of Lower Egypt" E. I. 39, 6. 

720. Lord of Upper Egypt, or of Thebes, in the sentence 
last quoted. 

721. Lady of Sais, a title of Neith ; E. I. 16, and E. I. 33 ; 
inscriptions made in the reigns of Hophra and Amasis, when 
that goddess was in highest honour. 

722. Lord of some part of Egypt ; a title of Horus, M. H. i. 
34. 

723. Lord of Ethiopia; E.I. 35, b 5. See Ethiopia, No. 
894. 

724. The same ; a title of the winged sun, E. L 3, and E. I. 4. 

725. Lord of Ombos, from the temple in that city ; H. 65, V. 

726. Probably lord of Esne ; E. I. 10, 7. The upright 
character in other places, Nos. 1838 and 1839, stands for COtt, 
brother, and therefore these three characters represent CttHT, 
brothers, and in this group the city CttH, or Esne. 

727. The same ; E. I. 4, 4, where it is a title of Knef. 

728. A title of Horus, meaning lord of some city; M. H. i. 31. 

729. Probably lord of Egypt, the country overshadowed by 
the winged sun ; a title of Pthah, H. 70, U v ; and of Horus, 
H. 72, K y. 

730. Lord of Mendes, a title of the god Mando ; M . H. i. 



VOCABULARY. 93 

33. The dog-headed sceptre may have the force of A ; the os- 
trich feather on the top of it, of men ;■ which, with the D or T 
following, becomes amende, or Mendes. The square character 
is the determinative sign for the fields of Lower Egypt (see No. 
770), and it thus distinguishes Mendes from Hermonthis, where 
the same god was worshipped. 

731. The same; " In the fifteenth year, on the twenty-fifth 
day of Mesore, in the reign of the priest the lord of Mendes" 
H. 43, Q, f. The king meant is Tacelothe of Bubastis. 

732. Lord of Thebes; E. I. 21, 1. It perhaps contains the 
word &.&.KI, city. 

733. The same ; E. I. 9, 12. Instead of the word < lord/ we 
have the prefix rt<L, belonging to. 

734. A title before the first name of Amunothph II. ; H. 13, 
where it is used for No, 704, rte& OO, lord of the world. Thus 
cJ^T'j a leg, represents in sound <£><L OO, the world. 

735. A title given to Amunothph III. ; E. I, 24, a 1, mean- 
ing lord of some blessings. 

736. A title given to Psammetichus ; H. 7, S p. It is the 
same as the last ; the sceptre is symbolical for power, and is used 
for c lord/ Or these characters may mean power and blessings 
rather than a title. 

737. King of heaven ; " Horus, king of heaven" M. H. i. 
31. It is the same as No. 712. 

738. King of the world, a title of Ptolemy Caesar ; M. R. 
23. It is the same as No. 705. 

739. Country, or sometimes city. When used as a letter it 
is a K, and it stands for K<L£,Ij land. 

740. The same in the dual, always meaning Upper and Lower 
Egypt; " The gods of the two countries," E. I. 35, a 13 ; also 
E. L 16. 

741. The same, in the plural ; E. I. 38, 8, where it means the 
cities of Upper Egypt, as distinguished from No. 767, the fields 
of Lower Egypt. See No. 769. 

742. Upper Egypt; E. I. 36, 17. The twig is distinctive of 
the upper part of the country. See No. 642. 

743. Lower Egypt, opposed to the last in the same quotation. 



94 VOCABULARY. 

744. Upper and Lower Egypt; H. 13, Gv. One plant is 
probably a lily, and the other a lotus. By a mistake of the artist 
they are here drawn alike. 

745. The same; "In the temples belonging to Upper and 
Lower Egypt;' E. I. 72, 10. 

746. The earth ; " Guardian of the temples in Amenti and 
on earth," E. I. 117, 10. Probably also country, like No. 739; 
" The gods lords of the country," E.I. 2 ; and in R. S. 14. 

747. The determinative sign for country, used chiefly in the 
case of foreign lands out of Egypt. 

748. The same, in the plural ; B. 33. 

749. The same, often following the name of a foreign coun- 
try. The bent finger is a T ; the whole is the word &o } land. 
See No. 909. 

750. The same ; " The people of the land of the Sharemo," 
B. 43, 20. 

751. The same, in the plural; B. 43, 12. 

752. The same; " Guardian of the land," E. I. 22, 9. This 
is also OO, the land. 

753. The same, in the dual ; " The royal daughter of the lord 
of the two countries, Psammeticus deceased," E. I. 58, 2. 

754. The same, in the plural ; " King of the countries of 
Amenti," E. I. 57, 10. This clearly proves that the former group 
was the dual, though in some other cases the two strokes are in 
the singular, as in the following. 

755. Upper Egypt, being known by the peculiar reed ; a Anu- 
bis of Upper Egypt," M. H. i. 18. 

756. The same ; " Isis the great mother-goddess, Anubis of 
Upper Egypt, and Anubis of Lower Egypt," E. I. 39, 6. 

757. Lower Egypt, known by the lotus, in the sentence last 
quoted. 

758. Ethiopia; it is spelt Sabac-Tho, or the land of the god 
Sabac, E. I. 37, 1, an inscription in honour of Sevechus, king of 
that country. 

759. Upper and Lower Egypt ; " It has pleased the priests 
belonging to Upper and Lower Egypt," are the first words of the 
enactment of the decree on the Rosetta Stone, line 5. 



VOCABULARY. 95 

760. The same; E. I. 36, 13, and E. I. 37, c 2. 

761. Upper Egypt, distinguished as before, and also by the 
peculiar crown ; " Priest of Upper Egypt and of Lower Egypt," 
E. I. 79, 6. 

762. Lower Egypt, in the sentence last quoted. 

763. Country ; " An offering of the country to his father," 
H. 88, where King Amyrtseus is presenting this character to the 
god Thoth. 

764. The same, in the plural ; " Like the heavens, the ever- 
lasting lord of the countries of the conquered people," B. 34. 

765. Country; " Received the country of the kingdom from 
his father," meaning the territory annexed to the crown, R. S. 10. 

766. The same ; u On his investiture in the temple with the 
country of the kingdom," R. S. 9. 

767. The same, in the plural ; " Clothe the statue for the 
ceremonies like to the gods of the country, 3 ' R. S. 7. In E. I. 
38, 8, these characters mean the fields of Lower Egypt as dis- 
tinguished from Upper Egypt. 

768. Perhaps country ; " From the new moon of Thoth du- 
ring five days in every country," R. S. 12. See No. 788. 

769. Upper countries ; E. I. 38, 8. For the word upper, 
see No. 1384. 

770. Lower countries ; E. I. 38, 8. For the word lower, 
see No. 1385. 

771. Upper and Lower Egypt; E. I. 73, 11. The ass's 
head is an o, from 6IU3, an ass. 

772. Egyptians ; " To the gods of the Egyptians/' E. I. 61. 
It is spelt ACHEMO, and hence ^QiJULl, Egypt. 

773. The same ; " Belonging to Thebes of the Egyptians," 
E. I. 9, 12. 

774. The same, with a different form of the CH ; E. I. 102, 

Al. 

775. The same ; " Thoth, lord of the Egyptians," E. I. 4, 2. 
This is a contraction of the former groups by the omission of 
an N. 

776. The same ; " By this it is known that it is lawful for the 
Egyptians to honour" [the statue of King Ptolemy], R. S. 13. 



96 VOCABULARY. 

This group is of two words, and seems to be literally e the Egyp- 
tians of the land.' 

777. The same ; " By this it is known that it is lawful for the 
Egyptians to honour the two gods/' meaning Ptolemy Epiphanes 
and his queen, Salt's Essay, pi. 5. This inscription, of which but 
a small part remains, seems to have been a copy of the Rosetta 
Stone, but made a few years later, after the king's marriage. 

778. Egypt ; " Anubis, lord of Egypt," E. I. 25, 2. The last 
two letters are T o, the land. 

779. Egyptian Thebes; E.I. 11, 12. For Thebes, see No. 
806; see also No. 537. 

780. Egypt; "The gods, rulers of Egypt," E. I. 30 (third 
part). It is literally ' the land of the Egyptians.' 

781. The same; E. I. 31 (second part). 

782. The same ; E. 1. 31 (second part) . 

783. The same; E. I. 30 (first part). 

784. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Anubis, lord of Egypt," 
E. I. 14. 

785. The same ; " The boats of Egypt," E. I. 28 (second 
part) . 

786. The same, in an hieratic inscription ; E. I. 52, 53, and 
E. I. 53, a 5. The fish is another form of the letter M. 

787. The same ; " Amasis beloved by Nef, lord of Egypt," 
H. 42, Gy. 

788. The same; E. I. 10, 15. 

789. The same ; E. I. 12, 2. In these there is a letter N not 
easily explained. 

790. The same ; " Miamun Rameses II., the great king, lord 
of Egypt," M. R. 116, 14. 

791. The same ; " Anubis of Lower Egypt, Anubis of Thebes, 
Anubis of Ethiopia, and Anubis of Egypt," E. I. 72, 4. 

792. The same; E.I. 72, 3. Compare No. 790. This form 
of K has here the force of K A M, as it has in the word Black, 
No. 1714. 

793. Egyptians, one of the four races of men who together 
formed the subjects of the kingdom ; M. R. 157, and B. 4St. In 
M. R. 158, they have a fair skin. This word is written back- 



VOCABULARY. 97 

wards; the first letter is a th, used instead of the guttural CH. 

794. The same ; M. R. 157. A tribe of red men well clothed. 

795. Egypt ; " The priests of the temples of Egypt shall wear 
crowns during the proclamations/' R. S. 12; also R. S. 7, R. S. 
8, and R. 8. 14. This compound word is not easily divided into 
its parts. The last character, the ring, in which a king's name is 
usually enclosed, has the force of p^N^ a name, and, with the 
two characters before it, may mean nipuOJUU, a man. 

796. The same ; " Honour to the gods, lords of Egypt" E. I. 
72, 13. 

797. Theban ; the word following in the inscription is pro- 
bably ' mines/ B. 50, 11. It is spelt ranres, perhaps p€JULpKC 5 
Theban. 

798. Egypt ; " To be named Ptolemy the defender of Egypt" 
R. S. 6. Also Lower Egypt ; E. I. 4, 4, where Upper Egypt is 
mentioned separately. 

799. The same ; " Horus the defender of Egypt," H. 65, E k. 

800. The country of the winged sun, meaning Upper Egypt, 
or perhaps Thebes. Horus is lord of this country ; E. I. 4, 4. 

801. Thebes; " Beloved by Anubis, lord of Thebes," B. 40, 
10. It is the word ABO, city, which, with the article prefixed, 
becomes tabo, or Thebes. The word still remains in Medineh 
Tabo, the village in the western suburb of that city. 

802. The same; "Osirtesen III., beloved by Osiris the righte- 
ous judge, lord of Thebes," E. I. 6. 

803. The same, meaning also the Thebaid, or Upper Egypt ; 
" Thoth, lord of the priests ; Nef, ruler of Upper Egypt," E. I. 
39, 7. 

804. The same, without the determinative sign of a country ; 
" A gift dedicated to Osiris, ruler of Amenti, great god, lord of 
Thebes," E. I. 47, a 2. 

805. The same; E.I. 57, 6. 

806. The same ; E. I. 23, a 4. It is literally ' the city of the 
temple of Ra/ which name was afterwards contracted into ' the 
city.' 

807. The same ; " The chief of the temple in Thebes," E. 1. 
56, a 2. The second character is usually P, but here b. 

h 



98 VOCABULARY. 

808. The same ; " Anubis of Lower Egypt, Anubis of Thebes, 
Anubis of Ethiopia," E. I. 73, 4. 

809. The same ; " The chief of the lands of Thebes, in the 
reign of Chofo," B. 33, 31. In this and other groups the double 
T would seem to have only the force of a single T. 

810. The same; " Sacred to Athor, queen of Thebes/' M. R. 
115. 

811. The same ; " In the temples of Upper Egypt," R. 8. 11. 
The pomegranate has the force of ab, see No. 470. 

812. Thebans; " The gods of the Thebans," B. 45, 5. This 
is the word peJLR.rtfL&.KI, man of the city. The first sitting figure 
is the word pe&JL, man, and the second is the determinative sign. 
See No. 1771 for the same double figure. 

813. The same ; " The goddess the great queen of Thebes" 
H. 67, L i. It is spelt B K, being perhaps JS.A.KI, a city. 

814. The same, the name of the goddess of Thebes ; M. H. i. 
49. It is spelt APT, with the determinative sign for a city, and 
is to be read tape, as the article, which ends the hieroglyphical 
word, is at the beginning of the Coptic word. 

815. The same; u Sacred to Amun-Ea the ruler of Thebes" 
M. R. 86. An inscription of Rameses III. in that city. This 
seems to fix the meaning, although the throne seems to point to 
a city dedicated to Isis. 

816. The same; "Athor queen of Thebes," M.R. 86; also 
M. R. 122. 

817. The same; "The daughter of the priest of Amun, in 
Thebes," E. I. 53, b 10. 

818. .The same; literally < the city of Amun/ E. I. 27, 12. It 
may however be the city of Ombos. 

819. Upper Egypt, or the land of the Copts. It is spelt k f o. 
In the procession of men bearing gifts to Thothmes III. one 
tribe is from this part of the country ; Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt., 
i. pi. 4. 

820. Lower Egypt ; " An offering to Osiris, lord of Lower 
Egypt, great god, lord of Upper Egypt," E. 1. 18, 1. As Lower 
Egypt is mentioned first, the tablet was probably carved in that 
district. 



VOCABULARY. 99 

821. The same; " A gift dedicated to Osiris, ruler of Amenti, 
lord of Upper Egypt, and lord of Lower Egypt," E. I. 39, 6. 

822. The same; E.I. 15, 1. 

823. Lower-Egyptian ; " Writing for Lower-Egyptian pro- 
clamations," R. S. 14. Here the Greek translation has ' letters 
Greek/ which means the same, as Greek was the common lan- 
guage of Lower Egypt in the time of the Ptolemies. See No. 
743, Lower Egypt. 

824. The same, in the sentence just quoted, in the other copy 
of the Decree in the temple of Venus at Philse ; Salt's Essay, 
pi. 5. 

825. Lower Egypt; "Anubis of Lower Egypt, Anubis of 
Thebes, Anubis of Ethiopia," E. I. 73, 4. The stroke through 
the three o's is an N. It is the word cnfem~, lower ; and hence 
possibly OTeirtirtj Greek, though this may be the word ' Ionian/ 

826. The same; E. I. 98, 1, and E. I. 106, 3. 

827. The same ; " Libation to Pthah, ruler of Lower Egypt," 
B. 56. 

828. The same; E. I. 27, 12, and E. I. 4, 14. 

829. Meroe, meaning Upper Egypt, which was once so 
called; E.I. 16. 

830 to 852. These are the names of Egyptian cities, taken 
from three lists, arranged geographically, for the most part from 
south to north, on the walls of the temples of Kalabshe, Den- 
dera, and Edfou. On the latter temple above one hundred and 
seventy cities are mentioned as sending their offerings ; but as 
most of them are unknown, and perhaps of less importance, they 
are not here given. See Harris's Egyptian Standards. 

830 may be Kababshe. 

831. Samneh, as known from inscriptions in that city. 

832. Latopolis, where the fish was worshipped. 

833. Hermonthis, the city of which the god Mandoo is usually 

834. Coptos. [called the ruler. 

835. Dendera. 

836. Abydos. 

837. 838. The same. 
839. Ombos. 

h 2 



100 VOCABULARY. 

840. Lycopolis. 

841 . Aphroditopolis, with the cow, the symbol of the goddess 
Athor. 

842. A town between Cynopolis and Lycopolis, perhaps Speos 
Artemidos. 

843. Cynopolis, where the dog was worshipped. 

844. Memphis. 

845. Sais. The arrow is the letter s. 

846. Perhaps Naucratis, a city attached to Sais, which might 
be called the Greek Sais. 

847. Thoum. The crocodile's tail is Chem, which, to ears un- 
used to the guttural, had the sound of Them. 

848. Heliopolis, where a bull was worshipped. 

849. Momemphis, where a sacred cow was kept, which is here 
distinguished by the calf from the bull of the former cities. 

850. Phylse, or Boulac, which two names are perhaps the 
same. 

851. City, spelt ABO. What city is meant is doubtful, for 
there were many besides Thebes that bore that name. 

852. The same, being a part of other names in the above- 
mentioned lists. The pomegranate has the force of A B, as in 
No. 468. 

853. The name of a city in which the mouse-headed goddess 
was worshipped ; M. H. i. 20. Perhaps the city of Athribis. 

854. The name of a country, some part of Egypt ; E. I. 4, 2. 

855. The same; E.I. 4,1. 

856. Memphis ; E. I. 4, 13. It is spelt MNEF. The stroke 
within the M is the N. 

857. The same ; " Pthah, ruler of Memphis," B. 56. 

858. The same, being the word Jt*.ertC|\ 5 followed by a pyra- 
mid, the distinguishing character of that city; E. I. 105, 15. 

859. The same; E. I. 72, 11. The first character may per- 
haps be the syllable MEN. 

860. The same; E. I. 27, 12. 

861. The same; E. I. 4, 4. 

862. The same; E.I. 3. 

863. The same; E. I. 27, 12. 



VOCABULARY. 101 

864. The same, literally l the city of the temple of Pthah'; 
E. 1. 4, 2. 

865. The same, literally ' the place of PthaV; " Going by 
barge to the palace of Memphis," R. S. 9. The last letter is 
AK&., a place. 

866. The name of a city of which Mando is said to be the 
god; E. I. 35, a 5, and E. I. 37, b 1. Evidently Hermonthis, 
in Upper Egypt. See No. 730, Mendes, the other city in which 
Mandoo was worshipped. 

867. Perhaps Syene ; the goddess Athor is called queen of 
this city in an inscription at Philse, H. 64, L u. 

868. The name of a city ; Denon, pi. 118, c. Probably Lato- 
polis. See No. 832. 

869. Probably the city of Atarbechis; E. I. 107, 24. 

870. The same; E. I. 106, 5 and 14. 

871. The name of a city; B. 56. Perhaps Hanes, Tape- 
hanes, or Daphnse. 

872. The same city; M. H. i. 35. Sabak-Ra was worshipped 
there. 

873. The same ; E. I. 16. It is spelt Henaath, and is the 
city called by Isaiah (ch. xxx. 4) ( Hanes/ If we prefix the word 
Tape, the city, it becomes Tahpenes. 

874. The same; E.I. 16. 

875. The same ; E. I. 16. As it is here followed by the cha- 
racter used as the determinative sign of the goddess Neith, we 
see that Henaath was only another way of spelling that god- 
dess's name. In 1 Kings, ii. 19, we are told that Tahpenes was 
the name of the Egyptian queen; but perhaps her real name 
was Neith ; the writer may have been misled by the name of the 
city. 

876. E'Sioot; "Typhon, lord of E'Sioot," M.H. i. 51. The 
word is spelt HI, a house, and CIOJO^ a dog. 

877. The city of San, called also Zoan and Tanis; u Beloved 
by Horus-Chem, lord of the land of San/' B. 40, 8, an inscrip- 
tion in that city. 

878. The same ; Rosetta Stone, lines 4 and 7, where however 
no city is mentioned in the Greek translation. 



102 VOCABULARY; 

879. Probably Tentyra ; B. 56. Pthah is ruler of this among 
other cities. 

880. The same ; " The Nile, the great god of Tentyra," B. 18. 
" Honour to Isis the great goddess, mistress of Tentyra" B. 21. 
Both quotations are from inscriptions in this city. 

881. The same; B. 22. An inscription from the same city. 

882. The city of Sais ; " Neith the queen, the lady of Sais," 
E.I. 16 ; also E. I. 33, c 1 ; inscriptions which confirm Plato's 
remark that Minerva of Sais was Neith. 

883. The same ; E. I. 33, c 2. 

884. Perhaps the same ; E. 1. 4, 4, where Nef is called lord 
of this city. The branch of the Nile which flowed by Sais was 
called the Agathodsemon, or good spirit, or Nef, and the city at 
its mouth was in his honour named Canopus. 

885. Perhaps the same; E. I. 23, b 2. 

886. Ruler of Sais ; E. I. 23, b 2. Perhaps indeed we may 
have here only half of the name of the city. 

887. Hermopolis, or Oshmoonayn ; the eight bars have the 
force of cijJULHrt, eight-, "Thoth, lord of Hermopolis," M. H. 
i. 26. 

888. The same j M. H. i. 26 and 43. 

889. Lord of Oshmoonayn, a title of Thoth, in an hieratic 
MS.; H. 5. 

890. The city of Esne ; E. I. 9, 6. See the force of this 
character in No. 1837. 

891. A part of Egypt, from which came one of the four races 
of men who are bringing gifts to Thothmes III. in the great 
procession; Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt., i. pi. 4. They are the Nu- 
bians, clothed in the same way, but less richly than the people 
of the Thebaid. Some of their gifts are from southern Africa, 
but the obelisks from the quarries of Syene prove that that city 
was within the land meant. It perhaps reached from Silsilis to 
Abosimbel. 

892. Perhaps the same ; E. I. 27, 11 ; also E. I. 48, a 3. 

893. A city probably in the same neighbourhood, of which 
Sabak the crocodile was god ; E. I. 53, b 13. The first letter, 
B, is the word a bo, city. 



73, 14. 






901. 


The 


same; 


E. I. 6. 






902. 


The 


same ; 



VOCABULARY. 103 

894. Ethiopia; « Osiris, lord of Ethiopia," E. I. 25, 1, and 
E. I. 80, 2. It is spelt tt 0, perhaps the word eeuxy. 

895. Ethiopians; mentioned among other nations, B. 4*4*, 4. 

896. The same ; " Lord of the conquered Ethiopians/' B. 

897. Ethiopia; B. 39. [45,14. 

898. The same ; " Honour to Sabak the crocodile, lord of 
Ethiopia" H. 60, E e. The first character is ecnrurr, a statue. 
Hence the name of the country is the same as in No. 895. 

899. The same; E.I. 23, b 2. As the landmark is TOcy, 
we thence have eouocy, Ethiopia. 

900. The same ; " Priest of Nef, lord of Ethiopia," E. I. 

" Beloved by Anubis, lord of Ethiopia," 

" Thothmes III., beloved by Thoth, the 
righteous ruler of Ethiopia" H. 93. An inscription from Samne 
in that country. 

903. A city of Ethiopia conquered by Amunothph III. ; E. I. 
(second series) 26. 

904. Perhaps the same country ; E. I. 23, b 2. 

905. The same; E. I. 73, 4. It is here called ' the land of 
Seb/ from CHill, a sword. 

906. A city in which Thoth was worshipped ; H. 88. An in- 
scription from Mons Troicus, opposite Memphis. 

907. A southern city, conquered by Amunothph III. ; E. I. 
(second series) 26. Perhaps Silsilis; it is spelt SIBSIL. 

908. Perhaps Philse, from the same list of conquered cities. 
It is spelt ball 

909. The country of the Rebo, probably Arabia; M. K 142. 

910. The same; Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt., i. 365. 

911. Another part of Arabia; M. R. 142, and B. 44, 25. 

912. The country of an eastern people, with the Persian head- 
dress, armed with round shields, spears, and swords; perhaps 
Scythians or Tartars, or the people whom Pliny (lib. vi. 20) calls 
Tochari, or Attacori, and places in Bactria. Wilkinson's Anc. 
Egypt., i. 365. 

913. The same; Anc. Egypt., i. 365. 



104 VOCABULARY. 

914. A people conquered by Barneses; B. 60. They dwelt 
to the south of Egypt. 

915. Negro-land ; " The divine beneficent conqueror of Ne- 
gro-land;" M. R. Ill, where Eameses III. has a negro at his feet 
suing for mercy. This word is GO£/tfctj, Ethiopia, which may 
perhaps be the same word as f Cush/ 

916. Negroes; written beside a group of them, M. R. 156. 
Here the letters are placed in the unusual direction : we begin 
to read at the animal's back. 

917. Negro-land; M.R. 142. 

918. The same; M.R. 142. 

919. The same; M. R. 142. The figure is that of a captive, 
with his arms tied behind. 

920. Perhaps Lydians, a people on the borders of Egypt, 
mentioned in Genesis x. 13 as sons of Mizraim; and again in 
Jeremiah, xlvi. 9, as Lydians, who bend the bow ; " Lord of the 
land of the Lydians" H. 41, G m ; an inscription of the reign 
of Thothmosis I., from which we learn that this tribe was already 
subject to Egypt. They were perhaps the same as the Trog- 
loditae. 

921. The same ; one of the four tribes that are bringing gifts 
to Thothmes III., Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt., i. pi. 4. Their gloves, 
horse, chariot, and bear, prove them an Asiatic people, of a colder 
climate than Egypt. Their elephant also is Asiatic, as the Afri- 
can elephant had not yet been caught and tamed. 

922. The same; B. 42; also S-E. 1, where a rare bird in a 
cage is named after this country. 

923. Perhaps Lydian, having an adjective termination; B. 
33, 54. 

924. The name of a country, perhaps Syria; B. 33, 41. 

925. The same; B. 34, 45. 

926. Perhaps Syrian, having tne adjective termination; B. 
33, 13. 

927. Perhaps Babylon ; " Kesitas from Babylon" are men- 
tioned among the booty, H. 42, S m. 

928. An Arab race; M.R. 143. Perhaps the original of our 
word ( Saracens/ 



VOCABULARY. 105 

929. Perhaps the same; "Wilkinson's Anc. Egypt., i. 365. 

930. Perhaps the same; S-E. 5, 20. 

931. Perhaps the same; a nation conquered by the Egyp- 
tians; B. 43, 20. 

932. The same; B. 44,1. 

933. One of the four tribes usually mentioned together; 
E. I. 63, and B. 42. 

934. A land conquered by Rameses ; S-E. 5, 6. It is spelt 
LMNN; and might be either Lebanon or Libyans. 

935. Another land conquered by Rameses ; S-E. 5,16. Per- 
haps Canaan. 

936. A nation conquered by the Egyptians ; B. 44, 4. 

937. A people in the neighbourhood of Egypt; B. 45, 25. 
Perhaps OMO, mercenaries. 

938. The usual determinative sign for water. Each character 
is a picture of the waves, and at the same time the letter N. In 
Coptic, water is JULOnf ; it perhaps originally was NOUN. We 
still have rtOYIt, deep ; and Horapollo says that c Noun' was the 
name of the Nile. 

939. 940. Water, in the plural, meaning perhaps washings ; 
E. I. 31, 3. From JULO30T, water. 

941. Dews of heaven; "Thy name is child of the dews of 
heaven^ E. I. 118, 4; also E.I. 9, 14. It is spelt like JUlOYft 
Urtlte^ distilled water. 

942. One of the waters of Egypt, whether river, lake, or canal ; 
E. I. 106, 7. Or, as it may be translated great waters, it may 
mean the sea. 

943. Lakes ; E.I. 106, 7. Erom fi.e.6.1, a cistern, or &£.&.&€, 
tasteless, without salt. 

944. Deep waters, from &&.&.£, deep; though perhaps it 
may be the same word as the last; Dr. Lee's Triple Mummy- 
case, fig. 15, 48. 

945. Fiery waters, or the lake of fire, from ptOK&, to burn; 
Triple Mummy-case, fig. 15, 47. 

946. Waters of Athor; Triple Mummy-case, fig. 15, 49. 

947. The same waters, named after the goddess Athor; 
E. I. 106, 7. 



106 VOCABULARY. 

948. The Nile, literally the waters of Ethiopia ; _B. 36, where 
it is written in the river, which is well marked by the crocodiles 
swimming in it, and is high enough up the country to have a 
bridge over it. See Ethiopia, No. 895. 

949. Groves ; E. L 29 (first part) . Perhaps of jasmine trees, 
from &.CSLX, jasmine. 

950. Hills; B. 44, 25. 

951. Boundaries; B. 44, 25. From &-d\, a limit. 

952. A fortress; it begins the name of several cities, per- 
haps from TOYXO, to guard; S-E. 5, 16 and 18. 

953. Year, as used in dates ; " In the thirty-ninth year of 
the king Osirtesen I.," E.I. 80, 1. " In the seventh year, on 
the seventh day of Mechir, of the reign of Ptolemy Philopator," 
E. I. 48, a 1. This is the civil year : it had three hundred and 
sixty-five days only ; and hence, for want of a leap-year, the new- 
year's day was always moving. We learn from the writings of 
the astronomers, who always date by the years of the king's 
reign, that these years began on the moveable new-year's day, 
and therefore that the first year of every king's reign was a short 
year, measured from the day of his accession to the last day of 
the year. The first character is a palm-branch, and the last is 
the determinative sign. 

954. Year, used for intervals of time, and not in dates; 
" Aged fifty years, six months, and five days," E. I. 48, a 10. 
This is the Greek eviavros, as the former is iros. 

955. The same; " Aged sixty-four years/' H. 49. 

956. Last year ; " In the last year in the month of Chceac 
of the illustrious reign of King Ptolemy," E. I. 4, 5. The last 
character is the word ,i)£.€. 

957. Yearly ; " Yearly in the first season, from the new 
moon of Thoth, during five days," R. S. 12. The word e year' 
is made c yearly' by the prefix te, as X<LJULHI, year, becomes 
eTeX^JULTII, yearly. 

958. Perhaps the same ; " Yearly, in the reign of Amunmai 
Thor III.," E. I. 6. 

959. The same; " The yearly processions by barge on the 
Nile," B. 59. 



VOCABULARY. 107 

960. Year ; B. 59. It will be observed that the stag has be- 
tween his horns the palm-branch, the character for c year' ; and 
Chseremon says that stag means a year. See page 23. 

961. Festivals at which the palm-branches were carried ; B. 
25. Rompi, goddess of the year, was mistress of these festivals. 

962. New moon ; u Thy name is the new moon/' E. I. 118, 7. 
This figure is according to the remark of Horapollo (lib. i. 4), 
that the new moon, when it has moved fifteen degrees from the 
sun, that is, one day after its conjunction, appears with its horns 
erect. This is more particularly true in the latitude of Egypt. 
In our northern latitude we draw the crescent like the letter C. 
The old moon is here within the horns of the new moon, as if in 
a boat ; and hence the custom of representing the constellations 
when rising heliacally as if in boats. See No. 1049. 

963. The same ; " Like the new moon," B. 58. The deter- 
minative sign is preceded by the word lOQ, moon. 

964. The same ; " She is Horus, she is the moon, she is 
Thoth," .E.J. 116,26. 

965. The changing moon, or moon at its change; " Thy 
name is the changing moon/ 3 E. L 118, 3. From ujtt3-&- 5 to 
change. 

966. The moon, as it forms part of the word month. We may 
remark that the planet is never seen in this position in conse- 
quence of the sun's rays. But as No. 962 is the new moon when 
setting, this may have been supposed to be its unseen figure when 
rising. So from eifiTj rising, we get the word e&.OT } month. 

967. Months, used in describing a person's age; H. 48. 
Again, without the plural sign, H. 49. 

968. The same; "Aged years fifty, months six, days five/' 
E. I. 48, a 10. 

969. Monthly; R. S. 13. The word { month' is made 
' monthly' by the same prefix as that by which ( yeai^ was made 
( yearly,' in No. 957. 

970. The same; R. S. 11. 

971. Perhaps month ; " In the year when he was appointed 
priest for the month in Memphis," E. I. 73, 11. From e&OT, 
a month. 



108 VOCABULARY. 

972. Nearly the same, in the plural ; E. L 73, 6. 

973. Fortnight, or half month, often mentioned in connec- 
tion with the word month; E. I. 104, 3. 

974. The same; E. I. 92, 5, and E. I. 108, 2. 

975. Probably a week ; it follows the words ' month' and 
c fortnight/ E. I. 92, 6. It is spelt u A K S, from Ot XOC, a half, 
meaning a half fortnight. That the early Egyptians were not 
without this division of time is probable from their mourning 
seventy days. Later in their history we know that they used a 
week. 

976. The same; E. I. 104, 3, and E. I. 108, 3. It is spelt 
U K, and may even be the original of our word ' week.' 

977. This and the following eleven groups are the names of 
the twelve months on the astronomical sculpture in the Mem- 
nomium ; B. 58 and 59. They are arranged in three sets of four 
each, distinguished by the characters which were symbolical of 
the three seasons with which, at some early period of Egyptian 
history, they were supposed to be permanently adjusted. The first 
four have a character denoting standing corn or vegetation ; the 
second four the character for housing, or harvest ; and the third 
four the character for water, or inundation. This scheme of 
names is taken from the natural year, which is divided into three 
nearly equal seasons, that of inundation, that of vegetation, and 
that of drought. 

As the civil year had three hundred and sixty-five days only, 
the new-year's day was always moving. In a. d. 138 the new- 
year's day was on our 18th of July ; and Censorinus (De die 
natali) tells us that that was the proper day for the moveably 
new-year's day to fall upon. Of course in four times three hun- 
dred and sixty-five, or one thousand four hundred and sixty years 
before that time, the moveable new-year's day had once before 
fallen on the 18th of July. This was in the year b. c. 1322, which 
Theon the astronomer calls the era of Menophra. The interval 
between these two eras was called a Sothic period. We might 
naturally conjecture that at the era of Menophra the calendar 
had been reformed ; but if it were so the names of the months 
were not made conformable to the seasons of the year, as will be 



VOCABULARY. 



109 



seen in the following calendar, arranged for the first year of the 
Sothic period. The four months which bear the character of ve- 
getation there fall in the season of inundation. 

CALENDAR for the years b.c 1322 and a.d. 138, each being 
the first year of a Sothic period. 



NATURAL year 

of 365 days and a quarter. 


CIVIL YEAR 
of 365 days. 


18 July 


The Dog-star rises helia- 




1 Thoth. 


1 August 

17 „ 

1 September 


cally. 

The Nile overflows its 
hanks, enters the canals, 
and inundates the fields. 


1 

I" 


1 Paophi. 


16 „ 


The Equinox, Sept. 24. 


i 
1 


1 Athyr. 


1 October 
16 „ 


The waters begin to re- 
tire. 


8" 

S3 


1 Chceac. 


1 November 

15 „ 

1 December 

15 „ 

1 January 








Barley, peas, and wheat 
are sown. 

The pools are seen cover- 
ed with the broad leaf of 
the Nymphcea lotus. 


1 

© 


1 Tybi. 
1 Mechir. 


14 „ 






1 Phamenoth. 


1 February 








13 „ 


Peas ripen. 




1 Pharmuthi. 


1 March 


Barley gathered. 








15 „ 


The Equinox, Mar. 20. 




1 Pachon. 


1 April 


Wheat gathered. 






14 „ 






1 Payni. 


1 May 




I 




14 „ 




^ 

s- 


1 Epiphi. 


1 June 
13 „ 
1 July 


The Nile begins to rise at 
Syene. 

Longest day, June 21. 


"3 

a* 


1 Mesore. 


13 „ 






Five days. 



If the civil year had the same length before the year b.c 1322 
as after, we should know that it was in the year b.c 1849 that 



977. 


Thoth. 


981. 


978. 


Paophi. 


982. 


979. 


Athyr. 


983. 


980. 


Choeac. 


984. 



110 VOCABULARY. 

the names of the months agreed with the seasons; but unfor- 
tunately it is not known how long before the year b. c. 1322 the 
length of the civil year was thus fixed. We find these names of 
the months,, however used, on the very earliest of the Egyptian 
monuments. 

Tybi. 985. Pachon. 

Mechir. 986. Payni. 

Phamenoth. 987. Epiphi. 

Pharmuthi. 988. Mesore. 
The names and order of these months are found in Josephi 
Hypomnesticon, in Fabritii Codex Pseudepig. Vet. Test., and in 
iEtius, iii. 4, 48. 

989. This character, which must have originally meant the 
season of vegetation, being now a portion of the civil year, means 
the first third of the civil year ; " Annually in the first 
portion of the year, from the new moon of Thoth, during five 
days," R. S. 12. When this decree was made the year began 
about the 10th of October. 

990. Thoth, the same as No. 977, in the sentence just quoted. 

991. Thoth ; " In the seventeenth year in the reign of King 
Osirtesen I., in the month of Thoth/' E. I. 86, 1. This is one of 
the earliest of the Egyptian inscriptions now remaining to us, 
and we see that these names of the months were already in use. 
This more ancient form of the word however retains the preposi- 
tion of. It is literally the first of vegetation. 

992. Paophi, the same as No. 978; "Also on Paophi the 
seventeenth, when his majesty received the country of the king- 
dom from his father," R. S. 10. 

993. Tybi, the same as No. 981 ; " On the eighth day of 
Tybi/ 3 E. L 4, 14. 

994. The same ; " On the year XXXIX., on the seventeenth 
day of Tybi/' H. 48, 1. 

995. The same ; " In the year XX., on the thirteenth day of 
the month of Tybi, in the reign of King Rameses II.," B. 17, 1. 

996. Mechir, the same as No. 982 ; " In the year VII., on 
the sixth day of Mechir," E. I. 48, a 1 . The common names of 
these months, it will be observed, are not the same as the hiero- 



VOCABULARY. Ill 

glyphical names. Several of them are from the Hebrew, bor- 
rowed perhaps from the school of Heliopolis. This is "^tOD, rain, 
a name quite unsuited to the climate of Egypt. The TH and CH 
are interchanged, as in Pachon, Chem, Champsi, and other words 
in this Vocabulary. 

997. The season or inundation ; u The same season of in- 
undation" is one of a succession of dates, H. 41, G- g. 

998. Pachon, the same as No. 985 ; " In the year LXIL, on 
the twenty-ninth day of Pachon, of King Eameses II., beloved 
by Osiris, ruler of Amenti," E. I. 8. The name Pachon is fan, 
fructifying. Here we may remark that this high date by no 
means proves that the king reigned so long. As he is called ( be- 
loved by Osiris/ he was probably dead ; his successor may have 
continued his series of years. 

999. Payni, the same as No. 986; "Born on the twenty- 
fourth day of Payni," E. I. 48, a 10. The name of Payni is ^1, 
fruits. 

1000. The same, literally 'the tenth month/; it is written 
under this month in the zodiac of the Memnonium, i?. 59. Per- 
haps from JLt-HTT, ten. 

1001. Epiphi, the same as No. 987; "In the year VI., on 
the fifth day of Epiphi, in the reign of Queen Cleopatra," E. I. 
4, 12. The word Epiphi is 1*QN, corn. 

1002. The same ; E. I. 73, 13. 

1003. Me sore, the same as No. 988 ; " On the appointed 
last day of Mesore, the birthday of the priest living for ever," 
R. S. 10. The day on which his birthday was appointed to be 
kept is here meant. The word Mesore is the Egyptian name for 
the constellation of the Bull. See No. 1037. 

1004. Day ; u Shall worship the statue of the king thrice a 
day," R. S. 7. 

1005. The same ; " For fifteen days," E. I. 48, a 7. The first 
two letters are the word e^oonf, day. 

1006. The same ; " Aged years sixty, months six, days five," 
E. I. 48, a 10. Also daily ; " Regulating the daily ceremonies," 
R. S. 3. 

1007. The same ; " Aged years sixty-four, months eight, days 



112 VOCABULARY. 

twenty-six/' H. 49, P. In this sentence the word is used both 
before and after the numerals. 

1008. First day ; " From the first day of Thoth, during five 
days/' R. S. 12. In the Greek this is translated " the new-moon 
day." 

1009. Last day ; " The seventeen last days of the month," 
R. S. 11 ; also R. S. 10. The first character is an H, for the word 
^£.6, last. 

1010. Five days; "From the first day of Thoth, during five 
days/ 3 R. S. 12. 

1011. Birthday; " On the appointed last day of Mesore, the 
birthday of the priest living for ever," R. S. 10. See Born, No. 
1808. 

1012. His name-day; " Clothe the statue for the ceremonies 
like to the gods of the country in the processions, both on the 
accession-day and on his name-day/' R. S. 7. See Name, No. 
1944. 

1013. Hour; "Honour to the hour of the evening star;" 
" The hour twelve of the sun is appointed for ;" " The hour ten 
of the sun is appointed for," M. H. i. 33. It contains the word 
HAY, time, followed by a star as the determinative sign, and is 
preceded by the word appointed. 

1014. The appointed hour ; " The morning star, its ap- 
pointed hour of going forth," E. I. 59, 38. 

1015. The same, written more shortly ; E. I. 29 (second part) . 

1016. The same, in the plural; " The appointed hours of the 
rise of the day," E. I. 28 (first part). This group has the double 
plural termination common to the inscription from which it is 
quoted. 

1017. Planets, or wandering stars; " Hapimen, guardian of 
the planets/ 3 E. I. 45, 15. From aj(JD&T" 5 to wander. 

1018. The same ; " From the setting of the planets, in the 
city of Tanis," E. I. 57, 33. 

1019. Evening star ; " Thy name is the evening star/ 3 E. I. 
118, 5. From pOT&e, evening. 

1020. Perhaps the same; B. 34, 48. From COYtt pov&e, 
the evening star. 



VOCABULARY. 113 

1021. Star of night ; u Thy name is the star of night" E. I. 
118, 6. " Honour to the appointed hour of the star of night" 
M. H. i. 33. From XUOp£, 5 night. The last two characters mean 
' star of heaven/ 

1022. The same; E. I. 28 (first part) ; also E. I. 11, 10. The 
star here is prettily drawn as a lamp hanging from heaven; a 
thought used by Lucretius, who calls the stars lumina pendentes 
lychni. 

1023. Nearly the same; E.I. 28 (first part). From cnrojH, 
night. 

1024. The same ; E. I. 28 (first part) . This is an abridgement 
of the last, and could hardly be understood without a compa- 
rison with it. 

1025. Star of darkness; E.I. 28 (first part), and E.I. 29 
(second part) . From K6KG, dark. 

1026. The same, in the plural; E. I. 31 (third part). 

1027. The same ; " Thy name is the star of darkness" E. I. 
118, 6; also B. 45, 16, with vowels of different forms. 

1028. The same, with a different form of the lamp hanging 
from heaven ; E. I. 64. 

1029. Star of light; E.I. 64. From HotHot, to shine, 
though not in the reduplicate form of the Coptic word. 

1030. The same ; E. I. 29 (second part) . This more modern 
form is reduplicate, though we have an M in the place of the 
second B. 

1031. Morning star, or rather star of the east; " Thy name 
is the morning star" E. I. 118, 5 ; also E. I. 59, 38. From 
JUULJUUXeipe, the east. 

1032. The same; E. I. 53, b 29. 

1033. Bright stars; E. I. 28 (first part). From CCOOjeJUL, 
to burn. 

1034. Star, or rather constellation; B. 59. Also part of the 
names of several constellations ; hence COT, a star. 

1035. Aries, on the zodiac of the Memnonium; B. 59. From 
ec&JV, a sheep ; or better perhaps from CK(5^ a young ass. 

1036. A star in the constellation of the Bull, called bright 
star, no doubt Aldebaran ; B. 59. From fionrficnr, to shine. 

i 



114 VOCABULARY. 

1037. Taurus ; " The rising of Taurus" is written by the side 
of a man standing in a boat, B. 58. This figure is placed about a 
month later, or thirty degrees more easterly, than this constel- 
lation's place in the zodiac, because a star's heliacal rising is 
about that distance from its conjunction with the sun. It is spelt 
M s R A, from JUULCL, a bull. 

1038. The same, in its proper place in the zodiac ; B. 59. In 
our figure the upper semicircle T ought to be a mouth R. 

1039. The same, being the figure of the constellation, with 
its name ; B. 58. This is not unlike the figure usually drawn on 
our globes. It is the mummy of a bull, which was little more 
than a bundle of straw thrust into the skin of his fore quarters, 
with a real head and horns. It was so made to save the very 
great expense of embalming the whole body. 

1040. The rising or the Bull; B. 58. See No. 1061, To 
rise. 

1041. Orion, written over the figure of a man in the attitude 
of this first character, striking at the bull with his spear ; 2?. 58. 
The first character, Horus, has the force of OR, and with the 
letters A, N, it forms the word Orion. 

1042. Gemini, in the third sign of the zodiac ; B. 58. The 
dual form proves the name of the constellation. 

1043. The same, in its proper place in the zodiac of Dendera; 
Denon, pi. 132. 

1044. The same, in its proper place in the zodiac; B. 59. 
From gj&rrpeet, twins. 

1045. The same; " Gemini rises," B. 59. This is spelt nearly 
like the last, but has only one star for the determinative sign. 

1046. Sothis, the dog-star, over the figure of the goddess 
Isis standing in a boat, which represents the heliacal rising of 
this star at the beginning of the month of Thoth, or of the fourth 
sign in the zodiac ; B. 58. 

This is supposed to fix the date of this zodiac, and of Rameses 
II., in whose reign it was made. It was in the year b. c. 1322 
that the dog-star rose on the first day of the moveable month of 
Thoth ; but it would perhaps be looking for more exactness than 
the zodiac of the Memnonium possesses, if we hope to deter- 



VOCABULARY. 115 

mine its date from its astronomical information. The upper half 
of this celebrated sculpture is divided into twelve spaces, over 
each of which is written the name of a month ; and within each 
space is the sign of the zodiac, and the names of the stars in that 
part of the heavens. Under some of the months are also repre- 
sented the constellations which then rise heliacally, each in the 
form of a human figure standing in a boat. The zodiac begins 
with Phamenoth, the seventh month, because, as it would seem, 
the king was then born or crowned. Payni is in Aries, Epiphi 
in Taurus, and Mesore in Gemini. Sothis the dog-star rises he- 
liacally on the first day of Thoth. Three other great stars, per- 
haps a Leonis, /3 Leonis, and a Virginis, mark the beginnings of 
the three next months. Hence one of two things is certain; 
either that this zodiac was made in the year b. c. 1322, when 
Sothis rose on the first of Thoth, as here represented ; or, being 
made some years later, when the civil year had moved from the 
stars, it was made rather according to theory than according to 
observation, as if indeed the civil months had been fixed. The 
latter is much more likely to be the true state of the case, namely, 
that though the heavens and the months are described as they 
were in the year b. c. 1322, yet it was made some years later, 
when the months had moved from those seasons to which they 
were once supposed to be fixed. 

There are several arguments which go to prove the want of 
exactness in this zodiac : 

First. If it were an almanac or picture of the year, we ought 
to find, besides the twelve months, the five extra days, which 
complete the number of three hundred and sixty-five days in the 
year. 

Secondly. The beginning of each of the first four months is 
marked by the rising of an important star. But the great stars 
do not happen to follow exactly at those intervals. 

Thirdly. This zodiac is divided into two parts, not at the equi- 
noxes, but at the solstices. Now the error in determining the 
day of the solstice is ten times as great as that in determining 
the day of the equinox. We cannot hope to find any exactness 
before the time of Eratosthenes and Hipparchus, when the equi- 

i 2 



116 VOCABULARY. 

nox was first noted by means of a gnomon parallel to the earth's 
pole, and a plane parallel to the equator. 

Fourthly. In this sculpture the heliacal rising of the dog-star 
is placed at the time of the summer solstice. The artist did not 
know that these events were separated by about twenty-eight 
days. It was in b. c. 1322 that the dog-star rose on the first of 
Thoth. It was in b. c. 1210 that the summer solstice was on the 
first of Thoth ; hence the zodiac, if it proves its own date, gives 
this latter year, b. c. 1210, to the reign of Rameses II., with at 
least as great a probability as the year b. c. 1322. 

1047. Sothis, spelt more at length; B. 59. 

1018. Isis, under the form of a cow in a boat, meaning the 
rising of the dog-star. It holds the place of the constellation 
Cancer in the zodiac and the planisphere of Dendera ; Denon, pi. 
130 and 132. In the epitaph on Isis, quoted by Diodorus, she 
says, " I am she that riseth heliacally with the dog-star." 

1049. The heliacal rising of the dog-star, in the zodiac of 
Dendera ; Denon, pi. 130. The second figure represents the over- 
flow of the Nile, which begins about the time of that star's rising. 
Like the figure of Aquarius in the same zodiac, it pours out two 
streams of water, and was perhaps borrowed from the astronomy 
of the Chaldees : it denotes rather the Tigris and Euphrates than 
the one river of Egypt. 

1050. Perhaps Leo, a constellation that rises heliacally a 
month later than the dog-star ; B. 58. 

1051. Perhaps Libra, a constellation that rises two months 
later than Leo ; B. 58. 

1052. Perhaps the figure of the Scales, in its place in the 
zodiac; B. 58. 

1053. Scorpio, in its proper place in the zodiac ; B. 58. From 
crreJUUUUCj a scorpion. 

1054. Phoenix, in place of Sagittarius, in the month of Athor, 
or ninth sign of the zodiac ; B. 58. It is the word &eni, a crane, 
or ibis. 

1055. The same; E. L 12, 12, where it is given as a title to 
the deceased. 

1056. Aquarius, in its place in the zodiac ; B. 59. From CCU, 
to water. 



VOCABULARY. 117 

1057. The boat of Ra, in the last sign of the zodiac,, in the 
place of Pisces; B. 59. It may be doubted however whether 
this figure, like that of the phoenix in the ninth sign, means a 
fixed constellation, or points out an event which took place at 
this time of the year. 

1058. Saturn, or the star of Seb ; B. 58. This is the planet 
to which we can give a name with the greatest certainty. It is 
mentioned twice in the zodiac of the Memnonium, once in Virgo, 
and once in Scorpio. 

1059. Rising; " The hours of the rising of the day," E. I. 28 
(first part). From CC06*7 to rise. 

1060. Setting ; " From the setting of the planets in the city 
of Tanis," E. I. 57, 33. From KUOpq, to cease. 

1061. Rises ; " The constellation Gemini rises" B. 59. 
Hence eiirT, the east. This means rising heliacally, or with 
the sun. 

1062. The east, or Aurora ; " Thy name is Aurora" E. I. 
118, 4. From ei&T, the east, and XA.&.1, place. 

1063. Sunrise, or Aurora personified, as shown by the wo- 
man's figure; " She is Aurora" E. I. 118, 27. From HOR, the 
sun, and cy£.I, to rise. 

1064. The same, mentioned with several stars; E. I. 118, 6. 
From pH, the sun, and pKT 5 to be born. 

1065. This figure of a cynocephalus on a column marks the 
summer solstice in the zodiac of the Memnonium, a little before 
the end of the civil year ; B. 58. When the waters covered the 
fields the monkey was driven to sit upon the top of the boundary- 
stone. Horapollo says (lib. i. 16) that a cynocephalus was used 
to mark the equinox. See page 27. But the zodiac here quoted 
shows the nature of his mistake. 

1066. Seven ; " In the year seven," E. I. 48, a 1. The units 
from one to nine inclusive were expressed in this way. 

1067. One ; " The year one, the nineteenth day of Athyr, in 
the reign of Thothmes IV.," H. 80. This is the date of the ta- 
blet between the fore legs of the colossal sphinx. The sphinx 
itself may have been centuries older. 

1068. Six, numerals for the day of the month ; E.I. 4, 12. 



118 VOCABULARY. 

1069. Five ; u In the eleventh year, on the fifteenth day of the 
month of Epiphi," E. I. 73, 13. Horapollo says (lib. i. 13) that 
a star was nsed for the number five. Cscnfj a star, represents 
oj£.e, a half, which was the usual Egyptian word for five. 

1070. Seventy; E. I. 48, 9; and H. 48. The seventy days 
spoken of on these funereal tablets are the days which, according 
to Herodotus, were employed in embalming the body. The pa- 
triarch Jacob was mourned for during these seventy days. See 
Genesis, 1. 3. 

1071. Seventeen; "The seventeen last days of the month," 
R. S. 11. 

1072. Nineteen, following in its place among other hieratic 
numerals ; H. 37. The character for nine is the letter s, from the 
Coptic ^IC 

1073. Forty-nine ; E. I. 72, 13. The meaning of these nu- 
merals is fixed by this tablet. See the following number. 

1074. Twenty-five ; its meaning is to be determined from 
the funereal tablet E. I. 73, where the deceased was born on the 
eighty-first day of the twenty-fifth year of Ptolemy Alexander, 
died on the three hundred and forty-fifth day of the eleventh 
year of Cleopatra, and was buried on the thirtieth day of the 
twelfth year, aged forty-nine years. On turning to the history, 
we find that according to this interpretation of the tablet he had 
entered his forty-ninth year when he died. 

1075. Four hundred; " Living captives four hundred and 
ninety" are mentioned among other booty, H. 41, P r. 

1076. Six thousand; "Wine in bottles six thousand four 
hundred and twenty-eight," H. 41, T h. In every case the nu- 
merals follow the noun. 

1077. Thousands, meaning a great number, used in speaking 
of the amputated hands, the trophies of the conquests of Rame- 
ses; H. 15. Some men are represented as counting the hands, 
while others are writing down the number on tablets. 

1078. The same ; " Numbers of bottles, numbers of oxen and 
geese," E. I. 39, 9. This character for the numeral, as here 
more carefully drawn, represents the broad leaf of the Nymphaea 
lotus, which, on the retreat of the waters of the Nile, is seen in 



VOCABULARY. 119 

myriads covering the stagnant pools and ditches, and may well 
be used, like the sands upon the shore, to express a great num- 
ber. It is (To, a plant, and hence used for cyo^ a thousand. 

1079. Numerous ; " Numerous oxen and geese, and numerous 
other good libations," E. I. 35, a 6. This dual form of an adjec- 
tive is not uncommon in hieroglyphics. 

1080. The same ; " Numerous honours," R. S. 12. It is lite- 
rally c thousands of hundreds. 5 

1081. The same ; " Gold, silver, jewels, and much of money," 
R. 8. 4. 

1082. Thrice ; " Worship the statue of the defender of Tanis 
thrice aday," R. 8. 7. 

1083. The total. In several places the numbers following 
this word are the sum of those before mentioned ; H. 41, H. 4<2. 
From OVUTT, unity. 

1084. A finger's breadth, a measure, one quarter of a hand's 
breadth, a twenty-fourth part of an ordinary cubit, and a twenty- 
eighth part of a royal cubit ; E. I. (second series) 46. 

1085. Two fingers' breadth. 

1086. Three fingers' breadth. 

1087. A hand's breadth. 

1088. Five fingers' breadth. 

1089. Six fingers' breadth. 

1090. Seven fingers' breadth. 

1091. Eight fingers' breadth. 

1092. A span, or measure of eleven fingers' breadths ; E. I. 
(second series) 46. The figure is a bird's claw. 

1093. A cubit, or measure of twenty-four fingers' breadths ; 
E. I. (second series) 46. 

1094. A royal cubit, being an ordinary cubit with a hand's 
breadth over, or twenty-eight fingers' breadth; E. I. (second 
series) 46. It is 20*675 inches long. This longer cubit is de- 
scribed in Ezekiel, xl. 5. 

1095. Chief, or ' first/ used, as we have seen, in the names of 
those months which are the first of their respective seasons. 

1096. The same; " Chief of the scribes," E. I. 89, 4, and 
E. I. 86, 8. 



120 VOCABULARY. 

1097. The same,, a singular noun, though with a plural termi- 
nation; M.R. Ill and 115. This is perhaps the same as the 
titles, No. 698 and 699. 

1098. The last ; " In the last year in the month of Chceac 
of the illustrious reign of King Ptolemy Neus Dionysus," E. I. 
4, 5. This is the letter CH, and is the word £)&•£, the last. 

1099. Last day ; " During the appointed last day of the month 
of Mesore, the birth-day of the priest living for ever," R. S. 10 ; 
also R. S. 11. The first letter is an H, and the word is eAK 5 
the last. 

1100. The same ; " Buried in the pyramid, in the twelfth year 
on the last day of Thoth," E. I. 72, 13. As we learn from the 
same tablet that the deceased person died in the eleventh year, 
on the fifteenth day of the month of Epiphi, we have the required 
seventy days of embalming between the two dates. 

1101. This character, which we have seen used for last, is also 
the title chief, as in the following groups. It may be the word 
gjR, beginning, which is so near the Coptic word for end or last, 
that it may be easily mistaken for it. 

1102. Master of the house, a title before a man's name; 
E. I. 70, h 1. It is the word £,£-!, husband, from £,R HI. 

1103. The same; "The master of the house, the high-priest 
Shishank," E. I. 96. 

1104. Chief of the temple ; " An offering from the chief of 
the temple to the gods," E. I. 106, 16. The second character 
represents the two square towers at the gate of each of the large 
temples of Upper Egypt. 

1105. The same ; " Guardian of the palace, chief of the tem- 
ple/' E. I. 107, 22. 

1106. Probably the same; "The scribe, chief of the temple, 
Hapimen deceased," E. I. 44, 2. 

1107. Chief of the temples; E.I. 62 (second part) . It has 
the lengthened plural termination common in this inscription. 

1108. Chief scribe; E.I. 44, 1. 

1109. Chief of the priests; "Guardian of the temple of 
Mandoo, chief of the priests, Mandohaso deceased," E. I. 
84, 4. 



VOCABULARY. 121 

1110. Chief of the learned men; E.I. 75, 27. From the 
word C&CO, learned. Or perhaps singer for the year, from 
gjWC, singer, and Year, No. 953. 

1111. The same; E.I. 74, 19. 

1112. Chief souten; E. I. 44, 1. This title of souten, or 
ruler, is applied to priests as well as kings. 

1113. Captain, or chief of the soldiers ; " An offering for the 
welfare of the chief of the soldiers," E. I. 95, 2. 

1114. Each first; "Which shall be set up in the temples of 
Egypt, in each first, each second, and each third side of the base 
of the statue of King Ptolemy," R. S. 14. 

1115. Each second; R. S. 14. 

1116. Each third; R. S. 14. 

1117. Every region; "From the first day of the month of 
Thoth, during five days, in every region," R. S. 12. 

1118. Every; " A portable statue of silver in every temple in 
Egypt," R. S. 8. The two last letters may possibly form no part 
of this word. 

1119. The same; " Every month," E. I. 48, a 2. 

1120. Other, forming part of several following groups. It is 
the word KGT", other. " Beloved by the other gods," E. I. (se- 
sond series) 41, 5. 

1121. The same; " Tried by the other gods," E. I. 36, 19. 
The first character is a different form of the K, which more par- 
ticularly belongs to the word city. 

1122. The same; E. I. 28 (second part). From K6Tq. 

1123. The same; " Perform sacrifices and other rites," R. S. 
12; alsofl. S. 11. 

1124. The same; " Make libation, perform sacrifices and other 
rites on the festivals," R. S. 11. The first character may perhaps 
mean similar. 

1125. The same, or possibly various; " Oxen, geese, money, 
and various holy libations," E.I. 18, 2. 

1126. The same, with a plural termination, in a similar sen- 
tence; E.I. 60. 

1127. The same ; " Thousands of various holy libations," 
E. I. 60. 



122 VOCABULARY. 

1128. With the other; "Victory, health, power, with the 
other blessings of a kingdom, remaining to himself and his chil- 
dren for ever," R. S. 5. 

1129. With the others; "They shall also carry out the 
shrine and portable statue of god Epiphanes thrice gracious with 
the others/ 3 R. S. 8. 

1130. Barge; "The holy barge of Horus-Ra;" "The holy 
barge of Osiris," H. 3. The navigation of the Nile by means of 
barges, with a chair and an awning, is described by Strabo, and 
these barges are frequently mentioned and represented in con- 
nection with the religious ceremonies, of which one of the prin- 
cipal ones was the carrying the body of the deceased across the 
river or the lake to be buried with the usual honours, after the 
judges had decided that the actions of his life had made him 
worthy of them. Another water ceremony was carrying out the 
statues of the gods in barges on the Nile. 

1131. Going by barge; "While the illustrious sovereign was 
going by barge to the palace of Memphis," R. S. 9. 

1132. Barges; "The barges of Egypt," E.I. 28 (second 
part) . 

1133. Water processions; "At the grand going-out from 
the temple of the statue of Amun-Ra, in the water processions 
they shall also carry out the statue of god Epiphanes thrice gra- 
cious, with the others," R. S. 8. 

1134. Barge; E. I. 105, 23. Hence XOI, a ship. 

1135. Barge-man; "The representation of the barge-man of 
the Osiris-like king, lord of the world, Amyrtaeus," E. I. 28 (se- 
cond part) . The arm marks the person, not the barge, to be here 
meant. 

1136. Ship; E. I. 77, 4. Hence K&.TO, a ship. The sail is 
used for the vessel, the part for the whole. 

1137. The same, in the plural; E.I. 52, 32. This sail and 
mast is often held in the hand of the bird which brings back 
breath and life into the mummy at its resurrection. It is typical 
of wind or breath. 

1138. The same; E. I. 78, 8. Here as elsewhere the double 
T has no more force than the single T of No. 1136. 



VOCABULARY. 123 

1139. The same, in the plural; "The ships and boats of Up- 
per and Lower Egypt/' E. I. 73, 11. The letters N o are the 
plural termination. 

1140. The same ; E. I. 105, 19. It is spelt XOI, like No. 1134. 

1141. Probably going by barge ; " Going by barge in the 
appointed water procession to the temple/' E. I. 106, 13. See 
No. 1131. The first character ought possibly to be the same as 
in No. 1140. 

1142. Barge ; E. I. 107, 24; or perhaps { model of a barge/ 
See the word Image, No. 1176. Small models of barges were 
carried in the processions, and were worshipped in the temples. 

1143. The same, in the plural; M. C. 107. 

1144. Ships; E. I. 73, 11. See the same plural termination 
in No. 1139. 

1145. The name of a ship highly ornamented with gay colours, 
used for the royal processions on the Nile, M. C. 108. 

1146. Perhaps went by boat; "Afterwards he went by boat 
in his thirteenth year," E. I. 73, 7. The letters M, S, T, may 
mean JULeajT 5 to travel. 

1147. Barge; H. 41, U i. Perhaps from TOOT6, a fringe 
or awning. 

1148. The same ; » Buler of the ships of Egypt," H. 41, V g. 
This is in spelling nearly the same as the last. 

1149. The same, in the plural; M. C. 108. These are orna- 
mented with gay colours. 

1150. Steersman, written over the man who holds the rud- 
der of the boat of Ba; E. I. 28. He has a hawk's head like 
Horus. 

1151. The same, over the hawk-headed god who steers the 
boat of Ba ; M. H. i. 3. The first two letters are the prefix peq, 
by which nouns are formed from verbs ; thus from ep&JUUULe, 
to steer, is formed pecjGp£,Jl*JUie, a steersman. 

1152. Queen of the barge, a title over the head of Isis, 
when standing in the barge with the other gods ; E. I. 28, and 
M. H. i. 3. 

1153. Mast, written over the short post to which the rudder 
is tied in the boat of Ba ; E. I. 64. From &OK, a mast. 



124 VOCABULARY. 

1154. Boat of Ra, written under the prow of the vessel ; 
E. I. 28. Beside the steersman eight gods are standing in the 
boat, of whom the chief is under an awning. 

1155. The same; E.I. 4, 5. 

1156. The same ; " The Osiris-like queen deceased, in the boat 
ofRa," E.I. 57,17. 

1157. Perhaps appointed boat; " Sailing in the appointed 
boat to the temple," E. I. 106, 13. ClCJOe, a dog, may be the 
first half of the word CUOOTTeit, appointed. The dog should 
however be without a head. In our figure the head has been 
added by mistake. 

1158. Water-ceremony; "Ruler of the barge in the water- 
ceremony" E.I. 97, 13. The last letters are the word JULOOV, 
water. Here again the dog's head has been added by mistake. 

1159. Festival; "The holy days, the seventeen last of the 
month, on the festival, in the temples of Egypt," R. S. 11. This 
is the figure of a sacred barge, with an awning over it, used to 
carry out the statues of the gods. 

1160. Festivals ; " Lord of the annual festivals on the Nile," 
B. 59. " Lord of the festivals" is a title of Amunothph III., 
E.I. 24, a 3. 

1161. The same; " Clothe the statue for the ceremonies, like 
to the gods of the country, at the festivals," R. S. 7. 

1162. The same; E.I. (second series) 41, 6. 

1163. Festival-days; " Upon the festival-days, at the grand 
goings-out of the statue of Amun-Ra, in the water-processions," 
R. S. 8. 

1164. Systrum, a musical instrument, to be held in the hand 
and shaken ; " Priest of the systrum," E. I. 48, a 6. 

1165. Sword, pronounced seb, in the name Sebekra, the pre- 
nomen of Amunothph I., from CR&I, a sword. It has the same 
force in C£.&oX, foreign, No. 1856. 

1166. Bridge ; " The bridge of life" is written on the bridge 
over the river, E. I 66. Hence TTHItH, a bridge. 

1167. Pair of scales; E. I, 1, 7. They were used to weigh 
the actions of the dead, and are thus mentioned on the funereal 
tablets. Also on the scarabsei, E. I. 70, a 5, b 5, d 5. 



VOCABULARY. 125 

1168. The same; E. I. 33, b 6, where it is followed by the 
determinative sign. From JUL£.ctjIj a balance. 

1169. Obelisk; " The obelisk of Eameses 11./' on the base 
of the obelisk from Luxor, now at Paris, E. I. 43, f. This word 
was probably in the feminine gender, as there is a feminine ar- 
ticle before it. 

1170. Obelisks ; B. 48. 

1171. Two sculptured obelisks; 5.48. The first two let- 
ters are probably C&.£>, writing. 

1172. Pyramid; E. I. 72, 13. As this word was used for a 
tomb on this tablet of the reign of Cleopatra, it is probable that 
tombs were still built of that form in the neighbourhood of 
Memphis, although of a small size. Our name is derived from 
ni p&JULJL, the mountain. 

1173. Tablet; " Set up a tablet in the temple, carved with 
letters for the priests/' R. S. 14. Most of the funereal tablets 
have round heads like this character. 

1174. Hard stone; "Two obelisks made of hard stone ," B. 
50, 6. It is spelt s T N, from ctjcrj-, hard, and erte, stone. 

1175. Statue; "Also set up a statue to King Ptolemy im- 
mortal, beloved by Pthah," R. S. 6 ; also R. S. 14. It is perhaps 
the word ojertT", to cut, though the force of the first character 
is doubtful. It is a pair of arms holding a chisel, the instrument 
with which the statue was formed. 

1176. The same; "Priest of the statue of Hameses, a man 
deceased/' E. I. 26. 

1177. The same, or rather sculpture ; " Decrees relating to 
the sculpture of the boat/' E. I. 28 (second part) . This is over 
a representation of the boats in which the statues of the gods are 
carried out upon the Nile. 

1178. A statue; E. I. 35, a 9. It is followed by the statue 
as the determinative sign after the word sculpture. 

1179. The same, with a male figure as the determinative sign, 
although it relates to Queen Nitocris; B. 50, 5. That queen is 
so represented on her obelisk, probably to mark that she was a 
queen in her own right, not simply a queen consort. 

1180. Perhaps statues ; E.I. 106, 19. 



126 VOCABULARY. 

1181. Sphinx; H. 80, on the inscription in the temple, built 
by Thothmes IV., between the legs of the colossal sphinx near 
Memphis. 

1182. Sandal, written over men cutting out and sewing san- 
dals ; M. C. 63. The leg is here the determinative sign, perhaps 
to distinguish sandals from gloves. It is the word OCOOTI, a 



1183. The same, in the plural; written over a man carrying 
a pair of sandals, M. C. 63. Here the sole of the shoe is used as 
a T, the first letter in the word. 

1184. Hands; "Thousands of hands" H. 15, Z r. In this 
picture Rameses II. is returning home from his conquests, his 
soldiers are bringing captives with their arms tied behind, atten- 
dants are counting and throwing into heaps the hands of the 
enemies, which have been brought as trophies, and the scribes 
are recording the number on their tablets. The letters are K, A, 
with a hand as the determinative sign, from K£.£, ? a fist. 

1185. Doors; " Doors of the temple," E. I. 16. These were 
each of a single block of stone, with one side lengthened as an 
axis to turn in the socket. 

1186. The same; E.I. 63 (second part) . 

1187. The two doors of heaven; " Appointed door-keeper 
of the two doors of heaven" E. L 59, 5. 

1188. The two doors of the Nile ; " Door-keeper of the two 
doors of the Nile" E. I. 59, 5. This follows the sentence last 
quoted. 

1189. Keeper of the two doors; " Son of the priest, the ap- 
pointed keeper of the two doors of heaven in the city of Thebes," 
E.L 69, a 31. 

1190. Door-keeper; " She is the holy appointed door-keeper," 
E. I, 117, 30. The sculptor, forgetting the person spoken of, had 
first made this word end with the pronoun masculine, and then 
changed it to the pronoun feminine. Hence the last letter is 
ambiguous. The arm marks the person, as in No. 1135. 

1191. The same; "The appointed door-keeper to Ra," E.L 
64. This is the title of the great serpent, which, as it stands on 
its tail, looks over the door of the temple. 



VOCABULARY. 127 

1192. The same; E. L 34, b. The arm alone marks the per- 
son, and the sitting figure, which seems added very unnecessarily, 
helps to prove that it is the title of a man. Also without the 
sitting figure; E. I. 69, a 22. 

1193. The same, or more exactly guardian of the door; 
E. I. 61, and E. I. 64. 

1194. The same ; the name of a man standing beside the door 
of the tomb, E. I. 65. The word po, a door, is here used in- 
stead of the determinative sign in the former group. 

1195. A door, being the Coptic nerute ; Dr. Lee's Triple 
Mummy-case, fig. 20. " Her name is the door/ } which is ex- 
plained by finding ' door-keeper of heaven' a common title for 
a deceased person. See No. 1187. 

1196. Arrow ; M. H. i. 1, where two arrows are laid upon the 
altar before the goddess Isis. It is the word C&j\~, an arrow, 
and the goddess's name was spelt in nearly the same way. 

1197. Jewels; " Gold, silver, jewels, and much of money," 
R. S. 4. The word may be from £ti£ } a stone, and C<LI^ beau- 
tiful. 

1198. Treasures; it follows the word c golden/ E. I. 79, 12. 
Perhaps from &-&0, a treasure. 

1199. Perhaps the same; ({ Guardian of the treasures in the 
palace," E. I. 80, 3. 

1200. Gold; " A portable statue of gold; 3 R. S. 8. The cha- 
racter is the dish and cloth used in washing the gold dust in the 
mines. 

1201. Gold; R. S. 4. It may be the word ttoxk, with a 
syllable prefixed. 

1202. The same; " Gold from the mines," B. 50, 9. 

1203. The same, or rather golden ; " Golden treasures from 
the mine," E. I. 79, 12. 

1204. Silver; R. S. 4. It is spelt M K T: it is the word 
£,<LT 5 silver, spelt Kgj&JT in composition. The M is perhaps 
the word JULOCVT, dead, used to distinguish silver from quick- 
silver, which latter was also known to the Egyptians. 

1205. The same; E. I. 79, 11. It is spelt JUUOCnrr, dead, 
Kgj&TT, silver. „, 



128 VOCABULARY. 

1206. Some articles or other, made of silver ; E. I. 80, 9. Also 
without the plural termination ; E. I. 82, 7. 

1207. Mines; " The mines of the kingdoms," B. 50, 5. The 
first character may perhaps be the word 6IC0, to wash. The se- 
cond is the cloth through which the gold is washed. 

1208. Mines ; " Gold mines, 33 B. 50, 9. " Theban mines, 33 
B. 50, 11. The first letter is the word *£.&, place. The whole 
is i the place of the washings/ 

1209. The same; B. 51. Here we have the determinative for 
a hill, between the word place and the word washings. 

1210. The same; "Golden treasures from the mines/ 3 E.I. 
79, 12. 

1211. Money; " Gold, silver, jewels, and much of money/ 3 
R. S. 4. The first character occurs six times on the Rosetta 
Stone, and is probably a wire of pure gold bent into a ring, the 
form in which gold was usually kept before the invention of 
coins. Pliny, when blaming the love of gold, says, " Pessimum 
vitas scelus fecit, qui id primus induit digitis," as if all gold had 
been in the form of rings. This character is the letter s, and 
also the word <LCO*C, price; and the whole may be COTeit, 
price, spelt s E M. 

1212. Debts; " Remitted debts, 33 R. S. 2. 

1213. Owing; " Likewise what was owing to the treasury of 
the palace," R. S. 2. This is the first half of the word debts, but 
with a different form of the letter T. 

1214. Treasury, in the sentence last quoted. 

1215. Paid, remitted ; " He paid the soldiers what was right," 
R. S. 1. " He remitted the debts," R. S. 2. 

1216. Money; " Oxen, geese, money, and various good liba- 
tions," E.I. 18, 2. These are the usual gifts mentioned on the 
funereal tablets. 

1217. The same, on a funereal tablet; E. I. 39, 9. If this is 
the same as No. 1211, the last character is M or N. 

1218. The same; E.I. 15, 3. 

1219. The same ; E. I. 69, a 27. Here we have a new form 
of the letter s. 

1220. The same; E. I.„48, b 2. 



VOCABULARY. 129 

1221. The same; E. I. 25, 4. 

1222. Nearly the same; E. 1. 117, 23. The first letters are 
perhaps the word T<L<Lq, to sell. 

1223. Nearly the same ; E. I. 52, 45. The first letters may 
perhaps be the word JUL<LHXU)j a field, and the whole mean 
rent. It is enumerated among the pious gifts. 

1224. The same; E. I. 52, 42. 

1225. Tributes; "The tributes of the subjects," B. 42. This 
is the word OGpItRCI, the name of an Egyptian weight. 

1226. Chariot; E. I. 73, 10. The letters are ^TH, a chariot, 
and 6l)XJj to run. It is followed by the determinative sign. 

1227. Nearly the same ; E. I. 73, 10. The letters are XCJOpe, 
victorious. It is perhaps part of a triumph, or part of a chariot 
race. 

1228. The same, being the determinative sign following the 
last .group of characters. This inscription belongs to the reign 
of Cleopatra ; and it was not before the Greek sovereigns that 
chariot races were known in Egypt. 

1229. I, me, myself ; " Honour to Neith myself" is written 
over the head of the goddess, M. H. i. 7. It is the Coptic pro- 
noun £.rtOK. 

1230. The same ; " Honour to Anubis, guardian of the temple. 
/ am Anubis, guardian of the temple, the Osiris-like king, lord 
of the world, Oimenepthah (or Osimenpthah) , deceased," E. I. 
65, 1. Diodorus gives three inscriptions beginning in this way, 
one of which is of this very king. It begins " I am Osymandyas, 
king of kings." See page 18. 

1231. The same ; " Honour to Imo ; I am the son of the lord 
Osiris," E. I. 44, 12. "lam the mother of Amenti," E. I. 57, 9. 

1232. The same ; " Honour to Nepthys ; / am from the lord 
Osiris," E. I. 57, 10. This sentence is explained by that quoted 
above, under No. 1231. 

1233. The same, in the feminine ; " Nepthys the sister god- 
dess, myself/' M. H. i. 16. This is a remarkable instance of a 
personal pronoun varying in gender with the sex of the speaker. 
In some cases the goddess, probably Isis, styles herself simply 
1 myself/ M. H. i. 24. 



130 VOCABULARY. 

1234. Thy, the pronoun adjective, following the noun with 
which it agrees; " Thy name" occurs repeatedly, E. I. 118. 

1235. Thou art; it begins several sentences; E. I. 28 to 30. 
It is formed of the two Coptic prefixes, eKSt^L for the second 
person singular future, and HAK for the second person singular 
imperfect. See Sl&K, No. 2015. 

1236. The same, with the omission of a letter, in a similar 
sentence ; E. 1. 30. 

1237. He is ; E. I. 30. The first half of this word is the same 
as the first half of the last ; it may therefore be the verb, though 
it certainly resembles the pronoun of the second person. The 
second half of this word is 6CJNA, the Coptic prefix for the third 
person singular. 

1238. The same, with the omission of a letter; E. I. 28. 

1239. The, his; "His son Afo, a man deceased," E. I. 19. 
"His [mother was] the lady the priestess," E. I. 27, 13. " A 
man deceased his [mother was] the lady Nantipe, a woman," 
E. I. (second series) 49. In these, as in many such sentences, 
the word l mother' is understood. 

1240. The same, in the feminine ; " His daughter," E. I. 20, 
13. " His mother," E. I. 20, 24. 

1241 . He, him, with a masculine termination ; " Him the giver 
of life," E. I. 43, 3, 7. It is the Coptic eq. 

1242. She, with a feminine termination; "She is the royal 
wife, the great Tashot," E. I. 116, 26. It is the Coptic ec. 

1243. He, him; "He the king received the country of the 
kingdom," R. S. 10. Also upper, in " Upper Egypt," E. I. 38, 8. 
See No. 769 and No. 1384. Thus the words he and upper are 
spelt with the same letters, and not to be distinguished without 
the help of the determinative sign or the words which follow. 

1244. The same ; " The statue of him the son of Ra, Amun- 
mai Rameses," E. I. 42, 4. 

1245. She, the feminine of the last; E. 1. 118, 30. 

1246. The same. Here the sculptor, in forgetfulness, first 
gave to this word a masculine termination, which he afterwards 
changed to a feminine termination, E. I. 118, 27. 

1247. The, his; " The obelisk of Rameses II.," E. I. 43, f. 



VOCABULARY. 131 

This pronoun has a double sign of the gender. First, it has a 
masculine termination, because, like the English his, not her, it 
relates to a man ; and secondly, it has the feminine article in- 
serted, because, like the Latin sua, not suus, it agrees with a 
feminine noun. 

1248. He ; « He is Amun the lord god," E. I. 42, 3. Hence 
the Sahidic ItToq. 

1249. The same; " Born he was on the twenty-fourth day of 
the month of Payni," E. I. 48, 10. Here we have the vowel 
which we see in the Coptic word, which was wanting in the last 
group. 

1250. She ; " She is Ra," E. I. 117, 19. This is the feminine 
of the last, in Coptic ItTOC. 

1251. The same, but with a blunder of the sculptor, who had 
first put the wrong termination ; " She is Horus, she is the moon, 
she is Thoth," E. I. 116, 26. 

1252. Those, which ; E. I. 28 (first part) . Also with a diffe- 
rent form of the T ; E. I. 28 (third part) ; E. I. 63 (second 
part); E.I. 66 (first part). 

1253. The same, shortened by the omission of the letter T ; 
E. I. 28 (third part) . 

1254. The same, shortened by the omission of the letter s ; 
E. I. 30. In these three groups we seem to have the pronoun 
used as the termination of a noun. 

1255. Himself, or perhaps to himself; "A kingdom re- 
maining to himself and. his children for ever," R. S. 5. 

1256. His, always following the substantive ; " His children," 
R. S. 5. " His name-day," R. S. 7. " From his father," R. S. 10. 
This is the small horned serpent, the Coluber cerastes, which has 
a fleshy horn on each eyelid. It is the letter F, from 2J^&> a 
serpent, and is the Coptic suffix CJ, his. 

1257. Her, always following the substantive ; " Her mother," 
E. I. 53, a 4, and E. I. 59, 26. It is the Coptic ec. 

1258. The same, being another form of the letter s ; " Her 
mother was the goddess Neith-Acoret deceased," E. I. 118, 1. 

1259. The, his, being a contraction of No. 1239 ; E. I. 35, 
a 15. Also like, as a contraction of Nos. 1281 and 1282; " Isis 

k2 



132 VOCABULARY. 

the great mother-goddess, like Ra, queen of heaven," E. I. 4, 1 . 

1260. This, which ; " Which he wore on his investiture in 
the temple," R. S. 9. This is perhaps the same as No. 1243. 

1261. These; " These prayers to Ra," E. I. 64 (first part). 

1262. Therefore, or perhaps therefore unto him; "There- 
fore unto him the gods gave victory," R. S. 5. 

1263. This, these, which ; " Which shall be set up in the 
temples of Egypt," R. S. 14. " By which it shall be conspicu- 
ous," R. S. 8. " These prayers to Osiris," E. /. 1, 1. It is the 
Basmuric word eXeTO**, these. 

1264. The same, in the feminine ; <c This great queen, the royal 
wife," E. I. 37, c 3. 

1265. The same; " These temple services," R. S. 7. 

1266. The same; E. I. 83, 3. It begins the sentence, and is 
followed by the deceased person's titles. It is perhaps the Cop- 
tic prefix peq. 

1267. The same, in the feminine ; " This great queen, the 
royal wife," M. R. 115. 

1268. The same; E. I. 45, 14. 

1269. Perhaps the same, in the plural; " These are libations 
to the priestess, the queen of the earth," E. I. 56, b 1. 

1270. And; "The picture of his barge, and the Egyptian 
barges," E. I. 28 (second part) . From Of £.£„ to add. 

1271. The same ; " A kingdom remaining to himself and his 
children for ever," R. S. 5. From £-&€, and. 

1272. The same, several times on the B-osetta Stone. If the 
cross character is not a mouth, R, but an eye, E, this word has 
the same sound as the last. 

1273. The same ; " In the reign of the Queen Cleopatra and 
her son Csesar," E. I. 73, 13. From ^UT^I, also, thus. 

1274. With free will; " With free will on the seventeenth 
day of Paophi," R. S. 10. It is the Coptic £/TOp, free will. 

1275. The same; R. S. 2, where the stone is broken, and it 
is doubtful whether the last letter forms a part of this word. It 
may be €AA ^Top, of free will. 

1276. In addition; "In addition make libations and perform 
sacrifices," R. S. 11. It is the Coptic GJUL OT^TOT. 



VOCABULARY. 133 

1277. The same ; " In addition set up a statue to Kiug Pto- 
lemy," R. S. 6; also R. S. 9. 

1278. The same; R. S. 7. 

1279. Nearly the same; "Also during the splendid going by 
barge to the palace of Memphis/' R. S. 9. 

1280. Additional, in the plural; "According to these de- 
crees additional/' R. S. 13. 

1281. Like ; " Like Ea ; a living image of Amun," is part of 
the prenomen of Euergetes II., K. 237. It is the Coptic eme, 
but spelt with an M. 

1282. The same, or rather like unto ; " Clothe the statue for 
the ceremonies like unto the gods of the country," R. S. 7. The 
last character may be the preposition. 

1283. Like ; " Other like fittings for the temple of Tanis, for 
Apis," R. S. 4. « Living like Ra for ever," E. I. 36, 1. " Giver 
of life, like Ra, for ever," E. I. 42, 2. From &e or oe, like. 
It here follows the noun. 

1284. The same ; " Rameses II., giver of light, like Ra," 
E. I. 15. 

1285. The same, with feminine termination; " To set up a 
like shrine to the god Epiphanes thrice gracious," R. S. 13. On 
the other hand this might be &&T, silver. Compare also No. 
1275. 

1286. The same ; " In the same year," E. I. 72, 10. We 
have this word in Coptic, in its duplicate form, TeriTOJIt, to 
imitate. 

1287. The same ; " She is the holy Anubis, the same is the 
god of truth," E. I. 116, 27. 

1288. The same ; " The same in manner as the two grand 
asps," R. S. 9. In a long inscription in H. 41 and 42, in a suc- 
cession of dates, we have 

The year XXIX. The year XXXI. The year XXXIII. 
The year XXX. The year same. The year same. 

The year same. The year same. The year XXXIV. 

Also as also, in E.I. 6. 

1289. Probably now, lately; " The son of the sun, Oimene- 
pthah lately deceased," E. I. 65, 1 . " The deified King Rameses 



134 VOCABULARY. 

III. lately deceased/' E. I. (second series) 91, 1. From UOOT, 
today. 

1290. Only; " She is the only child," E. I. 117, 13. From 
ROTA.J alone. The adjective here follows the noun, and is itself 
followed by the determinative sign. It also seems to mean ex- 
cellent. 

1291. The same, in the feminine; "I am the excellent lady 
Nepthys," E. I. (second series) 96, 8. 

1292. To, for, of; « Letters for the priests," R.S. 14. "For 
the offering of " [the several undermentioned persons] ; E. 1. 
20, 8. " A gift to Osiris, ruler o/Amenti," E. I. 13, 1. This is 
the letter N, and the preposition GIT or HA. 

1293. The same; "The gods of Thebes," E. I. 25, 9. 

1294. The same ; " Offerings at the doors of the temples," 
E.I. 16. This is another form of the letter N. 

1295. The same; " Offerings to Aroeris for the king the lord 
of the world, Rameses II.," B. 57. 

1296. The same; " Honour to the deified lady," E. I. 52, 1. 
" Honour to Amun-Ra, king of the gods," E. I. 43, 3, 1. 

1297. The same; "Honour to Anubis, king of the land," 
M. H. i. 18. Here, as in many other cases, the two waved lines 
have only the force of one N. 

1298. Of, belonging to ; " The priests of the temples of 
Egypt shall wear crowns," R. S. 12. " It has pleased the priests 
of Upper and Lower Egypt," R. S. 5. " The temples of Upper 
and Lower Egypt," E. I. 72, 10. 

1299. As a noun, place, square; as a preposition, in, on, 
from ; " On each first, each second, each third of the square base 
of the statue of King Ptolemy," R. S. 14. " Upon the square 
round about the crown," R. S. 9. From S&.&., place. 

1300. The same, as a preposition; " Carved in letters for the 
priests," R. S. 14. " Like in manner to the two grand asps," 
R. S. 9. " Gold, silver, jewels, and much of money," R. S. 4. 
" Going by barge to the palace of Memphis," R. S. 9. " Set up 
in the temples in Egypt," R. S. 14. 

1301. The same; " On each first, each second, each third of 
the square base," R. S. 14. 



VOCABULARY. 135 

1302. The same; "The priests of the temples in Egypt shall 
wear crowns during the proclamations of god Epiphanes thrice 
gracious, in the splendid holy liturgies/' R. S. 12. Also with 
the same meaning, as part of No. 1276 and No. 1278. It is the 
Coptic GJtX, the note of the genitive. 

1303. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Pthah-Sokar-Osiris," 
H. 70, U p. 

1304. The same ; " In the festival, in the temples of Egypt/' R. 
S. 11. "Thousands of oxen, thousands of geese/' E. I. 56, b 14. 
Also beloved, being the word StX£l, to love ; " The royal scribe, 
the royal priest, beloved by Amun, king for ever/' E. I. 22, 11. 

1305. Of, in, with; "King of Upper Egypt;" "King of 
Lower Egypt," E. I. 36, 17. This is the word JULert, in, with. 

1306. The same; "Wine in bottles, six thousand four hun- 
dred and twenty-eight," H. 41, T g ; also H. 41, T e. This word 
is also the last syllable of some proper names, as Hapimen, be- 
longing to Apis, No. 1992. 

1307. The same; " Son of the sun, in the abode of heaven," 
E. I. 57, 10. 

1308. The same ; " The Osiris-like queen, the great goddess, 
in the abode of heaven with the holy gods," E. I. 58, 19. 

1309. From ; " Eeceived the country of the kingdom from 
his father," R. S. 10. 

1310. The same ; " From the new moon of Thoth, during five 
days," R. S. 12. 

1311. Going-out, meaning the sacred procession with the 
boats ; " The holy going-out on the holy days, on the seventeen 
last days of the month," R. S. 11. Erom &A&.S, place. 

1312. Goings-out; " The goings-out, and coronations, of the 
boat of Ea, on the last year in the month of Mesore of the illus- 
trious reign of King Ptolemy," E. J. 4, 5. 

1313. The same, meaning the times of the stars' rising or 
setting; E.I. 59, 38. 

1314. In; " Golden treasures in the mines," E. I. 79, 12. 
Erom ,i>ert 5 in. 

1315. Perhaps then; "And bearing patiently, then remitted 
the debts," R. S. 2. This may be the word SJLH&.S, here. 



136 VOCABULARY. 

1316. Of, from, in, for ; " A righteous good man deceased, 
born of Neithamun, a woman deceased," E. I. 12, 1. This is 
the word m~e 5 from. 

1317. The same; "The temple of Aroeris, in Tanis," E. I. 
58, 27. 

1318. The same; E. I. 9, 4; unless it may here be the name 
of a city. 

1319. The same; " The temple of Thebes," E.I. 6. "The 
temple o/ Tanis," E. I. 58, 26. 

1320. The same; " Set up a tablet in the temple," R. S. 14. 
" Similar fittings of the temple of Tanis /br Apis," R. S. 4. 

1321. The same; E. I. 4, 2. 

1322. The same; "Prayers to Osiris for his offering, by the 
offering of the priest," E. I. 8. 

1323. Upon, while ; " Upon the appointed last day of Mesore, 
the birth-day of the priest living for ever," R. S. 10. "Also 
while the illustrious sovereign was going by barge to the palace 
of Memphis," R. S. 9. 

1324. Of, by ; " His son, beloved by the priests," E. I. 13, 7. 
"Priest of the soldiers, the great Amuni," E. 1. 17, 3. " Lord 
of Lower Egypt," E. I. 106, 14. 

1325. The same; E.l. 86, 10. 

1326. The same; E. I. 39, 9. 

1327. The same; E. I. 39, 9. 

1328. The same; E.I. 41, 11. Also chief, or melek, being 
a contraction of No. 681 ; " The deified chief of the soldiers," 
E. I. 114, 15. 

1329. The same; " Horus the avenger of his father, the god 
of Thebes," E.I. 4, 2. 

1330. The same; " Servant o/the slaves," E. I. 57, 42. But 
see No. 1478, where we have translated this group as c chained/ 

1331. With; " On his investiture in the temple with the 
country of the kingdom," R. S. 9. 

1332. Of, used in dates; " In the thirtieth year of the reign 
of the guardian of the land," H. 41, H g ; also H. 41, Z m. From 
6CHT, in. 

1333. The same ; " In the twenty-ninth year of the reign of 



VOCABULARY. 137 

the guardian of the land/' H. 41, Z c. This group shows in what 
order the letters are to be read in the last group. 

1334. Of; " Osiris, ruler of Lower Egypt," E. I. 48, a 5. 

1335. The same; " The blessings o/sl kingdom remaining to 
himself and his children," R. S. 5. 

1336. Probably the same ; " A gift dedicated to Osiris, ruler 
of Amenti," E. I. 17, 1. " Hapimen deceased, with Osiris," 
E. I. 44, 31. 

1337. During; " From the new moon of Thoth, during five 
days," R. 8. 12. 

1338. Probably relating to ; " Decrees relating to the holy 
," E. /. 28 (first part). 

1339. The same ; u Decrees relating to the offering to the great 
god the palm-branches," E. I. 28 (third part) . 

1340. The same ; " Decrees relating to the fitting out of this 
barge," E. I. 28 (second part). 

1341. The same ; " Decrees relating to the conquered serpent," 
E. I. 63 (second part) . 

1342. Belonging to, of ; " Lord of Upper Egypt, lord of 
Lower Egypt, ruler of the gods/? E. I. 39, 6. This is the Coptic 
prefix nee. 

1343. The same, being the first syllable of the word Pet- 
amenti, ruler of Amenti ; E. I. 39, 6 ; also M. H. i. 34. 

1344. Perhaps the same; E. I. 13, 7. 

1345. The same; "I am Anubis, belonging to the temple," 
meaning servant of the temple, E. I. 65 (top) . 

1346. He, a person ; " The consecrated person, the holy king, 
son of the sun, Ptolemy," H. 64, R q. This is the word HCTe, 
he. 

1347. Belonging to Osiris, or servant of Osiris, approved by 
Osiris ; " The approved by Osiris divine wife, the goddess de- 
ceased," E. I. 58, 29. This word, f Petosiris/ is the name of an 
Egyptian writer quoted by Pliny. The word ' Osiris/ when used 
in this sense, which we have before translated Osiris-like, is per- 
haps an abridgement of this. 

1348. Belonging to the temple, a title of Anubis; H. 68, 
S g, where he is laying out a mummy, as the servant. 



138 VOCABULARY. 

1349. The same; H. 67, Kg. 

1350. The same ; " A gift dedicated to Sokar-Osiris, belonging 
to the temple" E. I. 4, 1. This seems to mean rather ' lord of 
the temple' than servant. 

1351. Belonging to. This is the Coptic prefix HA. "The 
high-priest belonging to Amun," H. 43, F r. 

1352. The same ; " Amo ; a man belonging to Pthah," meaning 
a priest of Pthah, H. 70, S f . 

1353. The same; <( Belonging to the land/' E. I. 91. See 
No. 1364. 

1354. The same; E.l. 4, 16. "Honour to Neith, mistress 
of the temple," E. I. 67 (top). 

1355. The same word, but used as the determinative sign of 
a man instead of the more usual sitting figure ; " Ashi a man, 
the son of Ashi a man" E. I. 7. 

1356. The same, but used jointly with the usual determina- 
tive sign ; " A good man deceased," E. I. 8. 

1357. Mistress, being the feminine of the last; " Honour to 
Isis, mistress of the world," M. H. i. 14. 

1358. Masters ; " The heavenly masters of the eternal one, 
in Amenti," E. I. 61, written over one of the keepers of the great 
serpent. 

1359. Master ; " Honour to Anubis, master of Egypt," E. I. 
14, and E. I. 25, 2. 

1360. Belonging to the offerings, a title of Anubis; E.I. 
5. He is elsewhere called the ' devourer of the food set out for 
the dead/ 

1361. The same; E. I. 2. Like the last, it is a title of Anubis. 

1362. Belonging to Pthah ; " Imo, a man belonging to 
Pthah," H. 70. Perhaps he was the priest of that god. 

1363. Belonging to the temple, a title of Neith; H, 67, 

1364. Master of the land ; H. 42, Q h.> [K g. 

1365. The same; "The great conqueror, the master of the 
land, the lord King Hameses II.," E. I. 42, 4. 

1366. Priestess of truth, a title of the queen; E. I. 116, 9. 

1367. Priestess of Seb; E.I. 116, 11. 

1368. Priestess of Aroeris; E.I. 116, 8. 



VOCABULARY. 139 

1369. Master of the heavenly gods, a title of Horus; 
E. I. 68. 

1370. Master of the house, or perhaps servant, as either 
may be derived from the original meaning, belonging to ; written 
beside a man carrying a bundle, E. I. 17. 

1371. Some kind of servant or door-keeper; E. I. 65, where 
it is written between a man and a door. Perhaps from puoic, 
to watch. 

1372. A prefix, meaning mistress. It is perhaps the word 
6T, who, as in the following groups. 

1373. Mistress of the world, a title given to Nepthys; 
M. H. i. 16. 

1374. Mistress of the gods, a title given to Isis; E. I. 4, 1. 

1375. The letter T, frequently used as the mark of the femi- 
nine gender in adjectives and substantives, sometimes as a ter- 
mination, and sometimes inserted before the last letter. This is 
unlike the Coptic feminine article T, which is always prefixed. 

1376. Probably an article or relative pronoun. See E. I. 9, 
E. I. 30, E. I. 31. It may be the word ncJOIt, our, or short for 
III IteT". But this group is again considered at No. 2016. 

1377. Perhaps mortals, from eCKT 5 below. It follows the 
word ' gods/ E. I. 31 (third part) . 

1378. Eternal, the name of the great serpent, forming the 
canopy over the head of the god Ra, in his boat ; E. I. 67. 

1379. The same, the name of the same serpent, as the roof to 
the boat of Ra ; E. I. 31. It is the word €Ite£„ eternal. Hence 
eitec£>U5$, giant. 

1380. The same, in the feminine, the name of the same ser- 
pent; M. H. i. 3. This serpent is a good being, and often a 
goddess, not to be mistaken for the following. 

1381. The same, the name of the serpent, which is carried 
along by nine men who have conquered it; E.I. 63. This is 
the serpent of wickedness. 

1382. The name of the same serpent; E. I. 63. 

1383. Probably hell, having the same root as the last, mean- 
ing the place of the eternal ones ; E. I. 72, 14 ; E. I. 71, a 6. 
This word Hi no is in Hebrew written Hinnom ; and the spot in 



140 VOCABULARY. 

which the bodies of the dead were burnt near Jerusalem was 
called the valley of the children of Hinnom, or in Greek, Ge- 
henna. 

1384. Upper; an adjective used before the title of ' king of 
Upper Egypt/ S-E. 6, a 3. Part of the word Upper Egypt, No. 
771. See also No. 769. 

1385. Lower; an adjective used before the title of ' king of 
Lower Egypt/ S-E. 6, a 3. See also No. 770 and No. 825 for 
Lower Egypt. 

1386. The same; part of the word Lower Egypt, No. 771. 

1387. Good, holy; " Goo d fortune," R. S. 5. It is the letter 
B, and the word OT&.&., holy. 

1388. Thrice holy; "The lord thrice holy" is the transla- 
tion of the king's title evxaptaros on the Bosetta Stone. 

1389. Holy ; " A splendid gift to Osiris Petamenti, righteous 
holy king for ever/' E. L 2,1. 

1390. The same, in the feminine ; " Born of the holy priestess 
of Pthah, king of Memphis/' E. I. % 4. " Various holy liba- 
tions/' E. I. 2, 2. 

1391. The same; "Various holy libations," E.I. 5. As an 
adjective applied to the deceased woman in E. I. 13, 3. 

1392. The same; "Various holy libations," E.I. 51. This 
word was probably pronounced Vaphra. 

1393. The same, in the feminine ; " The priestess of Amun, 
holy mother," E. I. (second series) 39, 22. 

1394. Blessings ; " The blessings of a kingdom remaining to 
himself and his children for ever," R. S. 5. This is literally 
' good of heaven things.' 

1395. Probably righteous, written over the men who are 
dragging the boat of Ba by a cord ; E. I 67. From C<Lie, good. 
This seems an unhappy choice of characters, as the E here used 
is seldom found in any words but those compounded of house 
or city. 

1396. The same; " Guardian of the righteous, in Amenti and 
on earth," E. I. 117, 10. 

1397. Valuable; " Valuable gifts of money," E. I. 117, 23. 
From C&.YVT, valuable. 



VOCABULARY. 141 

1398. Blessed, being a translation of the word felix, when 
used as part of the Emperor Hadrian's title; K. 290. From 
It<LI6Tj blessed. 

1399. The same ; part of Yespasian's title, K. 280. 

1400. The same ; also part of Vespasian's title, K. 278. The 
crocodile is an n. 

1401. The same, in Trajan's title; K. 288. The whip of Osi- 
ris is a determinative sign. 

1402. Life, health; "For this to him the immortal gods 
gave victory, health, power/' R. S. 5. Also living; "Ptolemy 
living for ever, beloved by Pthah, god Epiphanes most gracious," 
R. S. 12, and R. S. 14. u Of Amun a living image" is part of the 
prenomen of Epiphanes, E. I. 49. This character is very often 
held in the hand of a mummy, H. 14 ; sometimes a god is pre- 
senting it to the mouth of a king, H. 60 ; and sometimes receiving 
it from the mouth of a dying man, lying upon the lion-shaped 
couch. Denon, pi. 126. 

1403. Giver of life; "An offering of wine to the giver of 
life" meaning to Amun-Ra, to whom the king, upon his knees, 
is presenting the offering, E. I. 43, 3, 7. " Amunmai Rameses 
II., giver of life, like Ra," E. I. 15. It is common as part of a 
king's title. But in the Greek of the Rosetta Stone Ptolemy is 
called f regulator of the life of man,' which is probably a transla- 
tion of this phrase. 

1404. Living, in the feminine ; " Libations to the goddess, 
the holy queen of the world, living and remaining like Ra for 
ever," E.I. 56, b 1. 

1405. The same, meaning the deceased priestess; E.I. 4, 4. 

1406. The same, written more shortly ; E. I. 4, 8. 

1407. The same; E. I. 15, 14. This is the word C0IT<6, life, 
of which No. 1402 is the first letter and the usual abbreviation. 

1408. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 15, 15. 

1409. The same ; E. I. 48, a 10. As is not uncommon it is 
applied to the deceased person, showing the belief in a life after 
death. 

1410. The same, in the feminine ; E. I. 3, 8. The first letter, 
M, may mean dead, or the whole may mean in life. 



142 VOCABULARY. 

1411. The same ; " A righteous man deceased living" E. I. 1, 
13. In this and many other funereal tablets the word ' living ' is 
applied to a person already dead. 

1412. Aged ; " Deceased, aged ninety-seven years/' E. I, 
48, b 6. 

1413. Living, in the plural, meaning probably the dead, a 
not uncommon way of speaking in funereal inscriptions, E. I, 
75, 20. 

1414. The same, in the feminine plural ; " Living serpents," 
E. I. 65. These serpents of good, as opposed to the serpents of 
evil, are usually goddesses. 

1415. Manner; " Like in manner to the grand asps placed 
upon the shrines," R. S. 9. " In manner splendid," R. S. 5. 

1416. Lasting; " Thy name is lasting, like the heavens; an 
image of Ra," E. I. 42, 2. From JULOTIt^ to remain. 

1417. The same ; " Sacred to Pthah, the lasting god of truth," 
B. 56. From CXJLUdlVT, to remain. 

1418. The same, or perhaps in the feminine; "The lasting 
goddess Truth," B. 56. Truth is sometimes a god and sometimes 
a goddess. 

1419. Established ; " The queen living and established, like 
Ra, for ever," E.I. 56, b 1. The first character is TOOJ, a land- 
mark; the second is the feminine termination t. The word is 
TUXtj, to make firm. 

1420. The same; " Sacred to Pthah, in the established tem- 
ple," B. 56. " The brave Thothmes, the sovereign of the esta- 
blished kingdom," H. 80, Q k. This is the reduplicate form of 
the word, like T<l6t~<L(T7 remaining. 

1421. The same; u The blessings of a kingdom established 
for himself and his children for ever," R. S. 5. 

1422. The same ; " The birth-day of the priest living for ever, 
established in the ceremony," R. S. 10. 

1423. Perhaps supporter; "Supporter of the heavenly Anu- 
bis of Lower Egypt, and the heavenly Anubis of Upper Egypt," 
E. I. 73, 4. 

1424. Builder; "Builder of the temples, lord of the world, 
Rameses II.," Elaminian Obelisk (south side). On the Obelisk 



VOCABULARY. 143 

of Hermapion (see page 20), the king is called ornamenter of the 
temples. 

1425. Power; iC Giver of life, permanence, and power, like 
Ra," E. L 43, 2, 5. This sceptre is often presented by the god 
to a king. 

1426. Conqueror; " Ra the conqueror of the world," E,L 
93, 2. From U?oje 5 to fight. See No. 1428. 

1427. The same, in the feminine; "Honour to Neith, the 
great goddess, the conquering mistress of the city of Dendera," 
B. 24. 

1428. Lord of the years, a title of Rameses II. ; B. 46. This 
is perhaps the group translated by Hermapion on the Obelisk as 
' lord of times/ See page 21. 

1429. The same; B. 46. These two titles have as good a 
claim as any other to be thought that which is translated at the 
beginning of the Rosetta Stone by ' lord of cycles of thirty 
years/ 

1430. Victories ; " A gift of victories to the king, lord of the 
world, Rameses II.," B. 59. 

1431. Perhaps living, from CHAfij blood; " Living like Ra 
forever," M.R. 41. 

1432. Perhaps lord of life, a title of the god Pthah ; 
B. 56. 

1433. Victory; "To him the gods gave victory" R. S. 5. 
Also victorious, as the first half of the name Nectanebo, victo- 
rious lord. 

1434. Victorious ; " The lord of years, the victorious king 
Rameses II.," E.I. 42, 1. 

1435. The same; " Son .of the sun, victorious lord of battles, 
Oimenepthah deceased," E. I. 64. 

1436. The same, in the feminine ; " Daughter of the sun, the 
victorious Amun Nitocris," B. 48. 

1437. Victories ; " The horse, the bearer of the king in his 
victories" written over the horse in the chariot of Amunmai 
Amunaan, M. R. 4<7 and 48. 

1438. The same ; " Lord of victories, the King Rameses II., 
king of kings," E. I. 42, 1. 



144 VOCABULARY. 

1439. The same ; " Son of the sun,, Rameses III., lord of vic- 
tories;' B. 45, 22. 

1440. Lord of victories, a title of Barneses II.; B. 53. The 
first character is UK-ft., lord, and the whole is Gnephachthus, 
which Diodorus says was the name of an Egyptian king. Or it 
may mean lord of the buildings, a not improbable title for 
an Egyptian king ; from eKU3T 5 a builder. 

1441. The same, a title of King Thothmosis; E. I. 56, b 2. 

1442. The same, a title of the god Pthah; B. 56. 

1443. Illustrious, being the second name of Ptolemy Epi- 
phanes on the Rosetta Stone and elsewhere. It is literally ' light- 
bearing/ The first character is E, meaning GOOT, glory. 

1444. The same ; " The illustrious king of Upper and Lower 
Egypt," R. S. 10. 

1445. The same; c< In the last year, in the month Chceae, of 
the illustrious reign of King Ptolemy," E. I. 4, 5. 

1446. The same ; it is the word Epiphanes, in the prenomen 
of Euergetes II., who there uses it as his father's title. 

1447. The same ; " The illustrious Osiris-like divine wife, the 
victorious queen deceased," E.I. 57, 5. 

1448. The same; E. I. 58, 18. 

1449. Glorious, in the plural, from £.I£J, to magnify ; Tri- 
ple Mummy-case, fig. 20, "The glorious gods." The adjective 
follows the substantive. See No. 371 . 

1450. Her glory, or perhaps her glorious ; " Her glorious 
gift," Triple Mummy-case, fig. 20. 

1451. Power; " For this to him the immortal gods gave vic- 
tory, health, power," R. S. 5. It is the Coptic (T\C\ } loftiness. 

1452. Probably powerful ; " The chief scribe, the powerful 
Hapimen deceased," E. I. 44, 31. 

1453. Saviour, defender, avenger, punisher ; " To be 
named Ptolemy the defender of Egypt," R. S. 6. It is also the . 
word acorrjp, the title of the first Ptolemy. See No. 1523. 

1454. The same ; " Horus the avenger of his father," E. I. 4, 2. 
This sentence is met with in the Greek beginning of the Rosetta 
Stone. 

1455. The same; " Horus the avenger of his father, and the 



VOCABULARY. 145 

son of Osiris/ 5 M. H. i. 17. This word is also used as a title by 
the Emperor Hadrian. 

1456. The same; " Horus the avenger of his father Osiris/* 
B. 26. 

1457. The same ; " The punisher of his father's wicked ene- 
mies/' E. I. 75, 4. 

1458. Defender ; " Defenders of the bridge of life" is written 
beside six men with dogs' heads, like Anubis, E. I. 66. u The 
Osiris-like defenders of the mummies/' E. I. 66, written over a 
row of mummies. 

1459. Monthly guardian; " Son of the priest of Man do, lord 
of Mendes, monthly guardian of the temple of Amun," E. I. 68. 

1460. Avenging judge ; " She is Anubis, avenging judge of 
heaven," E. I. 117, 9. Horapollo says (lib. i. 40), that to denote 
a judge they employed the figure of a royal robe; and again 
(Kb. ii. 72), to denote a man that passes fearlessly through evils 
they draw an hyaena's skin, by both of which he seems to mean 
the character before us, which is a skin hung upon a stick. See 
No. 152. 

1461. Devourer; "A gift dedicated to Anubis, devourer of 
what is given to the mummy," Triple Mummy -case, fig. 3, 1. 

1462. Defender ; " Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah and 
Isis, loving his father, loving his sister, defender of Egypt," H. 65, 
V h. " Worship the statue of the defender of Tanis," R, S. 7. 

1463. The same ; " Defender of the kingdoms, like Horus," 
E. L 42, 4. 

1464. The same, used as a name of the god Horus ; B. 59. 
Also honoured ; " His mother Iside, a woman honoured" E. I. 
79. From TA.IG, to honour. 

1465. Perhaps the same; " Sacred to the deified heavenly 
defender of the temple of Memphis," E. I. 105, 6. This word 
seems to be in the singular, though it has a termination plural 
in its form. 

1466. Perhaps hero, from <L<J>U3c£>, a giant ; " The king, the 
brave great hero" E. I. 42, 2. 

1467. The same ; " The king, the brave victorious hero" 
E. I. 42, 1. 

L 



146 VOCABULARY. 

1468. The same ; u The priest, the hero, the lord Amunmai 
Amunaan," M.R. 57. 

1469. The same; "The hero, like the god Mando," E.I. 37, 
b 1, and E. I. 42, 4. 

1470. The same; "King Oimenepthah, beloved by Anubis 
the great hero," E. I. (second series) 43, 6. 

1471. Perhaps the same; E.I. 22, 9. 

1472. The same; " A hero like Anubis," B. 45, 14. 

1473. The same ; " The image of the gigantic serpent," E. I. 
63, 3. 

1474. Wicked people, or enemies ; " The avenger of his fa- 
ther's enemies," E. I. 75, 5. The figure is in the attitude of a 
criminal working in the gold mines, and breaking the rock with 
the back of the axe. 

1475. The same; E.I. 74, 25, where it is followed by the 
above figure as the determinative sign. Horapollo (lib. i. 65) 
says that to denote an ungrateful man they drew the claws of 
an hippopotamus turned downwards, by which he perhaps meant 
the first character in this word. 

1476. The same, being the wicked people in a state of punish- 
ment under the throne of Osiris, as he is sitting to judge the 
dead; E.I. 61. From XCOq, wicked. 

1477. The same; E. I. 117, 14; E.I. 58, 22, and E.I. 115. 

1478. The same; E.I. 58, 22. 

1479. The same; E.I. 57, 42. From JUlppe, chained. See 
No. 1330. 

1480. The same; E.I. 12, 7. Hence the reduplicate form 
£>£XK £)£&*., a captive. 

1481 . Wicked women, being the feminine of the last word ; 
E. L 12, 7. 

1482. Rebels; E.I. 116,2. From XCJOq, wicked, and JUUOJI, 
to fight. 

1483. Wicked men, meaning the conquered nations ; " The 
tributes of the wicked," B. 42. From £,CJ0OT, wicked. 

1484. Criminals; E. I. 116, 1, 2. From ^LtOTe, to destroy, 
and <£X, the prefix of the past tense. 

1485. The same; E.I. 116, 19, where it is followed by the 



VOCABULARY. 147 

same determinative sign. The force of the second character, as 
B, is supported by comparing this group with its neighbours. 

1486. The same; E.I. 116, 20. 

1487. The same; E.L 117, 1. The same as No. 1485, but 
without the prefix. 

1488. The same; E.I. 118, 10. 

1489. The same, from XCJuiL, miserable ; E. I. (second series) 
53, 6. 

1490. Dancers; B. 34, 74. From SlOCT, to dance. 

1491. A singer, in the feminine; E.I. 118, 7. From X(X), 
to sing. See No. 2034 and 2035. 

1492. Music ; written over figures playing upon musical in- 
struments, M. C. 94 and 95. From £>UOC ? a song. The word 
maneros, the name of the Egyptian song mentioned by Hero- 
dotus, is probably JULeitpe £/JOC, a song of desire. 

1493. Some kind of game, written over two men playing at a 
game like chess; M. C. 103. 

1494. Probably befriended ; " Befriended by the bull Apis" 
is said of Ptolemy Philometor, B. 42, 1. Two men joining their 
hands, says Horapollo (lib. ii. 11), denote friendship. 

1495. Slain, meaning deceased ; E.L 28 (fourth part) . The 
single figure is ciJKpi, a child-, hence the two figures make 
ojepojuop, to kill. 

1496. Approved ; u Son of the gods Philopatores, approved 
by Pthah, to whom Ra gave victory, a living image of Amun," 
E. I. 49. This is the first name of Ptolemy Epiphanes, and is 
translated at the beginning of the Rosetta Stone. 

1497. The same ; " Approved by Amun Ra" is the first name 
of Rameses II. 

1498. Beloved ; " Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah," is 
the king's name on the Rosetta Stone. It is the word AA.GI, 

1499. The same. See No. 1513. {love. 

1500. The same. See No. 1510. 

1501. The same, in the feminine; " Queen Nitocris, beloved 
by Amun Ra," B. 48. 

1502. The same; "The beloved son of the sun, Amunothph 
III.," E. I. 24, a 3. 

l2 



148 VOCABULARY. 

1503. The same, in the feminine ; " The royal wife, great, be- 
loved," E. I. 37, c 2. 

1504. The same; "The beloved son of the sun, Amnnothph 
III./' M.R. 41. 

1505. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 37, c 3. 

1506. The same; " Beloved by the ruler of Amenti, the lord 
of Egypt deceased/' E. I. 83, 16. From JUiepe, love. 

1507. The same, in the feminine; "His beloved wife/ 5 E. I. 
83, 14. 

1508. Beloved by Pthah; a title of Ptolemy Epiphanes, on 
the Rosetta Stone : implying of course that the seat of empire 
was then in Lower Egypt, where Pthah was more particularly 
worshipped. 

1509. Beloved by Pthah and Isis ; a title within the oval of 
Ptolemy Auletes, H. 65, Vk. 

1510. The same; E. L 4, 5, and H. 65, Kk. 

1511. Beloved by Amun-Ra; a title of Amunothph III., 
E. I. 24, a 1. This was more particularly used by the kings while 
the seat of government was at Thebes. 

1512. Beloved by Athor; a title of Ptolemy Philometor, on 
the temple of that goddess at Philse, H. 64. 

1513. Beloved by Ra; a title of King Oimenepthah, E.I. 
37, b 3. The adjective is before the substantive, contrary to the 
usual order of the words. 

1514. Beloved by Amun; " The royal scribe, the royal priest, 
beloved by Amun, king for ever," E. I. 22, 11. 

1515. Approved by Amun ; " The righteous king approved by 
Amun, lord of the world, Rameses II.," B. 9. 

1516. Nearly the same ; a title of Rameses, B. 17, 2. See the 
proper names formed in this way, No. 1996 and No. 2023. 

1517. Belonging to Pthah; B. 17, 2. Also as a man's name, 
E. I. 72, 5. 

1518. Belonging to Rompi, the goddess of the year; B. 39. 
A title of Rameses II. 

1519. Beloved by his son; "The priest of Amun, beloved by 
his son the great Mandothph deceased," E. I. 35, All. 

1520. The same; "The priest Amunothph II., giver of life, 



VOCABULARY. 149 

beloved by his son Thothmes IV., giver of life, beloved by his son 
King Amunothph III., beloved by Amun;" Wilkinson's Ex- 
tracts, i. 13. 

1521. Beloved by his ancestors; E.I. 2. See Ancestor, 
No. 1839. 

1522. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 2. 

1523. The saviour gods, meaning Ptolemy Soter and his 
queen; R. S. 6. 

1524. The brother gods, the title of Ptolemy Philadelphus 
and his queen. It is introduced into the first name of his son 
Ptolemy Euergetes, K. 223. Hence the king was called Phila- 
delphus, loving his sister. 

1525. Brother-loving, or Philadelphus ; " The queen Arsi- 
noe, the goddess Philadelphus," H. 77, S i. 

1526. The beneeicent gods, the title of Ptolemy Euergetes 
and his queen ; " Priest of the gods Euergeta, of the gods Philo- 
patores, of the gods Epiphanes," E. I. 3, 2. This title was also 
used by Euergetes II. 

1527. The father-loving gods, the title of Ptolemy Philo- 
pator and his queen, in the sentence last quoted. 

1528. The same; " Priest of Osiris, lord of Egypt, priest of 
the gods Euergetae, of the gods Philopatores, of Isis, of Serapis," 
E. I. 48, a 4. 

1529. The same ; part of the title of Ptolemy Auletes, 
H. 65, K 1. 

1530. The illustrious gods; the title of Ptolemy Epiphanes 
and his wife, E. I. 3, 2. See No. 1443, Illustrious. 

1531. The same; H. 65, V g. 

1532. The same ; in the first name of their son Ptolemy Philo- 
metor, M. H. ii. 4. 

1533. The same; in the first name of their son Ptolemy Euer- 
getes II., M. H. ii. 4. 

1534. Gods loving their mother; the title of Ptolemy Phi- 
lometor and his wife, H. 64, I u. 

1535. Part of the first name of Soter II., being the titles of 
his parents, the god Euergetes II. and the goddess Philometor ; 
K. 237. 



150 VOCABULARY. 

1536. Saviour-god; 'the title of Ptolemy Soter 11., K. 239. 
It perhaps ends with the word HA£>eJULj to save. The cross 
may be M. 

1537. The same ; being part of the first name of his son Pto- 
lemy Neus Dionysus, K. 251. It ends with the same word. 

1538. Beneficent god and beneficent goddess; the title of 
Ptolemy Euergetes II. and his wife, being part of the first name 
of their son Ptolemy Alexander, K. 242. It is followed by the 
word child ; hence the egg and stroke following the first hatchet 
cannot be son as usual, but merely a masculine form correspond- 
ing with the feminine termination which follows the second 
hatchet. 

1539. Loving parents and brother; the title of Ptolemy 
Neus Dionysus, H. 65, K i. 

1540. The same; H. 65, T g. 

1541. Young Osiris; the title of Ptolemy Neus Dionysus, 

1542. The same; K. 249. [K. 250. 

1543. Seen, shown ; " So that it may be seen that it is law- 
ful for the Egyptians to honour," R. S. 13. 

1544. The same ; " By which it may be seen" R. S. 8. 

1545. Conspicuous; "A statue to king Ptolemy, living for 
ever, beloved by Pthah, god Epiphanes thrice holy, conspicuous, 
to be named Ptolemy the defender of Egypt," R. S. 6. 

1546. Proclamations ; " Letters for Lower -Egyptian pro- 
clamations" R. S. 14, where in the Greek translation we find 
letters Greek. 

1547. Probably the same; E. I. 1, 4. 

1548. The same; " The priests in the temples of Egypt shall 
wear crowns during the proclamations of god Epiphanes thrice 
holy," R. S. 12. 

1549. Greetings; B. 36, where the crowds, some on their 
knees and some with offerings, are greeting the return of the 
king from his victories. From pA-Oje, joy. 

1550. Honour; " So that it may be seen that it is lawful for 
the Egyptians to honour/' R. S. 13 ; so at least the Greek would 
lead us to translate this. 

1551. The same; E.I. 58, 52. 



VOCABULARY. 151 

1552. Worshipper; "The royal worshipper of the gods, the 
divine queen," E.I. 57, 16. Also as the determinative sign of 
a priest, E. I. 40, 18. 

1553. Hope, being spelt K<L &HT" ; " Grief of heart, hope, 
glory," written by the side of a mummy, E. I. 64. 

1554. Grief or heart ; being spelt TUOKJUL It^HTT in the 
sentence last quoted. 

1555. Give, dedicate; "To whom J&agave victory," E. I. 49. 
It is the letter K, and the word &.IK, dedicate. 

1556. The same ; " Prayers to Osiris, for his dedication, for 
the dedication of the scribe," E. I. 8. 

1557. The same, in the plural; "Numerous dedications, ,y 
R. S. 12. 

1558. Full of gifts; "The accustomed writing for the gift of 
the scribe, full of gifts" E. I. 33, a 1. The use of this word twice 
in one sentence is not uncommon, and helps to fix its meaning. 

1559. Dedicators ; " The holy dedicators of the temples," 
E. I. 42, 3. The last letter is an o, and makes the noun plural. 

1560. Dedicator ; " Amunmai Rameses II., dedicator of the 
Amunei [or Memnonium], like the temple of Ha," E. I. 42, 3. 
From (fl^\K, to dedicate. Compare No. 674. 

1561. Gave victory; " Whom Pthah approved, to whom Ra 
gave victory, a living image of Amun," is a part of the first name 
of Ptolemy Epiphanes, E. L 49. 

1562. Gave life ; " To whom Ra gave life," is, by analogy 
with the last, a translation of the first name of Psammetichus II., 
K. 169. 

1563. Gave blessings ; " To whom Ra gave blessings," is in 
the same way the translation of Bokra, the first name of King 
Sevechus, K. 160. 

1564. Perhaps giver of royalty; "A gift to Amun-Ra, king 
of the gods, giver of royalty," E. I. 103, 2. 

1565. Perhaps guardian; "Apis-Osiris Pet-amenti, god, king 
of the gods, guardian king for ever," E.I. 5. It is literally ' full 
of protection/ from &£-?€£,, to guard. 

1566. The same, or giver of blessings; "Prayers to Osiris, 
in his ceremonies, good immortal giver of blessings," E. I. 6. It 



152 VOCABULARY. 

is also applied to King Nectanebo, H. 7, E u. The first letter is 
R, or Ipl, the prefix for action. 

1567. Blessed, or happy, spoken of a deceased person; "The 
Osiris-like divine wife, the queen deceased immortal, blessed/' 
E. I. 57, 16; also E. I. 48, a 10. "A gift of happy years to the 
son of the sun Rameses II.," B. 59. 

1568. Probably blessing; " For the gift of the blessing of the 
priest of the soldiers," E.I. 17, 3. 

1569. The same ; " For the gift of the blessing of the ruler of 
Amenti," E. I. 18, 3. 

1570. Nearly the same; E. I. 14, and E. I. 16. Here we 
have the prefix £.C, the mark of a past tense. 

1571 and 1572. The same; "Oxen, geese, and money for the 
blessing of Ki, son of Sabacothph, a woman deceased, full of 
blessing" E.I. 15. This use of the word twice in one sentence 
helps to fix its meaning. 

1573 and 1574. The same; E. I. 19. This character is proba- 
bly a scraper for bathers. It has the force of B o T, from SlI^HTC, 
sweat j and to wipe, as shown in No. 482 ; or perhaps of H o K, 
from £/J0Kj to scrape, in the name of King Uchoreus. 

1575. Blessed ; " Blessed by the ruler of Amenti, Horus, lord 
of Egypt," E.I. 95, 1. 

1576. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 95, 3. 

1577. The same, in the feminine ; " Blessed by Osiris the ruler 
of Amenti," E. I. 100. 

1578. Full of blessing; E.I. 53, b 30. For these eleven 
groups we have only the context to fix the meaning, and any 
nearly similar meaning would fill its place as well. 

1579. King; E.I. 6. The first character is an R, and it is 
the word ppo, though it has a final t, which is wanting in the 
Coptic. As a title it is given to priests. 

1580. The same, in the plural; H. 66, Ey, where it means 
the immortal gods, as we see by comparing that sentence with 
U. 66, Rb. 

1581. The same; " The royal scribe, the royal priest, beloved 
by Amun, king for ever," E. I. 22, 11. The final letters maybe 
the article TR, he. 



VOCABULARY. 153 

1582. The same; " For the dedication of the king, the chief 
of the priests of Athor," E. I. 35, b 3. Also priest ; E. I. (se- 
cond series) 37, 4. 

1583. Chief of the priests; "The priest the chief of the 
priests in the cities/' E. I. (second series) 37, 4. 

1584. The same; "King of Memphis/ 5 E. I. 4, 2. 

1585. Lord of the house; the title of a deceased person, 
E. I. 74, 3 ; E.I. 75, 2. We have here the double R in the 
word ppo. 

1586. The same; E. L 74, 5. 

1587. Victorious ; this is the last syllable of the name Nito- 
cris, K. 61, which Eratosthenes translates Minerva, or Neith, 
the victorious. It is the word XOp, brave, or Xpo 5 conqueror, 
as the T has the guttural force of H or CH. In the same way 
we have seen that the name of the god Chem, No. 66, sometimes 
begins with a T, as does the word 3£HJUU, Egypt, No. 793. 

1588. The same; " Conqueror of hell/ 5 E.L 72, 14. Here 
this word begins with CH, instead of th, as in the last group 
and in the following. 

1589. The same; " Conqueror of Ethiopia/ 5 B. 39. 

1590. The same, in the plural; " Conquerors of the eternal 
serpent/ 5 E. I. 63. Here we have another form of the CH, with 
which the group begins. 

1591. The same; " Conquerors of the enemy/ 5 E. I. 74, 25. 

1592. Probably victories ; " The victories of the gods/ 5 E. I. 

62 (first part). 

1593. The same; E. I. 63 (second part). Here we have an- 
other form of the CH. 

1594. Conquerors ; " Conquerors of the eternal serpent/' E. I, 

63 (second part) . This is the same as No. 1589. 

1595. Conquered; "Decrees relating to the conquered ser- 
pent/ 5 E. I. 63 (second part) . 

1596. The same; "The hero, like Anubis, lord of the con- 
quered Ethiopians/ 5 B. 45, 14. See No. 1589. 

1597. Captives; B. 44, 17. From xep^eiT, to conquer. 
The man with his arms tied behind him, as the determinative 
sign, helps to explain the word. 



154 VOCABULARY. 

1598. Slave ; E. I. 116, 2. This is the same word as the last, 
but the determinative sign is a figure in the act of labour. 

1599. The same; B. 34, 27. 

1600. Great, grand ; " Defender of the great kingdoms, like 
Horus," E. I. 42, 4. Perhaps Xop, XCOpi, powerful. 

1601. The same ; " The priest of Amun, loved by his son the 
great Mandothph deceased," E. L 35, a 11. 

1602. The same, in the plural; "Upon the grand festival- 
days," R. S. 8. " Grand libations," R. S. 4. In both of these 
cases the adjective follows the substantive. 

1603. The same, in the feminine; "Isis, the great goddess- 
mother," E.L 4, 1. 

1604. The same, in the feminine; M. H. i. 15. 

1605. The same, in the feminine dual; " In like manner to 
the two great asps placed on the shrines," R. S. 9. This termi- 
nation is at once alphabetic and symbolic, like the word Augg. 
for Augusti on the Horn an coins. 

1606. The same; " Ahi, the great son of Athor," M. H. i. 17. 

1607. The same, spelt NO, from rt£.A., great-, "Thoth the 
lord of Oshmoonayn, the great city," M. H. i. 26. It is from this 
word that the city of Thebes is, in the prophet Nahum, called 
No-amun, or Diospolis Magna. 

1608. The same as No. 1600, the first letter being used for 
the whole word. Compare E. I. 111, 9, with 111, 14. 

1609. The same, being Tie, above; " His father a priest of the 
great Ra," E. 7. 39, 3. u Pahoe, a great priest, a man deceased 
in the temple," E. I. 26. 

1610. Shining ; " Two obelisks carved out of the shining 
mines," B. 51. From &OT.6.0T, to shine. 

1611. The same; " A shining star," B. 59. See fig. 1036. 

1612. Sovereign; E. I. 11, 11. The character may be a 
sceptre. 

1613. The same; " Sovereign of the gods," meaning the de- 
ceased king, E. 1. 30 (first part). Also applied to a private 
person, E.I. 16. 

1614. The same, in the feminine; " Nepthys the sister-god- 
dess, the sovereign great daughter of Ra," M. H. i. 16. 



VOCABULARY. 155 

1615. The same, applied to the deceased queen; E. 1. 58, 43. 

1616. The same; " Beloved by Osiris Pet-amenti, god, sove- 
reign lord of Upper Egypt," E. I. 1 (top) . 

1617. Probably the same, applied to a private person; E. I. 
1, 13. 

1618. The same; "The horse, the bearer of the sovereign to 
his victories," M. R. 47 and 48. The figure is the determinative 
sign for the king. 

1619. The same ; " The illustrious sovereign going by barge 
to the palace of Memphis," R. S. 9. 

1620. The same ; " In the thirty-third year of the sovereign 
he was lord of the country of the Lydians," H. 41, G k, meaning 
in the thirty-third year of his reign. 

1621. The same; "In the year thirty-eight of the sovereign 
the king, the brave Eameses II.," M. R. 115. 

1622. The same ; " In the year twelve, on the ninth day of 
Thoth, of the sovereign king," H. 43, Y c. 

1623. The same, in the feminine ; " In the year six .... of 
the sovereign queen, mistress of the world, Cleopatra," E. I. 4, 12. 

1624. Brave ; " The king, the brave son of Amun," E. I. 
4i2, 3. This is the word so translated by Hermapion from the 
obelisk, see page 20. The bull, JLft^XI, naturally represents the 
word JUUOje, to fight. 

1625. Victorious, from JULIOje^ to fight. It is the first syl- 
lable of the name of King Misphra Thothmes, K. 54, and the 
last syllable of the names of Queen Mautmes., K. 76, and Osir- 
tesenmes, No. 1960. Also as a noun, battle. It represents 
eJULecy, an anvil. Theophilus, in his Diversarum artium Sche- 
dula, lib. iii. 10, describes the Roman anvils as in the form of 
three half apples. This figure is formed as two such. Compare 
No. 1959 and 1960 for the syllabic power of this character. 

1626. Victorious in battles, with the adjective in the femi- 
nine ; " Like Horus, victorious in battles, like Aroeris," is said 
of Queen Nitocris, B. 50, 3. 

1627. Lord of battles; a title of Ptolemy Csesar, the infant 
son of Julius and Cleopatra, M. R. 23. The sphinx has the force 
of ttK&, lord. 



156 VOCABULARY. 

1628. The same; a title of King Oimenepthah I., M. R. 45. 

1629. The same ; " Son of the sun, lord of battles, Nectanebo, 
giver of life for ever," H. 8. 

1630. The same; " Son of the sun, lord of battles, Amunmai 
Rameses II.," E. I. 15. This title always precedes the king's 
second name, while ( lord of the world' precedes his first name. 
In Hermapion's translation from the obelisk, pages 20, 22, it is 
c strong in battle/ and f brave in war/ 

1631. Good in battles ; a title of Amunothph III., E. I. 24, 
a 2. The leg is the letter B, and perhaps the word OTA.iL, holy. 

1632. The same ; " In the first year of the king, good in battles, 
the lord of the world, Oimenepthah I.," B. 36. Here the word 
battle, which was before a single character, is spelt with letters. 

1633. King of battles; M.R. 62. 

1634. Image of war; "In the first year, on the nineteenth 
day of the month of Athyr, of the sovereign the brave image of 
war/' H. 80, S k. From TOTttrr, an image, and JUlIctje, war. 
Hence this group is pronounced Thothmes, and was a suitable 
title for that king. 

1635. Perhaps butcher; written over men sharpening their 
knives, while others are in the act of cutting up oxen, M. C. '83. 

1636. Perhaps carpenter; written over men cutting wood 
into shape with axes, M. C. 43. 

1637. Perhaps feeding; " Feeding the goat ;" " Feeding the 
sacred cattle," written over men so employed, M. C. 31. 

1638. Lame ; over a man with two club feet, M. C. 93. The 
leg is the determinative sign of the part injured. 

1639. Dwarf ; over the figure of the man, M. C. 93. The 
four wavy lines only represent the letters N N. Hence comes the 
Greek and Latin word nanus. 

1640. Deceased ; it follows the queen's name on her sarco- 
phagus, and also the name of her father Psammetichus, E. I. 58. 
From JUIOX, death. 

1641. The same; E.I. 1, 1. 

1642. The same, in the feminine ; E. I. 58, 46. 

1643. The same; E.I. 15, 15. 

1644. The same; E. I. 3, 8, and E. I. 12, 18. 



VOCABULARY. 157 

1645. The same; "Imothph, a woman deceased, daughter of 
the priest of Pthah," E. I. 4, 3 ; also E. I. 12, 2. 

1646. The same, in the feminine ; E. I. 8. 

1647. The same ; E. I. 87, 8. The first letter is s, for <LC, 
the prefix of the past tense. 

1648. The same; E.I. 118, 24. The sculptor, in mistake, 
gave this group the masculine termination, which he afterwards 
altered to the feminine, as it is applied to a woman. 

1649. Perhaps the same, though more probably blessed. It 
may be from &.CAXO*€, deceased, or C*AOV, to praise, or 
CJULA-iLT, blessed. " Hapimen blessed by Osiris," E. I. 44, 11. 
" His daughter deceased," E. I. 20, 9. 

1650 and 1651. The same; E. I. 29 (fourth part). The latter 
is also seen in E. I. 35, a 1, where the priest Mandothph is called 
Sma-mando, blessed by the god Mando. 

1652 and 1653. The same, masculine and feminine; E.I. 15, 
7, and E. I. 15, 12, where they are used simply for deceased. 

1654. Deceased; E. I. 94, 2. From JULCUOTr, to die. 

1655. The same; " The deceased Osiris-like king Amyrtseus 
deceased," E. I. 30 (fourth part) . Horapollo says, book i. chap. 
44, that to represent anything hateful they employed a fish, by 
which he may mean this group. This fish is the letter M, as also 
is another fish in No. 246. 

1656. The same, with the masculine suffix q ; E.I. 28 (fourth 
part) . 

1657. The same, with the dead body or mummy as the deter- 
minative sign ; H. 70, K y. 

1658. The same, beginning with &.C, the prefix for the past 
tense ; " The statue of the deceased Osiris-like king Amyrtseus," 
E.I. 31 (fourth part). 

1659. The same, in the plural; " Guardian of the dead," E. I. 
41, 6. " Statues of the deceased who are illustrious Egyptians/' 
E.I. 31 (third part). 

1660. The same, in the feminine ; " Her mother was the lady 
Haismout deceased," E. I. 52, 53. One T is part of the word 
JULCJOOTT, and the second is the feminine article. 

1661. The same, also in the feminine, in the same sentence; 
E. I. 53, a 5. 



158 VOCABULARY. 

1662. Probably buried ; " Immortal, buried, deceased in the 
temple/' H. 70, M y. This word begins with the usual prefix of 
the past tense. 

1663. Mummy-case, made of wood; " Pthah-Sokar- Osiris, 
lord of the mummy-case" E. I. 68. 

1664. The same; " In the hated mummy-case is the image of 
the deceased/' E. I. 31 (fourth part). From JUL6CT", to hate. 

1665. The same; E. I. (second series) 41, 23. The first two 
letters are K R, and form the word ^XApto> silence, whence the 
Greeks borrowed their word Charon, the ferryman for the dead. 
Diodorus Siculus tells us that the name was Egyptian. 

1666. The same, with the addition that it is sculptured; E. I. 
(second series) 41, 8. See the word Sculptor, No. 314. 

1667. The same; Triple Mummy-case, fig. 1, 1. 

1668. A mummy, or dead body, laid out on the peculiar lion- 
shaped couch ; " A priest belonging to the offerings to the mum- 
my," E. I. 4, 15. 

1669. The same; " Offerings to the dead," E. I. 94, 2. The 
letters are the word 30^-pU^ silent, as in No. 1665. The offer- 
ings to the dead here spoken of were forbidden by the Jewish 
law, in Deuteronomy xxvi. 14. 

1670. The same, with the prefix of the past tense ; E. I. 12, 9. 

1671. Deep, or the bottomless pit, from ujHKj deep; "The 
mummy-case in the depths of Amenti," E. I. (sec. series) 41, 23. 

1672. Mummy, spelt M M, written over the lion-shaped couch 
on which the mummies were usually placed; Triple Mummy- 
case, fig. 20. 

1673. Perhaps dead, from £>ert, departed; E. I. 12, 9; also 
E. I. 118, 28. Hence perhaps the Hebrew name of c the valley 
of the children of Hinnom/ 

1674. Nearly the same, perhaps from £/JDT" ? to fall; E. I. 
118, 24. Horapollo seems to mean these two groups, when he 
says, book i. chap. 56, that to symbolize an unjust man, they 
draw two claws of an hippopotamus turned downwards. 

1675. Nearly the same, from Xumq, to happen; E. I. 118, 24. 

1676. Nearly the same, from &arre 5 destroyed, hateful; 
" Dead, destroyed, in the mummy-case/' E. I. 29 (fourth part) . 



VOCABULARY. 159 

Horapollo, as before quoted, book i. chap. 44, seems to confound 
the words c dead' and s hateful. 3 

1677. The same ; " The boat belonging to the dead persons 
in Amenti," E. I. 86, 7. 

1678. The same; " She is the appointed door-keeper of the 
hateful door/' E. I. 69, a 22. 

1679. A mummy, from ce&rre, to prepare; E. I. 102, a 2; 
also E. I. 102, b 2, and E. L 102, c 2. 

1680. Mummies; " The Osiris-like keepers of the mummies" 
is written over a row of mummies in their tombs, E. I. 66. 

1681. The same ; " Ruler of the house of the mummies" E. I. 
66 (second part) . 

1682. Probably commanding, from OYA.&CA.&IT ; " The com- 
manding god, lord of the years," E. I. 28 (third part) . 

1683. The same; E. I. 28 (first part). 

1684. The same; E. I. 28 (first part). 

1685. Good, from H^rte ; "The good king," B. 33, 69. "Good 
mummies," E. I. 70, F 4. 

1686. The same, meaning that the parentage of the deceased 
was honourable ; E. L 70, F 4. 

1687. Good as to his mother, in the sentence last quoted. 
The same sentence, though less clearly written, is on several 
other scarabsei on the same plate. 

1688. Treasures; E.I. 116,8. Nearly the same as ITAXLjert- 
confer^ since the eight strokes have the force of cyJULOTrt, 
eight. 

1689. The same; E.I. 116, 13. From n^ojecOTH. 

1690. Perhaps the same; E. I. 69, b 3. 

1691. Perhaps good, being not unlike the last six groups; 
" Appointed displayer of the good night-stars," E. I. 28 (first 
part) . 

1692. Appointed; " During the appointed last day of Mesore, 
the birth-day of the priest living for ever," R. S. 10. Also 
righteous; " A righteous good* man deceased, son of Neithamun 
a woman deceased," E. 1. 12, 1. The deceased persons on the 
tablets are usually thus styled righteous and good ; and it seems 
probable that these were the hieroglyphical characters pointed 



160 VOCABULARY. 

to when Herodotus in mistake understood the word lUpCttJUtf, 
a mortal, to mean ' honourable ' and c good/ The rabbit has the 
force ofsouT, from (ToDT^, to dig, and <£^pA.<5lJ0Cnrrc, 
a rabbit or under -digger. This word is CCnfTen^ just. See No. 
1703 for further proof of the sound to be given this character, 
and No. 1877 for the name of the rabbit. 

1693. The same; "By this it is known that it is lawful for 
the Egyptians to honour," R. S. 13. " A gift dedicated to Osi- 
ris Pet-amenti, righteous good king for ever," E. I. 2, 1. 

1694. Decrees; "To erect a similar shrine to the god Epi- 
phanes thrice blessed, according to these decrees," R. S. 13. This 
word seems to admit of being divided into f appointed-in-the- 
temple things'. 

1695. The same; "Decrees relating to the representation of 
his barge and the barges of Egypt," E. I. 28 (second part) ; also 
E.I. 58,21. 

1696. Eight, in the plural; ee He paid the soldiers what was 
right," R.S. 1. 

1697. Judge, a name for Osiris, for which reason it is placed 
within an oval; _B. 15. 

1698. Righteous good king of the gods, another name for 
Osiris; M . H. i. 13. 

1699. Appointed priest; " In the year when he was appointed 
priest for the month in Memphis," E. I. 73, 11. 

1700. The same ; " It shall be lawful for appointed persons to 
make feast and erect a similar shrine," R. S. 13. Here we read 
in the Greek that it shall be lawful for private persons to make 
this shrine. 

1701. The same; "Appointed guardian of the door is the office 
of the great serpent," E. I. 64. 

1702. Righteous; " The Osiris -like righteous .de- 
ceased," E. I. 71, a 3. The termination of this word is probably 
I pi, to be, which in Coptic is usually prefixed. 

1703. The same, being used for No. 1692, in Triple Mummy- 
case, fig. 20. From Ciarf", the dog-star, and the N, the cha- 
racter following, we get COTTeit, righteous. 

1704. Probably raised; "A royal gift to Pthah, an offering 



VOCABULARY. 161 

raised by the lord of battles Amunmai Rameses," E. I. 103, 1. 
The character is a perch or prop. The ibis stands upon it in No. 
165. It has the force of T, or T o N, from Trcocnrit, to raise. 

1705. Righteous; " A righteous good man immortal/' E. I. 
89, 4. Also judge; "The judge, ruler of Esne," E. I. 4, 4. Here 
the word COnrreit is formed by an s and the syllable T o N, as 
it was before, in No. 1692, by S O u T and the letter N. 

1706. Probably the same; " The judge Amun-Ehe-Chem," 
M. H. i. 6. 

1707. Perhaps great, in the feminine ; " Nephthys the sister- 
goddess, the powerful great daughter of Ra," M. H. i. 16. The 
first character is the letter M, used for Amun, as in No. 498. 

1708. The same; E. I. 42, 4. 

1709. Holy; "The holy crown, called Pschent," R. S. 9. 
" In the splendid holy liturgies/ ' R. S. 12. Also three times in 
R. S. 11. 

1710. The same, in the plural; E. I. 65 (second part). 

1711. Grey, or spotted black and white, written over a spotted 
heifer; M. R. 41 ; also H. 61, where however the animal is not 
coloured ; hence ^-OTI^-OTA-IT, grey. The character is an A or 
other vowel. 

1712. Red; over a red heifer in M. R. 41. From JUtepctj, red. 

1713. White ; over a white heifer in M. R. 41. The letter B, 
for cnra?fiaj, white. 

1714. Black; over a black heifer in M. R. 41. This charac- 
ter has the force of KAJULG, black ; in No. 792 it has nearly the 
same force. Horapollo says (lib. i. 70), that when they would write 
' darkness/ they use the tail of a crocodile, by which he seems to 
mean this character. 

1715. Wore ; "Which he wore on his investiture in the tem- 
ple with the country of the kingdom," R. S. 9. 

1716. Clothe; " Clothe the statue for the ceremonies, like 
to the gods of the country," R. S. 7. 

1717. Investiture; "Which he wore on his investiture in 
the temple with the country of the kingdom," R. S. 9. Perhaps 
the last character forms no part of the group : it may be the pre- 
position following. 



162 VOCABULARY. 

1718. Set xjp ; " They shall also set up a statue to King Pto- 
lemy," R. S. 6. 

1719. The same; " Set up a tablet in the temple, carved with 
letters sacred," R. S. 14. 

1720. The same ; " It shall be lawful for appointed persons to 
make feast, and set up a similar shrine to god Epiphanes," R. S. 
13. The two legs in our figure should be joined, as in No. 1718. 

1721. The same; "Which is to be set up in the temples of 
Egypt," R. S. 14. From xcrrq, to cut. See No. 252 for the 
force of the first letter, and No. 1735 for the same word, spelt 
with another form of the X. 

1722. The same, in the same sentence; Salt, pi. 5. 

1723. The same, or perhaps to load; " He loaded ships with 
silver," H. 41, H g. 

1724. The same; " He made and set up two obelisks cut out 
of stone," B. 48. 

1725. The same ; u He set up two obelisks," B. 49. This ends 
with the syllable rtecj, the sign for the third person of the past 
tense. 

1726. Image; "A living image of Amun," E. I. 49. This is 
part of the first name of Ptolemy Epiphanes, of which we have a 
translation at the beginning of the Rosetta Stone. 

1727. The same; " Thy name is the image of the sun," E. I. 
118, 4. " Thy name is lasting, like heaven; an image of the sun," 
E. L 42, 2. 

1728. The same, followed by the determinative sign for the 
statue; E. I. 70, F 5. 

1729. The same; E. I. 70, H 3. 

1730. The same, in the plural, or statues; " Statues of the 
deceased illustrious priests," E. I. 31 (third part) . The bird, the 
letter o, is the plural termination. 

1731. The same, in the plural; E. L 79, 5. 

1732. Statue ; " At the going-out from the temple of the sta- 
tue of Amun-Ra in the water processions, they shall also carry 
out the shrine and statue of god Epiphanes," R. S. 8. Also as 
the determinative sign for a woman ; " Honour to the deified 
lady," E. I. 52, 2. The final S is a sign of the feminine gender. 



VOCABULARY. 163 

1733. Also a determinative sign for a woman; E. I. 52, 43. 

1734. Cut; « Two obelisks cut out of hard stone/' B. 50, 6; 
also B. 48, and B. 51. From XGX, to cut. 

1735. Made, cut ; " He made and set up two obelisks," B. 48. 
From XO-rq, to cut. 

1736. Carved, cut; " Set up a tablet in the temple, carved 
with letters sacred," i?. S. 14. 

1737. The same; E. I. 12, 11, and E. I. 77, 4. 

1738. Pleased, or decreed by; "It pleased the priests of 
Upper and Lower Egypt" are the first words of the enactment 
of the decree on the Rosetta Stone, line 5. 

1739. Going-out ; " On the going-out from the temple of the 
statue of Amun-Ra," R. S. 8. Also heliacal rising, which is 
the meaning given to this group by Chseremon, page 23 ; " The 
heliacal rising in the city of Tanis of the star of night," E. I. 11, 
10; also E.I. 9, 14. 

1740. Coming; " Thy name is the coming of Aurora," E.I, 
118, 16. From riK^,, to come. The chance of being misled by 
spelling a word as if it were Coptic is less in modern inscriptions 
such as this, which is only of B. c. 500. 

1741. Bear patiently; u He bore patiently, and then remit- 
ted the debts," R. S. 2. From tOOTrt&KT, to bear patiently. 

1742. Received; " He received the country of the kingdom 
from his father," R. S. 10. 

1743. Carry; "They shall also carry out the shrine and sta- 
tue of god Epiphanes," R. S. 8. The first letter seems to be the 
sign of the future tense here, as in No. 1718 and No. 1720. 

1744. Perhaps carryings, a noun plural; R. S. 13. 

1745. Accession day, or literally, either day of receiving the 
kingdom, or day of carrying out the statue ; R. S. 7. See Day, 
No. 1004. 

1746. Regulator, or steersman; " The steersman of the 
boat" is written over the figure of a god steering the boat of Ra, 
E. I. 28. Also make, or fashion ; " Make for King Ptolemy [a 
shrine and] portable statue of silver," R. S. 7. 

1747. The same, in the feminine ; the title of a goddess, 
M. H. i. 37. 

m 2 



164 VOCABULARY. 

1748. Regulating; "Regulating the splendid rites/' R. S. 3. 

1749. Perform; "Perform sacrifices and other rites/' R. S. 
11, and R. S. 12. 

1750. A man; " Pet-Isis, a man deceased/' E. I. 23, b 1. This 
or some similar figure usually follows the name of a man, and in 
part answers the purpose of the oval which incloses the name of 
a king. 

1751. The same; E. I. 33, b 7. This one instance will explain 
as completely as more would the manner in which the characters 
are formed in the hieratic writing. The peculiarity of the style 
points out the tool used, which is sometimes found in the tombs. 
It was a reed bruised at the end, and its fibres formed a brush, 
which may have tapered to a point, as all the strokes were about 
the same thickness. The ink was lampblack, or some other pre- 
paration of charcoal, any of which would be indestructible, except 
by fire. This style of character was also occasionally employed 
on stone. 

1752. The same, sometimes feminine; E. I. 19, and E. I. 20. 

1753. The same; E. I. 19, and E. I. 20. 

1754. The same; E.I. 1,1. " The holy man deceased/' E. I. 
8. The man holds the whip-shaped sceptre of Osiris, to show that 
he is acquitted by the judge. 

1755. The same, in the plural, mentioned as prisoners; H. 
42, Y e. 

1756. The same, in the feminine; H. 42, Yf. 

1757. A woman; the mother of the deceased person in E. I. 
23, a 1_, and E. I. 23, b 1 . In the pictorial part of several tablets 
we see that the lotus-flower held in the hand is the mark of a 
woman. 

1758. The determinative sign of a mummy standing against 
the wall, in the plural. It follows the words, " The gods Soteres 
immortal," R. S. 6. 

1759. Captives, with their hands tied behind; " Captives six- 
teen" are mentioned among the booty, H. 42, E f. 

1760. Living captives; "Living captives four hundred and 
ninety," H. 41, P q. 

1761. The same; B. 36, where the king, on the return from 



VOCABULARY. 165 

his conquests, is leading them home tied to his chariot. By com- 
paring this with the last, we see that the adjective may be placed 
either before or after the substantive. 

1762. Enemies; "The monarch, conqueror of his enemies" 
E. I. 42, 4. The figure is that of a man in the act of begging 
for mercy. 

1763. The same, perhaps from &HOJ, tormented ; "The con- 
queror of his enemies," B. 44, 7. 

1764. Lord of the enemies; B. 43, 12. 

1765. Soldiers; "Scribe to the soldiers," E. I. 26. "Priest 
to the soldiers," E. I. 17, 3. " He paid the soldiers what was 
just," R. S. 1; which, however, seems to be translated in the 
Greek c He punished the rebels, as was just/ 

1766. The same; "Scribe to the soldiers," E. I. 26. The 
arrow is here used instead of the bow. 

1767. The same; "Chief of the soldiers," E. I. 44, 28. 

1768. The same; E. I. 116, 19. 

1769. The same; " The son of the chief of the soldiers, E. I. 
114, 3. From JU^LTOI, a soldier. This word also forms part 
of the last group. 

1770. The same; E. I. 41, 1. Perhaps from ^CUTeK, to kill. 

1771. The same, or more exactly soldier-men, being formed 
of the two characters, like the Coptic ^(JOTefiptOJUU. It shows 
that the characters are used to represent the sound rather than 
the thought. " Honour to the deified chief of the soldier-men," 
E. I. (second series) 23, b 1. 

1772. Archer, being the figure of a quiver, written over a man 
in the boat of Ra ; E. I. 64. 

1773. Probably castle ; " Ptolemy Neus Dionysus, victorious 
in his castle," E. I. 72, 9. 

1774. Conqueror; B. 36. The man is in the act of striking 
down his enemies. 

1775. Conquerors, or warriors; B. 45, 3. The man holds 
a shield. 

1776. The same; B. 43, 8. The bull is JUULC, and thus the 
whole word is JUUOJI, to fight. 

1777. Conqueror; "The monarch, conqueror of his enemies," 



166 VOCABULARY. 

E. I. 42, 4. This is the group meant by Horapollo, when he 
says (book ii. chap. 5) " The hands of a man, one holding a shield 
and the other a bow, denote the front of the battle." 

1778. The same; "The heavenly king, the brave conqueror" 
E. I. 42, 3. 

1779. Slingers, a body of troops in the Egyptian army; B. 
44, 8. From ctj&uoii, a cord. 

1780. Nearly the same ; B. 44, 8. From TertttOT, to bruise. 

1781. King of Upper and Lower Egypt; a title of Ptolemy 
Neus Dionysus, E. I. 73, 9. The sceptres held by the figure are 
distinguished by the lotus and the lily of the two countries. 

1782. Child, son ; " Horus a child, the son of Isis," M. H. i. 
17. The figure holds the finger to his mouth to denote his in- 
fancy : he is too young to speak. From this the Greeks called 
Horus the god of silence, under the name of Harpocrates, Horus 
the child. 

1783. The same; " Eameses II., the great king of Egypt, the 
victorious son of Oimenepthah I., the great king of Egypt, who 
was the victorious son of the son of Rameses 1./' B. 17, 6. 

1784. The same, in the pedigree quoted above. 

1785. The same; E. 1. 73, 5. From <6pOTT, a son. 

1786. The same; "The son of Pthah," E. 1. 72, 10. The 
chief character is the single lock of hair which was worn by the 
young Egyptians as a mark of rank. We see it on the sculptures 
twelve centuries before our era ; and it is mentioned by Ammia- 
nus four centuries after our era. 

1787. The same, or young; being part of the name of Neus 
Dionysus, or the young Osiris, K. 250. 

1788. The same; " The good wife bore her beloved child on 
the year XXV., on the twenty-first day of Paophi," E. I. 73, 7; 
also E. I. 73, 4. The Coptic ciJHpi, son, is in the hieroglyphics 
usually spelt S E. 

1789. The same; " Horus, the son of Isis," M.H. i. 17. The 
bar by the side of the goose is the masculine termination of the 
word. The goose alone often has the same meaning. 

1790. The same ; " Horus, the son of Isis and son of Osiris," 
M. H. i. 17. The egg has the same force as the goose. 



VOCABULARY. 167 

1791. The same; "The son of the sun, lord of Upper and 
Lower Egypt, Ptolemy immortal/' E. I. 4, 5. 

1792. Eldest son; " The beloved eldest son of Amun" is part 
of the name of Shishank II., K. 154. See First, No. 1095. 

1793. The same; E. I. 118, 8. From JUl£.ajICI, first born, a 
modern form of OJ^JUIICI, from OJA.^ beginning, and JULGC, born. 

1794. Daughter; E.I. 24, b 2. It is the word for < child/ fol- 
lowed by the feminine article. 

1795. The same; "Neith, the queen of Sais, daughter of Isis," 
E. I. 33, c 3. 

1796. Child, masculine and feminine; E.I. 20, 9 and 13, 
where the various relations of the deceased are mentioned. This 
may be an abridgement of No. 1802. 

1797. Daughter ; " A woman deceased, daughter of the priest 
of Mando," E. I. 52, 4. This is the feminine of No. 1789. 

1798. The same; " Imo, a woman deceased, daughter of the 
priest of Pthah," E. I. 27, 13. 

1799. The same; "The queen deceased, the royal daughter 
of the lord of the world, Psammetichus deceased/' E. I. 58, 2. 
This is the feminine of No. 1790. 

1800. The same; " Imothph, a woman deceased, daughter of 
the priest of Pthah," E. 1. 4, 3. This word, and No. 1798, in 
both of which the mark of the feminine is doubled, belong to in- 
scriptions made under the Ptolemies. 

1801. Children; E. I. 6. Perhaps from eit£,pcr[~, sons. 

1802. The same; "A kingdom, remaining to himself and his 
children for ever/' R. S. 5. " Men, women, and children/ 9 H. 42, 
Y h. From £)$0^\~, sons. From this word Horus the child was 
called H6r-pa-krot, or Harpocrates. 

1803. Lawfully-born children ; E. I. 6. 

1804. Perhaps the same, as it seems to be a contraction of the^, 
last; "Wives, children, and others/' E. I. 72, 11. 

1805. Bore, or brought forth; " The good wife bore her be- 
loved child/' E. I. 73, 7. From tt<^KG, to bear. 

1806. Probably son ; it follows the name of the father in the 
first name of Ptolemy III., K. 223. The first character is a bone 
with flesh upon it. 



168 VOCABULARY. 

1807. The same; in the first name of Ptolemy IV., K. 225. 
See Horapollo, book ii. chap. 9. 

1808. Born, birth ; " The appointed last day of Mesore, the 
birth-day of the priest living for ever," R. S. 10. " de- 
ceased, born of the lady Hesmo deceased," E. I. 69, b 8. From 
AA6C, born. Also serpent ; over the figure of the animal, E. I. 
65. From JLft.ICI 5 a serpent. Also approved; Thothmes, K. 72, 
is " approved by Thoth," which is proved by the translation of 
the name of Amunmai Rameses, K. 101, as given by Hermapion; 
" Whom Amun loves and Ra approves." From JUtectje, to exa- 
mine. 

1809. The same; "A righteous good man deceased, born of 
Neithamun, a woman deceased," E.I. 12, 1. This word and the 
last are used when speaking of the mother, not usually of the 
father. 

1810. The same, in the feminine ; " His beloved wife , 

born of Amuni, a woman deceased," E.I. 17. Also mother; 
" Neith, mother of the gods," M. H. i. 12. 

1811. The same; " liawfully-born children," E. I. 6. As we 
have just seen JULGC, born, used for mother, so here we have 
JUL&t, mother, used for born. See No. 1803. 

1812. The same; E. I. 21, 4. 

1813. The same, in the feminine; E. I. 21, 5. 

1814. Father; " Father of the gods," E. I. 6. 

1815. The same; " Horus, his father Osiris," B. 22. It is 
there followed by a second snake, or F, for the pronoun his. 

1816. The same ; " Osiris the son of Neith, his father is Seb," 
M. H. i. 13. 

1817. The same; C( Received the country of the kingdom from 
his father," R. S. 10. " Horus, the avenger of his father," E. I. 
4,2. 

1818. The same; " Honour to Seb, the father of the gods," 
M.H. i. 11. 

1819. The same; " Seb, the father of the gods," M.H. i. 11. 
Also written over the father of the deceased, E. I. 18. 

1820. The same; " Honour to Horus, the avenger of his fa- 
ther," E.I. 51. 



VOCABULARY. 169 

1821. Fathers ; " The godfathers of the country/' E. I. 32 
(third part) . 

1822. The same,, meaning ancestors ; B. 34, 48. 

1823. Grandfather, or father's father; "His grandfather, 
priest of the great Ra," E. 1. 39, 3. He sits among the ancestors 
of the deceased, next after his father and mother. 

1824. Great grandfather; E.I. 39, 3. He follows in his 
turn among the ancestors of the deceased. 

1825. Great-great grandfather; "Thothmes III., great- 
great grandfather of Amunmai Anemneb," M. H. ii. 1. 

1826. Mother ; " His mother Taar, a woman deceased/' E. I. 
8 ; also E. I. 39, 3, and in many funereal tablets. From XK&rt, 
mother, with the addition of the feminine article. Plutarch says 
that Isis, the mother-goddess, was called Mouth, which is this 
word. Ammianus (lib. 17) says that, as male vultures are never 
met with, a vulture was used to mean nature, by which he pro- 
bably meant the same goddess. 

1827. The same; E.I. 20. 

1828. The same ; " The goddess Amenta, mother of the gods/' 
E. I. 73, 2. 

1829. Maternal grandfather; E.I. 104, 7. 

1830. The same; E.I. 89. 

1831. Maternal grandmother, or mother's mother; E.I. 
104, 7. 

1832. Paternal grandmother, or father's mother; E.I. 104. 

1833. Wife ; " Ptolemy immortal, beloved by Pthah, and his 
sister his wife the queen, the mistress of the world, Cleopatra, 
the gods Philometores," H. 64, V. This is the feminine of &<*.!, 
a husband. 

1834. The same ; " The good wife bore her beloved child," 
E. I. 73, 7. 

1835. Eoyal wife; "The royal sister, the royal wife, the 
great goddess, daughter to Queen Arsinoe," H. 77, L o. 

1836. Wives ; " His wives, lawfully-born children, and 
others," E.I. 72, 11. 

1837. Brother; "The Queen Arsinoe, the goddess Phila- 
delphus, or brother-loving," H. 77, S i. From COrt^ brother. 



170 VOCABULARY. 

1838. The same. See the word Brother-gods, No. 1524. 

1839. This is nearly the same word, but seems to mean kins- 
man, or rather ancestor ; " His ancestor, the great Raothph, a 
man deceased," E. I. 8, where this word is used several times, 
written over the deceased relations of the deceased person. The 
last letter may be the pronoun ' his/ 

1840. The same, in the feminine, E. I. 8. Also his sister; 
E. 1. 105, 3, where Isis is called the sister of Osiris. Also his 
wife ; E. I. 2, and E. I. 60, which may be explained by the 
Egyptian custom of men marrying their sisters. 

1841. Probably the same, in the plural; E. I. 15, 9. The bird, 
o, is the plural termination. 

1842. The same, in the plural; " Osirtesen, approved by his 
ancestors/' E.I. 6. 

1843. Sister; " Nephthys, the great sister-goddess," H. 73, 
E f. This is the feminine of No. 1838. 

1844. The same ; " And his sister his wife the queen, Cleo- 
patra," H. 64, Vn. 

1845. Probably aunt, being formed of the words ' sister, mo- 
ther'; E. I. 107, 27, where it is the title of a royal lady holding 
a child in her arms. . 

1846. Probably niece, or sister's daughter; S-E, 1. 

1847. Perhaps cousin, or daughter of mother's sister; E. I. 89. 

1848. Serpent; written over a figure of the huge fabulous 
serpent on the sarcophagus of Oimenepthah, E. I. 65. From 
JUUCI, a serpent. We remark that the words serpent, born, and 
approved of, are spelt with the same letters. 

1849. The same ; " Decrees relating to the conquered serpent," 
E. I. 63 (second part) . From gj^UO, serpent. 

1850. The same; E.I. 63 (second part) . 

1851. The same, with a plural termination; (( Male serpents, 
female serpents, and scorpions," E. I. 12, 13. 

1852. The same, in the feminine, in the sentence last quoted. 

1853. The same; " Victories over the eternal serpent," E. I. 
63 (second part) . 

1854. River-serpent; E.I. 66 (second part). From ^eXXcrr, 
a river. 



VOCABULARY. 171 

1855. The same, in the plural ; " Living river-serpents" E. I. 
65, where they are walking in the river which divides life from 
death. As the adjective has a feminine termination, this noun 
is no doubt of that gender. 

1856. Foreign ; written over a serpent, meaning foreign ser- 
pent, from C£.&oAj foreign, E. I. (second series) 19. The arm 
holding a sword has the force of SEB, in Sebek-Ra, the first 
name of King Amunothph I. 

1857. River-serpent, the same as No. 1855 ; E. I. (second 
series) 18, 13. 

1858. Scorpions ; " Male serpents, female serpents, and scor- 
pions," E.I. 12, 13. From the Coptic (5^Xh. Compare No. 231. 

1859. Crocodiles; E.I. 72, 9. 

1860. The same ; mentioned among the offerings, E. I. 93, 3, 
and E. I. 98, 4. 

1861. The same; H. 41, L k. This word is spelt thmso, 
and gives its name to the Chamsi, or crocodile lakes, near Hero- 
opolis. That the word began with a guttural is seen from the 
change of the first letter from TH to CH, and again by its being 
dropt in the Coptic name for the animal, GJULCOO^,. 

1862. Monkeys; "Monkeys praying to the statues of the 
gods," E. I, 46, 6, a sentence which, though remarkable, is con- 
firmed by the picture at the head of the tablet, where two of these 
dog-headed monkeys are in the attitude of praying to Aroeris 
in his boat. The animal is probably the dog-faced monkey, the 
Simia cynomolgus, a native of Ethiopia, and now not known in 
Lower Egypt. 

1863. Horse, from £/TC0tOp ; written over the horse in the 
king's chariot, E. L (second series) 51, 17. 

1864. The same ; E. I. (second series) 51, 26. Note. Our 
figure should be corrected, with a semicircular T in place of the 
first R. 

1865. The same ; "Horses two hundred and twenty-nine" are 
mentioned among the booty, H. 42, D e. From COOJAX. 

1866. Swine, meaning perhaps wicked people ; E. I. 53, a 22. 
From &crre, hateful. In the judgment scene, E. I. 61, we see 
the hog driven away in a boat from the presence of Osiris ; and 



172 VOCABULARY. 

Horapollo says (lib. ii. 37), that when they would denote a filthy 
man they draw a hog. 

1867. The same; over the hog in the judgment scene last 
quoted. .From ecyo, a hog. 

1868. A dog; perhaps a bloodhound, from cnA&, blood, 
E. /. 108, where it is written over the picture of the animal, 
which is the case with the following groups. It is the name of 
the deceased man on a tablet, E. I. (second series) 24, 12, whose 
peculiar god is the dog-headed Anubis. Also blood ; in E. I. 
(second series) 41, 6, Horus is called the giver of life, victory, 
and blood. 

1869. The same, some kind of greyhound; M. C. 20. 

1870. The same; a square-eared dog, with a stiff erect tail, 
and a tuft of hair at the end, like No. 149, M. C. 23. This is the 
first letter of the word CI cue, dog. 

1871. Jackal; M. C. 20. A word compounded of CI LOO, 
which force is conveyed by the first character, the rabbit, as 
proved by No. 1877. 

1872. The same; M. C. 11. 

1873. Panther; M.C. 23. 

1874. Lioness; M. C. 20. This and the last may be from 
&.&.C, to tear in pieces ; or from -S.^-cy l, a carcase. 

1875. Baboon; M. C. 21. From eit, an ape. 

1876. The same; M. C. 21. 

1877. Rabbit; M. C. 20. From COYOTert, to burrow, or 
<ruOT£,, to bore, whence ^^.pe(Tuoo't r TC } a rabbit. This is 
important as proving the sound SOOT, which belongs to the 
rabbit in numerous groups. 

1878. Stag, with branching horns; M. C. 20. Perhaps from 
£>£H or £>Hrt, near, and the several verbs derived therefrom, 
meaning to attack. 

1879. A horned quadruped, but of what kind the picture 
scarcely determines ; M.C. 18. 

1880. A horned quadruped; M. C. 18. 

1881. A horned quadruped; M. C. 18. 

1882. Goat, with straight spiral horns; M.C. 18; also M. C. 
31. Hence (Tie, a goat. 



VOCABULARY. 173 

1883. A horned quadruped, being the same word as No. 1879; 
M. C. 18. 

1884. A horned quadruped; M. C. 19. 

1885. A horned quadruped; M. C. 19. 

1886. A horned quadruped; M. C. 19. 

1887. A quadruped, with a horn on the nose ; M. C. 19. 

1888. Oxen, hence <£-£>€> an ox\ mentioned among the offer- 
ings in E. I. 86, 4. 

1889. The same; H. 42, D f . 

1890. Perhaps sheep ; &vq thousand three hundred and twen- 
ty-three are mentioned among the booty, H. 42, U f. From 
eccoonf, a sheep. See No. 1035, the constellation Aries. 

1891. Total number of animals; H. 42, Pd. See No. 1083. 

1892. Perhaps cows; one hundred and fourteen are men- 
tioned among the booty, H. 42, P c ; also H. 4<2, E h. 

1893. Bull; H. 41, He. 

1894. Perhaps bird ; written among the offerings of animals, 
though nearest to the figure of a dead rabbit, E. I. 6. From 
A.TIUM, a bird. 

1895. Bat; M . C. 14. 

1896. The same; M. C. 14. This ends in M o, a bird; and 
is a word formed like K&.KK&.AJL&JV, an owl. 

1897. A bird of the sparrow kind; M. C. 9. 

1898. Another; M.C. 9. 

1899. Another; M.C. 9. 

1900. Another; M.C. 9. 

1901. Another; M.C. 9. 

1902. Another ; M, C. 9. This and the last are spelt a m o, 
and explain why the owl has the force of M. Hence ^.^OJUL, 
an eagle. 

1903. A small bird ; M. C. 9. This word seems to end with 
iLuT, a hawk ; or it is perhaps formed of $£-T% a foot, and 
^.ItOJUL, a web t meaning web -footed. 

1904. Another; M. C. 10. 

1905. Another; M. C. 10. Hence £.Tl<JDI 3 a bird. 

1906. Another; M.C. 10. 

1907. Another; M.C.W. 



174 VOCABULARY. 

1908. Another; M. C. 10. Perhaps from CApm, a small 

1909. Another; M. C. 9. [goose. 

1910. Another; M.C. 10. 

1911. Another; M. C. 9. Hence (Teaje,, a goose. 

1912. Goose; M. C. 11. 

1913. The same; M. C. 11. 

1914. The same; M.C. 9. 

1915. The same; M. C. 10. A black bird. This and the last 
two are spelt S T, the T being the feminine, to distinguish them 
from No. 1912. 

1916. The same, in the plural; S-E. 1. 

1917. The same; M.C. 11. Perhaps from -ft-Htf^ a hawk. 

1918. 1919. The same; M. C. 11. 

1920. The same; M. C. 11; also M. C. 83. 

1921. A bird of the wading tribe, perhaps the scarlet fla- 
mingo ; M . C. 10. 

1922. Another; M. C. 9. 

1923. Another; M.C. 12. 

1924. Another; M.C. 10. 

1925. Another, perhaps a pelican; M. C. 9. 

1926. Another; M. C. 9. 

1927. Another, with a red neck, perhaps a parrot. It is fol- 
lowed by the figure of a man making fun, by clapping his hands, 
M. C. 10. This may be the word Tuk, used in 1 Kings, x. 22, 
whence the Greek word Psi-tak-us, a parrot. 

1928. Another ; M . C. 10. Perhaps Ketil, a crane. 

1929. Another; M. C. 10. This animal seems named after 
its footj as the name ends in OAT. 

1930. Another; M.C. 11. 

1931. Another; M.C. 11. 

1932. A quail; M. C. 11. 

1933. A strange bird in a cage, which seems named after the 
country in which it is found; S-E. 1. See No. 922. 

1934. Camelopard; B. 46. From CIp, a spot, followed by 
the figure of the animal, meaning a spotted animal. 

1935. This and the following eight groups follow one another 
in E. I. 4, 16, and E. I. 4, 17, and they may help to explain 



VOCABULARY. 175 

one another, as one idea must run through the whole. This first 
is probably sacred duties. It contains the figure of a mummy. 

1936. Nearly the same. 

1937. Duties relating to brothers; as the word c brothers' 
is in the dual, it may perhaps mean brothers and sisters. 

1938. Duties relating to religion. See No. 163. 

1939. Duties relating to father. See No. 1818. 

1940. Duties relating to mother. See No. 1827. 

1941. Perhaps duties relating to property. It may be 
from onf^It, a heap. 

1942. Duties relating to wives. See No. 1833. As the 
word l wives' is in the plural, we observe that polygamy was al- 
lowed in Egypt. 

1943. Duties relating to children. See No. 1802. 

1944. The oval which usually contains the name of a king or 
queen. A king has usually two such names, a queen usually only 
one. In E. I, 8, and E. I. 39, the names and titles of Rameses 
II. are included in one oval. Sometimes the name of a priest is 
written within an oval, as in E. I. 27, 12, and E. I. 48, 6. Some- 
times it contains the titles of a god, as M. H. i. 13. 

1945. The same; " Thy name is lasting, like the heavens; thou 
art an image of Ra," E. I. 42, 2. It is the word pA.It^ a name, 
followed by the oval as the determinative sign. 

1946. Named ; " To be named Ptolemy the defender of Egypt," 
R. S. 6. The first two letters may perhaps be the preposition 
OTT6, and the whole then becomes f by his name/ 

1947. His name, in many places following the proper name 
of a man, instead of the more usual sitting figure ; " Hapimen, 
his name" E. L 45, 1. 

1948. The same ; " His name is Imothph, a man immortal," 
E. L 4, 13. 

1949. Thy name ; often used in E. I. 118. 

1950. The same; " Thy name is the image of Ra," E. L 118, 
4. Here the first letter is used instead of the whole word. 

1951. Named; " His name is named," B. 51. It is the word 
xepert, to name. 

1952. People ; it forms part of the word Egypt, No. 795. It 



176 VOCABULARY. 

is the word TTptOJUU, a man, and is one instance out of many of 
the M and N being used one for the other. 

1953. The same ; " The people of the great king/' B. 44, 11. 
The determinative sign seems here used without reason. 

1954. The same; it precedes the name of each of the four 
tribes described in B. 42. From p€JUL 5 an inhabitant. 

1955. The same ; " The people of the land of the Shoremao," 
B. 43, 20. The similarity in hieroglyphics and Coptic between 
p£.rt, a name, and ptUAA.1, a man, is not accidental, but it seems 
to grow out of the formation of the Eastern mind, which made 
one idea and one word embrace what with us are two ideas. To 
support this remark, it is enough to bring forward the following 
quotations from the New Testament : " And there was a crowd 
of names together, about one hundred and twenty," Acts i. 15. 
" And in the earthquake were slain the names of seven thousand 
men," Rev. xi. 13. 

1956. A proper name, Iohmes, or approved by Ioh, being of 
the same form as Thothmes ; " Son of the priest Iohmes de- 
ceased," E. L 77, 5. 

1957. Chonsomes, or approved by the god Chonso; "Her 
mother was the lady Hesmout, daughter of the priest of Mandoo, 
lord of Mendes, Chonsomes, sl man," E. I. 53, b 8. 

1958. Soutenmes, or approved by the judge ; E. I. 97, 4. See 
No. 1705. 

1959. Rarames, or approved by Aroeris ; E. L 26. 

1960. Osirtesenmes, or approved by King Osirtesen; from 
a Babylonian or Assyrian cylinder; Cullimore's Cylinders, pi. 16. 
See the syllable mes, No. 1625. 

1961. Sabacothph, or dedicated to the crocodile; the name 
of a woman, E. I. 15, 8, and E. L 20, 21. 

1962. Raothph, or dedicated to Ra ; E. I. 8. 

1963. Nefothfh, or dedicated to Nef ; B. 34, 56. 

1964. The same; B. 33, 2. 

1965. Haomra, called by Herodotus, lib. ii., Thannyras the 
son of Inarus ; B. 6. 

1966. Imothph, the name of the daughter of a priest of 
Pthah; E. I. 4, 3. 



VOCABULARY. 177 

1967. The same ; E. I. 4, 13. 

1968. Imo, perhaps an abridgement of the last ; " Imo, a man 
deceased, son of the priest of Pthah," E. I. 27, 11. 

1969. The same, represented by the first letter; " Imothph, a 
woman deceased, daughter of the priest of Pthah," E. I. 27, 13. 

1970. Mandothph, or dedicated to Mando ; E. I. 13, 9. 

1971. The same; E. I. 13, 7, and 35, a 14. In this last in- 
scription he is the great grandson of Tacelothis king of Bubastis. 

1972. Smamando; E. I. 35, a 1. This has the same meaning 
as the last name, and is used for it as if it were the same word. 

1973. Mandothph, in the feminine; E. I. 18, 7. 

1974. Mando-heso, or chief priest to the god Mandoo ; E. I. 
84, 4. Of the same form is the name Hesmout, E.I. 53, b 7. 

1975. A name formed from that of King Hophra, by' whom 
the person claims to be beloved ; on a sarcophagus in the British 
Museum. 

1976. A name formed from that of the reigning king Psam- 
metichus. The deceased was an officer in his service ; E. I. 
114, 11. 

1977. Another name formed out of that of King Psammeti- 
chus; E.I. 114, 10. 

1978. A name formed from that of King Hophra ; E. I. 
71, a 3. 

1979. Setamun, meaning the daughter of Amun; E. I. 18. 

1980. Thothset, meaning the daughter of Thoth ; E. I. 56, 
a 1. In the same form we have Hapiset, meaning the daughter 
of Apis; E.I. 86, 10. 

1981. Pet-isis, meaning in the service of the goddess Isis; 
E. I. 23, b 1. See Pet-osiris, No. 1347. 

1982. Peten-isis, meaning the same; E. I. 23, a 5. 

1983. The same; E. I. 23, a 1. This is a strong instance of 
an important character being used in the middle of a word as a 
vowel sound. 

1984. Peten-anata, a name formed from that of the goddess 
Anaita; a tablet in the British Museum. 

1985. Pet-amun; a name on tablet E. I. (second series) 57, 2. 

1986. The name of one of the prisoners of King Shishank, the 

N 



178 VOCABULARY. 

conqueror of Rehoboam, which Champollion happily read as ' the 
land of Judah Melek/ or the kingdom of Judah, 

1987. A name on a sarcophagus; E. I. (second series) 3, 1. 

1988. The same, with an unusual form of the final T ; E.I. 
(second series) 4, 1. 

1989. A name, meaning c belonging to the two benevolent 
gods/ showing that the man was in the service of King Ptolemy 
Euergetes; E.I. (second series) 27, 1. 

1990. Amuni; E. I. 17, 3. The name of a priest of the sol- 
diers, or perhaps chaplain to the army. 

1991. Hapi; E.L 18. A name like the last, formed from the 
god Apis. 

1992. Hapimen ; E. I. 44. From Apis, and JUlft, with. 

1993. Nephramen; E.I. 16. A name formed from King 
Amasis. 

1994. Bokramen, a name derived from King Bocchoris, or 
from King Sevechus, who bore the same name ; E. L (second 
series) 30, 1. 

1995. A name derived from the god Knef ; E. I. (second se- 
ries) 30, 1. See Knef, No. 28. 

1996. A name, meaning devoted to the god Imothph; E.L 
72, 10. The upper part of the group may be translated ' the son 
ofPthah.' See No. 1786. 

1997. Aroeri-ao, meaning dedicated to Aroeris, being an 
abridgement of Aroeri-othph, as Amuno is written for Amun- 
othph; Dr. Lee's Triple Mummy -case, 19, 1. 

1998. The same; Triple Mummy-case, 19, 4. The comparison 
of these two names establishes the value of the man with his hand 
to his mouth, as having the same force as the mouth itself. 

1999. Neithamun, the name of a woman; E. /. 9, 6. 

2000. Apo, the name of a priest, in whose tomb is a figure of 
the bull Apis, from whom his name is borrowed ; E. I. (second 
series) 41, 19. 

2001. Snoubof, a priest's name, derived from CITO.&, blood; 
" Honour to Neith the daughter of Osiris from the priest of 
Pthah, the priest of Osiris, the priest of Anubis, Snoubof de- 
ceased," E. I. (second series) 96, 9. 



VOCABULARY. 179 

2002. Anepahoe, a name derived from Anubis, the patron 
god of the deceased; E. I. 1,1. 

2003. The same, shortened by the sculptor; E. I. 1, 13. This 
man lived in the reign of Eameses II. ; and the same, or one of 
his name, is mentioned on the tablet E. I. 26, among the ances- 
tors of a man who lived in the next reign. 

2004. Anepek, another name derived from Anubis ; E. I. 
34, a 3. 

2005. Chemothph, or dedicated to Chem, a man's name; 
E. I. (second series) 96, 1. See Chem, No. 68. 

2006. Pthahmai, or beloved by Pthah, a man's name ; E. I. 
(second series) 90, 13. 

2007. Perhaps Necho, a man's name ; E. I. (second series) 
73,4. 

2008. Horseisi, which may be read Horus the son of Isis'; 
a man's name, the grandfather of the person buried in Dr. Lee's 
triple mummy-case, and himself buried in a mummy-case in the 
College of Surgeons, 

2009. Moutresi, or mother of her son; a woman's name, 
Triple Mummy-case, fig. 5, 5. In this figure the last character 
should be corrected to a child with his feet hanging down, as in 
the following. 

2010. Hatresi, or heart of her son; another name for the 
same woman, Triple Mummy-case, fig. 5, 21. 

2011. Hatrek ; another way of spelling the last name, Triple 
Mummy-case, fig. 4, 16. 

2012. Pet-horus, a man's name; H. 6, Up. 

2013. Pa-hanaita, perhaps devoted to the foreign goddess 
Anaita; E.I, 16. See the goddess, No. 2020; or perhaps de- 
voted to Neith, as it has been considered at No. 875. See also 
No. 1984, another name framed from that of the same goddess. 

2014. Only child ; a title given to the deceased queen, E. I. 
117, 13. See Only, No. 1290. 

2015. Unto thee, the Coptic It£J<; "Prayers unto thee the 
ruler of Amenti, Osiris immortal," E. I. (second series) 92, 7 ; 
also 92, 1. 

2016. Changed, the Coptic Tiume ; " Snoubof a man de- 

n 2 



180 VOCABULARY. 

ceased, changed" E. I. (second series) 96, 12. " Born of Neith- 
amun, a woman deceased, changed," E. I. 9, 10. This seems to 
point to the transmigration of souls. 

2017. Changed into a god; E.I. 31. 

2018. Ken, or Chitjn, the foreign Venus, the only unclothed 
goddess ; she is mentioned by Herodotus as worshipped at Mem- 
phis. On a tablet in the British Museum. 

2019. Banpo, or Bemphan; a foreign god, on the same tablet. 
He is mentioned in Acts vii. 43, in a passage quoted from the 
prophet Amos, where in the Hebrew the name of the goddess 
Chiun is used. 

2020. Anaita, the Persian goddess Anaitis, mentioned by 
Strabo. She is a goddess of vengeance, and strikes at her wor- 
shippers with club or sword. On the same tablet. 

2021. Sothis, the dog-star; " On the first of Thoth, the day 
of the brilliant dog-star," E. I. (second series) 57, 10, an in- 
scription of the reign of Barneses III. This however must by 
no means be quoted to prove that in that reign the dog-star rose 
on that day : it merely means that the day was dedicated to that 
star, which rose at the beginning of each Sothic period on that 
day. The same had been said in the reign of Barneses II. See 
No. 1046. 

2022. Serapis, or Osiris-Apis, spelt after the Greek name, 
with a final s, like Nos. 216 and 217; E. I. (second series) 96, 4. 

2023. Oben-ra, spelt like the kings' names, with the syllable 
Ba placed first; E. I. (second series) 92, 1. See No. 24. 

2024. Perhaps immortal, from ZJT*X.ort ; " The king Osir- 
tesen, beloved by Mandoo lord of Hermonthis, immortal," B. 29. 
But the characters are not always placed in the same order. 

2025. Perhaps Egypt, or the city of Chem ; H. 87, b 10. See 
Chem, No. 66, and Egypt, No. 787. 

2026. Amenti, the place of the dead ; E. I. (second series) 
90 b. See No. 246. 

2027. Amun; see No. 818, No. 239, and No. 498 for the os- 
trich feather alone being Amun; see No. 1711 for the letter A; 
" The lord of Ethiopia, god, lord of heaven, Amun, illustrious in 
the temple of Ba," E. I, 120. 



VOCABULARY. 181 

2028. Perhaps dead, in the plural; E. I. (second series) 92, 11. 
From &OTG, an abomination, or fiurre, to destroy. See No. 

,1484, where the same word means criminals; and No. 1655, 
where the fish is part of the word deceased. 

2029. The same, having the mummy as a determinative sign, 
and the prefix <LC 5 for the past tense; E. I. (second series) 65, 16. 

2030. Chief, being the word melek, without the final K; 
" Honour to the deified chief of the soldiers," E. I. (second se- 
ries) 23, b 1. See No. 1328. 

2031. Sokar-Osiris; H. 66, If. See No. 207. Here, of the 
two sitting figures, the first is the word Osiris, and the second is 
the determinative sign. See No. 1192, No. 1771, and No. 1933, 
where the determinative sign seems to be used equally unneces- 
sarily. 

2032. Priests, or libation-men ; E. I. (second series) 36, 7. 
Here again the determinative sign seems very little wanted. 

2033. Chief of the priests; E.L (second series) 79,5. In 
the Rosetta Stone we are told that the priests are to wear crowns, 
where this character, of a man placing a crown on his head, means 
' wear crowns/ See also No. 624, where the same character forms 
part of the word ' kingdom/ 

2034. A singer, as we may judge from the figure; see No. 
1491. From XCO, to sing, and £,pUJ, the voice. Triple Mummy - 
case, fig. 19, and E. I. (second series) 41, 21. We may remark, 
as showing how inexact was this mode of writing, and how ne- 
cessary was the determinative sign, that XU0 £>pC0j to sing with 
the voice, and No. 1600, XOp 5 powerful, are spelt with the same 
letters. 

2035. A hired singer, from fieKG, wages; E.I. 57, 37. 



183 



THE ALPHABET. 



In the hieroglyphical words the characters are used far more 
often as syllables than as letters ; hence it is to the names of the 
Greek kings and Roman emperors that we must chiefly look when 
we would form an alphabet. When we have learned the alpha- 
betic force of a character from these modern names, we are able 
to make use of it in reading the more ancient words. In plates 
xxxv. and xxxvi. the letters are classed under the small number 
of twelve heads. It would be easy to divide them more minutely, 
but hardly with safety, because one letter is often used in care- 
lessness for another, by a people who had not themselves the idea 
of an alphabet. 

L and H are not distinguished in character, and they were pro- 
bably not distinguishable to an Egyptian ear. M and N are often 
confounded together, as Antoninus is sometimes written with an 
M, and Cambyses with an N. The H and TH are naturally con- 
founded; as also are sometimes the TH and CH. This seems to 
have arisen from the use of the guttural. The god Chem in one 
part of Egypt was Athom in another. The Roman V was scarcely 
known to the Egyptian ear ; and hence Vespasian is spelt Ispasian. 
The true D was unknown, and hence Darius was spelt NTariosh. 

From these characters the Hebrew and Greek alphabets seem 
to be derived. There are so many characters, as we have seen in 
page 16, which are, in each alphabet, certainly the same with the 
hieroglyphics that we may safely suppose the rest are. 

The numbers refer to plates xxxv., xxxvi. The force of each 
character is shown in the words given below as examples of its 
use ; and it will be seen that they are used with a good deal of 
irregularity. Those used in the names of the Greek and Roman 
kings are the best established ; those used in the Coptic words 
are less certainly known. 



184 THE ALPHABET. 

E. A. 

1. ^4munothph, K. 79; ^41exandros, K. 217; ^rsinoe, K. 227; 
Commodus, K. 312 ; Nerone, K. 277; ^4utocrator, K. 284. 

2. Cleopatra, K. 240; ^utocrator, K. 261; Nerone, K. 277; 
Caisaros, K. 262. The hawk is <L&OJUl 5 or, when pronounced 
carelessly, A H o, and hence its force as a vowel . 

3. ^drianus, K. 290 ; Antoninus, K. 302; Mai, No. 1311. 

4. Nectanebo, K. 209. 

5. Chofo, K. 27. Here it is used for o 4 , but it is no doubt 
the same vowel as the last two. 

6. ^4utocrator, K. 297; Antoninus, K. 298 ; ^drianus, K. 294. 

7. Gnosis, K. 45 ; v4masis, K. 180. From IO£„ ^/ie moo^. 

8. ^myrtseus, K. 197. This figure has the moon on its head, 
and is an ornamental form of the last. 

9. ^utocrator, K. 291; Nerone, K. 277; Hadarianus, K. 292. 

10. Takelothe, K. 150; Ra, No. 2; Pa, No. 1351; Ma, No. 
1301. This is the original of the Greek I, and Hebrew \ 

11. Ra, No. 8. 

12. Amenti, No. 239. 

13. Hait, No. 1833. 

14. Hait, No. 1834. This is the original of the Greek E. 

15. ^4pis, No. 209. 

16. ^4pis-Osiris, No. 216. 

17. ^4pis, No. 214. 

18. Jmothph, No. 221, perhaps pronounced Amothph, as the 
dog or jackal is Anubis. 

19* ^4munepthah, in the original of K. 94, before this dog was 
cut out to make way for the figure of Osiris, o 14 . 
20. ^mun, No. 2027. 

E, Ei, I. 

1. Ptolemaios, .ST. 241; Caisaros, K. 259; iinothph, No. 220. 

2. Jmothph, No. 1966. 

3. Arsinoe, K. 227; Antoninos, K. 298; Nebact, No. 1441. 
It is only in the name of the god Osiris that this character is R 
or I R I, being used in place of the mouth, R 4 . 



THE ALPHABET. 185 

4. Ei, No. 492. It is the ground-plan of a house, and the 
original of the Hebrew H and H } and the Greek H. 

5. ^choris, K. 205 ; Tirak, K. 163 ; #hoou, No. 1005 ; £oou, 
No. 1443. 

6. /sis, No. 79. 

O, U. 

1. Ptolemaios, K. 218; Cleopatra, iT. 230; Awtokrator, K, 
282. 

2. Nepherot, K. 203; Owot, No. 1083. This is the original 
of the Coptic T, the Greek and the Roman Y and Y. 

3. Autocrator, K. 309 ; Awtocrator, K. 293 ; Domitianus, K. 
285; Fespasianus, K. 280. 

4. Anepo, No. 136; Chemo, 778; Mando, No. 187. 

5. Used for A 10 , compare No. 1982 and No. 1983; and for 
O 4 , compare lines 7 and 10 in E. I. 83. 

6. Amunothph, K. 47; Mo, No. 1812; Tho, No. 750. 

7. Osiris, No. 110; ^4mun-B,a, No. 17. 

8. Mo, No. 1640. 

9. Mo, No. 1641. 

10. Mo, No. 1644. 

11. Hapimo, No. 183; Anepo, No. 140. 

12. Domitianus, K, 283; Antoninus, K. 302; Tho, No. 752. 

13. Onk, No. 1407. 

14. Oimenepthah, K. 94. This is a figure of Osiris. 



B, F, V. 

1. jBerenice, K. 247; Tioerius, K. 265; Sadacothph, K. 158; 
Canoosh, K. 185. 

2. Faphra, K. 167. 

3. Berenice, K. 219; Tioerius, K. 263 and 271. 

4. Seoastos, K. 303. 

5. Va^ra, K. 165, 167; Hqp/jra, K. 174; Nepfaa, K. 179 
and 191. 

6. Sevek, K. 161; Ne/-Chofo, iT. 28. But it is an s in Ves- 
pasianus, ^. 278. 



186 THE ALPHABET. 

7. Ne^/terites, K. 203; Cho/o, K. 26; Nectaneb/o, K. 210. 
This is the original of the Coptic CJ, the Hebrew *), and the Ro- 
man F. 

8. Se^astos, M. H. ii. 4; i?ok, No. 667; Soufou, No. 1036. 

9. Noue6, No. 302, No. 305. 

10. La^aris, K. 7; Scemiopftra, K. 6; Chefaa, K. 22; Se- 
6akra, JT. 50 ; Yaphra, K. 165, No. 1392 ; Noue&, No. 298 com- 
pared with No. 300; Mentis, No. 858; S6o, No. 1485, No. 
342; Bom, No. 1029. 

11. Memphis, No. 861; Ouo£sh, No. 1713. 

12. S6o, No. 340; Bait, No. 954. 



K, Ch, G. 

1. Cleopatra, K. 230 ; Caisaros, K. 257. 

2. Caisaros, K. 305; Autocrator, K. 291. This is the Coptic 
letter X. 

3. Autocrator, Caisaros, K. 289. 

4. Commodus, JT. 310; Ai^, No. 1559. 

5. Chem, No. 62, No. 64; iTahi, No. 702. The letter is an 
abbreviation of the last, and is the original of the Hebrew 5, 

6. Caisaros, K. 268. 

7. Caisaros, K. 282; Caisar, K. 286; Autocrator, K. 284. 
This is the original of the Hebrew X 

8. iTahi, No. 739. This is the original of the Greek 0, having 
a guttural sound. 

9. Chofo, K. 26; Xerxes, K. 194; C/*or, No. 1588; CAeraeit, 
No. 1597. 

10. CAemi, No. 773. This is the original of the Greek letter X. 

11. Zame, No. 1714; Chemi, No. 791. 

12. Chov, No. 1600; Kek, No. 1734. This is the original of 
the Coptic ^. 

13. CAeraeit, No. 1593. 

14. Claudius, Salt, pi. 2; K. 271. 



THE ALPHABET. 187 

M. 

1. Ptolemaios, K. 226 ; Germanicus, K. 275, 283; Domitia- 
nus, K. 285. This is the original of the Hebrew D. 

2. Mou, No. 1640. 

3. Mom, No. 1641. 

4. Domitianus, K. 283 ; Antoninus, iT. 302. 

5. Amunmai, K. 102; Amunothph, K. 49; M andothph, K. 
193. 

6. Memphis, No. 856, No. 861, where the letter N is inclosed 
within this letter. 

7. Hayeses, K. 102 ; Mes, No. 1808. 

8. Commodus, K. 310. This is the original of the Greek M. 

9. Amun, No. 12. 

10. Chew, No. 64; Mou, No. 1645. From JULG&e, a feather. 

11. Chemo, No. 787; Maut, No. 1826. This letter is often the 
syllable MO. 

12. Commodus, K. 312 ; Amunmai, No. 1514. 

13. ilfei, No. 1498. From GJUie, a plough or hoe. 

14. Amenti, No. 246 ; ikfesora, No. 1038. 

15. Chemo, No. 786; Moout, No. 1655. 

16. Germanicus, K. 268. 

N, 

1. Alexawdros, K. 217; Berenice, K. 219. 

2. Amibis, No. 135. This is in a more rapid way of writing 
the same as the last : it is the original of the Hebrew 2. 

3. Amurara, No. 19. This is the same as the last. 

4. Arctoramis, K. 300 ; Domitiamis, K. 283. 

5. iVtariosh, for Darius, iT. 187. 

6. Vespasiamis, K. 278 ; Adriamis Antowimis, K. 294. This 
may be the original of the Greek N. 

7. Trajamis, Young^s Essay, p. 123. 

8. iVephra, K. 179, 191; iVitocris, K. 61; Neph, No. 27. 

9. Nectawebo, K. 209. This character is the Sphinx. 

10. Nectawebo, K. 210. This and the last are rather the syl- 
lable NEB, and the name may be written Nectanebfo. 



188 THE ALPHABET. 

11. iVbute,No.271; iVbueb, No. 298, No. 300. This is rather 
the syllable NOU. 

12. Antoninus, K. 294. 

13. Arctoninus, K. 296. 

14. Arcepo, No. 137; E^, No. 1294. These last three have 
rather a syllabic force, as AN. 



P, Ph. 

1. PMlippus, K. 213; Ptolemaeus, K. 218; Cleopatra, K. 256; 
Pthah, No. 195 ; Apis, No. 214. 

2. Vespasianus, K. 279 ; Pharaoh, No. 530 ; PAe, c the hea- 
vens/ of which this letter is the representative. It is the original 
of the Greek IT, and of the Hebrew 2 and EJ. 

3. Pa, No. 1356; Pet-Osiris, No. 1347. It is the original of 
the Greek <J>. 

4. Pa, No. 1355. 

5. Che^ra, K. 12. These three characters are from <LTie, a 

6. Anu&s, No. 139. [head. 

7. Pasht, No. 100. 

L, R. 

1. Pto/emseus, K. 218; Arsinoe, K. 227; CZeopatra, K. 230; 
Caisaros, K. 259; Tiberius, K. 265. 

2. Nitocris, K. 61. 

3. Adrianus, K. 294; Autocrator, K. 297; Autocrator Tra- 
janus, K. 289. This is perhaps an abridgement of the last, and 
is the original of the Greek A, the Roman L, and the Hebrew "1. 

4. Autocrator Caisaros, K. 279; Cleopatras, K. 256; AZex- 
andros, K. 248. From po, a mouth. In the word Osiris the 
sculptors use an eye, instead of a mouth, for the letter R. 

5. Pa, No. 2. It is more often the syllable RA, as in Osiris, 
No. 106; Phamoh, No. 630; Zzrah, No. 637. 

6. AureZius, K. 301. 

7. Aroeri-ao, No. 1997, compared with No. 1998. This figure 
of a man, with the hand to his mouth, must not be mistaken for 
the child in the same attitude, S 10 . 



THE ALPHABET. 189 

S, Sh. 

1. Caisaros, K. 279; Sebastus, K. 285, 303. 

2. Sebastus, K. 303 ; Sebastus, K. 298. From CIOV, a star. 

3. Caisaros, M. H. ii. 4. 

4. Caisaros, K. 305. 

5. Caisaros, K. 264, 266; Philippic, K. 212; Osorkon, iT. 
146. 

6. Caisaros, iT. 259, 284; Ptolemaios, K. 218; Tiberius, 
K. 263; Eusebes, iT. 294. 

7. Vespasianus, iT. 278; &outen, No. 648. From (To, a plant. 

8. Zerah, No. 637. From (Tectje, « goose. 

9. Eusebes, Z". 294; Caisaros Titus, iT. 293. This is the Coptic 
letter <T. 

10. Psammuthes, K. 207. These last three characters are alike 
used for the word ' child/ 

11. Caisaros Caesar, Young's Essay, 122. 

12. Mautmes, K. 75, used for s 1 and s 8 in No. 1915. From 
XOI, a ship. 

13. Scemiophra, K. 42; Smou, No. 1649; -Sftarbot, No. 482; 
Sos7/em, No. 1033 ; S/jotene, No. 1174; Enesai, No. 1197; Asm, 
No. 949; Shie, No. 1882; Psis, No. 1072. From OC<£<L, a sickle. 
This character must not be mistaken for the same form reversed, 
which is the hieratic form of the swallow, or letter K 12 . 

14. Sevechus, K. 161; Xerxes, K. 194; Arta.rer.27es, K. 195. 
From Rife, a plant. This is the original of the Hebrew IP. 

15. Domitianus Germanicus, K. 283; Antoninus, K. 296. 

16. Isis, No. 76 ; Osiris, No. 101. In each the s has the force 
of I S I. 

17. Son, No. 1837; Esne, No. 890. 

18. San, No. 877; Isis, No. 88. The character may possibly 
be CUHT6, an altar. 

19. Sle, No. 1858; Shoi, No. 1140. 

20. S/tobt, No. 1017; Sho, No. 1078. From (To, a plant. 
This is the original of the Hebrew t and the Greek f. 



190 THE ALPHABET. 

T, Th, and in Greek names D. 

1. Trajanus, K. 287; Domitianus, K. 285; Autocrator, K. 
261, 299; Tiberius, K. 270. From TOT, a hand. It is the 
original of the Hebrew ID, which takes its name Teth from the 
Coptic word. In Chvo, No. 1589 and No. 1596, this letter is the 
guttural. 

2. Ptolemaios, K. 218; Autocrator, K. 277; Cleopafras, K. 
256; P/hah, No. 195. As the Egyptians used a guttural sound, 
this th sometimes became ch or K, as in Nitocris, K. 61; 
CAampsi, No. 1861 ; Chem, No. 65, No. 66 ; as also eeO)cy, 
Ethiopia, became Cush ; ItOE, became the month Mechir ; "jtDl, 
the month Pachon. 

3. Tiberius, K. 263 ; Adrianus, K. 290. This is the original 
of the Hebrew J"l. 

4. Domirianus, K. 283; Tei, No. 385. From T£.Y, a hill. 
This is the original of the Greek A. 

5. Tei, No. 397; Petfsis, No. 1981. 

6. Antoninus, K. 300; Trajanus, Salt, pi. 2, 14; Tho, No. 
705, No. 738; Tfternesi, No, 1225; MenAophra, K. 65; Mes- 
^ophra, K. 35; i?orus, No. 118. 

7. Domitianus, K. 283 ; Antoninus, K. 296 ; Tho, No. 580. 

8. Titos, K. 281; Domitianus, K. 285. FromTK&, a finger. 
This letter is the guttural in Chemi, No. 793. 

9. Athor, No. 176; Typhon, No. 265 ; Toh, a rush, No. 335. 

10. Amenti, No. 240; TAoth, No. 165, No. 168, where the 
bird is the less important part of the character. 

11. Amenti, No. 242. 

12. Ntoius, K. 187, 189; Ebo*,No.971. Perhaps from &e, 
to walk. 

13. Tokari, No. 912. 



H, Th. 

1. Ptha^,No.l95; A^e,No.l271; #fo,No.l849; Hecate, 
No. 96. 

2. iZbphra, if. 175. 






THE ALPHABET. 191 

3. He, or The, No. 1284. This is the original of the Coptic £,. 

4. 7%oui, No. 1183. 

5. H&yis, No. 212. 

6. Hai, No. 1101, No. 1102. 

7. Heten, No. 594. 

8. Heneh, No. 1379. 

9. JTeneh, No. 1381. 



ERRATA IN THE PLATES. 

No. 100. The first character is more correctly drawn in the Alphabet as P 7 . 

No. 291. Insert a semicircular T at the end of the word and before the determinative 

No. 115/ and 1158. In the dog should have no head. [sign. 

No. 1864. For the first mouth, R, read a semicircle, T. 

No. 2009. The sitting child should have his feet hanging down, as in No. 2010. 

In the Text. 

Page 108, line 15, read Memnonium. 
Page 110, line 11, read Fabricii. 



LONDON 
PRINTED BY ARTHUR TAYLOR 

COLEMAN STREET. 



I 

/ // 21 31 /<) J-/ 



9 /* 22 n ^2 s$ 

' * ZB SJ ?7fl ?4 \s£ 

$ /3 n V:. I ( 2 S3 

r V is «*■ fi LI 






'4~ ^ ^ 44 % 



*} V ^ t5 lb 



S J* 2S 3f 4$ Sf 

*y> ^ r*vi< M ~* jg ^s 

'6 2d 36 jt $6 

; t ! ? 3 / «• *" 

^ ft g 'rr s W 

# /* Pd> W 48 & 

? <p *? «3y -^ 4? 

i* 2 « et t fi 

/(? 2<? 30 ^ £0 6<? 

II 1 • * 



II 

6/ y Si 9' mi '" 

*£ rl lit *fj k — 
rz- z& "- ,y ^ ._-*. 

^2 7-2 S2 9 2 /02 /7 * 

<fj ^ 83 ^ /<w //J 

1 I ;w -f ?? ^ 

64 7A »f & ** ' "4 

V a ;ji ^ ft u 



6S~ u^* ?S * s 9* 



JOS' /a? 



I 'p! ft ^ ?t y 

<f* 7<* #6 ?»' ^ '" 

is ;k if; jfi r°i / 

& ' \ H "i © :i/ 

6<9 ' y& M 9* /Ck9 m 



7" 





# 

p 


/SAAA 


/op 


"9 

i 


.** 


90 


/<» 


//o 


no 


vr ft 


& 


• n 


it 


m 



/$/ 




/j/ 


A£/ 






I # 




/22 




/«?* 


^ 




i # 


2 




/23 


$ 




/<3 



/5/ 'fr >? f 

/« /<« <7« 



/WW 

/WW 



/# /£3 /fj 

if <s£ ;n ^ E 

/*$ sty '44 ^ ^ • W 

m hi u tf I? az 

w /.?«* /*$■ /at /<$fr ^ 

x ^ t. # / 

A?<< AftS /^ /$<$ /££ 7* 

ny m ty) '*/ J6f 'ft 

|' i I? £ £ sf 

/.2£ /.?* /A& > /S<9 /6& W 

* ♦ >/ a fTT ■ • • s / //a **3 

zip >dp >49 ; s? ^9 79 

fell ^ In £ **^ '^ 

/3<? /^0 J SO /60 /fO /(PC 



IV 

#/ hji *v 2/1 21/ 13/ 

' m j»> § i ft 4 f 

'£5 2<?2 J/* 222 232 

v *■> j> ■ tf= m^ 1 

'*J y^j 2^ iA? 2 ^ 233 

H I m r* ^ ^ 

►^ <# 2^4 2/4 22* 2.34 

A&f /£T 2<7J £/.^ V25- j^ 5 f 



196 ^6 106 1/6 2.16 r*6 

'# '?/ 20? S,f 22? 13? 

4M t iff /KSri 4* ri 

W& '<?$ M4 2/<P 2 5*> $3(9 

^ I k!L fi ^ X 

'*? 20^ 2/^ «.^p ? 3 p 

&» M sfz Tf 1» ri 

"9# ?<*> HO -220 236 /£;> 

1=? « * ■ fcM »i #^ 



V 



%<,t 



lifS 



■J? I 

4 



2SJ 



252 



2J3 



W 2f/ 2<Pr 2p/ 

r ;r ;j 



'it 



I 1 f 



262 



2*3 



iWJ 



tytf 



w rf rrr ,?r * 



,m ^F r* 



24| 2<U 2*4 J?^ 

w 2JJ * w ^ iw 1^ 

tf -4! F. II ~r rrr 



it 4$ a«Tif 266- 2/6 28C 

U< £=: ii III 



* 



fc^ « fff ^ Sti 



9tf 



3s: 



:6[ 



m m 



*77 



& & fi rr r n ;*? 

2^P 2<f<9 260 %p %$$ 2 <?<9 

3- $ r fj" 555 ir 



H9 2 ^ **y 5 # **? 2f? 

$ 21 if SF its r» 



2^ 2<50 



*;-0 



2<?0 



2^0 



300 



* • ^^ il- ^ .-J. I* 






VI 

30/ $// M' Ml ty 3St 

:tr iff $2 m n f) 

SO 2 3/2 222 33Z 3^2 3 Si. 

m f m ^ «i « 

J03 3/5 325 33£ J^3 353 

m £ M lie n st 



A/VW\ 
» # • 



J04 3/« 3^ 33* 344 3 ^4 

KT If 4- E M ^ 

W 5/^ 3W J^5 ^^ W 

|||7 }ft W me 11 |f 

M6 3/6 326 336 31,6 3£6 

irt m » s if! rt 

307 */? #7 55; 3^ ^/ 

ff flf if BR sB =ii 

3ft* 3/0 324 339 34# 3S& 

if Sfjl ff £31 ft gf 

30f 3/p 32f 33f 340 3fy 

fe tf 4« ~T1 ~i! E3 

3/0 J2<7 330 340 3.50 3d"o 



VJI 

¥* H ¥a t^ -s 

3 ^ V 2 m „ £p* 4^5 ^/£ 



*i .i ^ 



3*3 3/* ^ ,-i. ^ j 0S ^ 



1 * ^ ? jfej K^ — * ^' 

^ w m S9if w j ffJl 

K* 1 ■ £ 1 - ** 

"» 5 *> ** ^ ^ ^ 

r f 4+ M a *. 

^ W m 306 406 /</<? 

~m*fa I :i ^ f 

S6 7 *K 3*/ am /,vf 4/? 

U"\ *& A£f ^ ^ ,r 

^ 3 /f *»• «w ^o» ^/,y 

jp dn AZ.4 M t^ 



rr* 



3i5 ? V? #w ,&p /,og 4'0 

M °x U s? ^ r;* 

■^ g &HP 3PP ^^ ^//? <£?* 



45/ A SI 4$r 4& 46/ 4}' 

in- Ml »" li **•' L 

*22 *3£ ■***Lfc - ^ *** ^ 

m m s — 






Aviyv 



ir 

AW 

i a • 

493 jtt 4f$ 4*2 46$ 4) '$ 

*2* #0 ^ ^ ^^ ^ 

x !M i i'lJ 

4** ^<f #? M* /^ #f 



426 48$ 4IfG 456 466 476 

- n f r p i 

^/ 4*f 44? 4*7 *?*/ m 

aflT nfl i'.T tfo |f «■»• 

^ <£*P ^<7 ^<* ^ #j? 

W 489 449 45? 469 479 

1 'si «f H t 

4?? f * ^ -^ ** W ■*** 



■ 

// 4* 



IX 



J/Q/ 501 



S1J 



Sit 



$81 



? bl u ni or s* 



482 491 002 Sll 522 

> ,n j; nk iir 



^ 



^SvN, 



n« 



4$3 4£3 cf05 #£ 



1 1 if 



nnn 

I 1 I 






! ifik 






4» 



Mrfi 4n 



.#« W 



^ 



in 
1 1 1 



sot, sn, 



5Vt Sty 



m 



¥$ 49$ SOS SIS 



SIS 



n 



496 496 



if, 






TO ck 

n I 



m 



] t^ 



4$? 



8 



497 



urn* 



#?7 .57/ 



£?<* 



427 



SBf 

m 

Sd6 



^7 



no. 






^ 



49$ S()8 



S/8 



S28 S38 



M. 

tn r 



Ml 

nnn 



r m 



E* in lr 



of 



M 

n <* 



W9 499 



S09 



S/p S29 



S39 



m 
9 I 9 



•*-«. 



H 






1T1Q nS W 



-*00 



#w 









30 



i ^ a a 



n- 






X 



w 



$$/ 



r\ 



LI 

m Q 



$6/ 



Ft 






5/f l l 



$4$ 



H 



m 









5lf5 



~D 



L£1 

III 

MS 

IM 



£52 






■ ■ * 



^ 



~2 



5» 






w 




556 


- 


v 


■iii 


^/ 


SS? 


PF 


f^Xru 


W 


£& 


ie 


1 £& 

/vvw\ 
5 • * • 


«P 


IT 


.520 
A 1 

nl 

1 » 1 


5#? 


5WP 




tfr 


1 /ww 



#tf 



«*// SM && 

if! ~ /s3 

c)?J2 <5&2 #22 

If- /rrT fffi 

«? <S53 598 

3» #ty 50£ 

^f 585 595 

z\7 s^ r=% 

^ItL ^<=> /vwvT 

•Tff 'W ■«# 






itf? 



£<5£ 



1 1 1 



tf5P 



!/ww\ 



$/# 



//^ 



v: & (z£ 

$77 ^7 597 

578 5SS $$8 

579 <^p «? 

,53*? Jp0 6W 

4- ri /sr 



XI 

601 6TJ 62/ 63/ 641 6S/ 

& \i & u n ■ ** 

602 612 62% 682 61,% 6$% 

603 6/$ 623 6BB Gtf 6» 
^ -<f# £2* &( ^ «5f 

¥ :fr Wit £ -4 # 

tf#f tfTF <?«- <$&r 6fy6 ess 

606 6/6 6%6 636 ty> 6*6 

V 2 !.({ M ff « 

(fO/ #// 62/ 68/ 6lfJ 65? 

v it m -V frf ■» 

dtf? 5/5 £28 £39 <%£ tfW 

^ XK i#P *• irf ^ 

^ GO kT*lL # * >*** ^^ 

#QP 67p 62P $2P d#p <£fp 

6/0 620 630 6/fO SSO 660 

w w 7 /: M H 



66/ 671 

/W*vs TL 

£ jfc AAAAA 






¥ 



/W #?/ 7^ /" 

&^ s # 

<r<M <#£ 70% in 

'W -f->_* lPu 



xir 



Af 1 






I 



664 ^ 671, 

666 6J6 

JS. it 

667 W7 

see ni i 

--? mi 



<W «2* 7<?4 7'4 

<£&? 695 70S 7/6 

7n fart" 8$ ©i 

tftftf d5W 7W 7/6 



is 



in e *t *"'% g.ffl 

A; W ^ 7/7 

<5#? «*? 7*M T 7 * 

\F iflu ili HL 

6$& 699 J09 JIO 

Tk iff si 

ego 700 J® 7%° 

If w 15 S 



A*SA 
/WW. 



XIII 

in ?s; 


7<?' 7*7 7tf/ 7// 

© 'ii * If o> * 


722 752 


742 7*2 7<K2 fys 



* Ft l to jgf i' 

7^ 7^S 7*5 7#? 7<tf ' 773 

fci jrry* ^ -^- in =14. 

72* m 1% 7*4 y& yp, 

©~ »^ (8® 3IT Ui j=i 

72.T ^ 7^- pv yes 77$ 

s? s 8n ii » ,r,f 

7*5 755 wb 7«f5 766 776 

727 W~^ W 7*7 7*7 777 

^PT "Add 33E^ 

&& M ^ 5?.W *g SfflAt 

72« 75« 7** /» 7«? 77S 

55 it £3 4H fc» stf+ 

729 7?P WP 75 7<s? 77P 

^ © X ttt ^ -aft 

750 7W ?30 ?tfo 770^^ 7*0 

fi 00 k s g A 



T&t 7pt SOI 811 821 m 

i f ~M- SIB 51 5! ^ 

7<92 ?#2 802 0/2 S3 2 #32 

783 7&? SOS SIS 82$ 88$ 

it & vif srf 2ft ^/ 

«^.i JW ** #/£ **' *** 

^ CDOC1 O- niO **" ^T 

■ ■ t 

7»5'"' 796 906 8/6 82.6 SSS - 

«w ss, a «' * f- 

787 701 so? j 817 % 827 88} 



781 



yss 798 808 m an #38 

«Bnet9t iff oJ S [p 

7^0 &X> 0/0 020 *#> <W 

& oT g <*f 5KI ^ 



XV 

ty 851 SSI ay/ 881 891 



*"•_!♦>» 



/VWA 



^-^^a 

o^*^* 



¥ M sffl S 

*** 8S2 £<52 ^ 882 

4 + Sit! 2W £ 

*/yS «M a» *;.? 853-j. «$*. 

J^£ <=> -m. ~^a y ^£ 

^ O- OU ^r ^ 4s 

^/4 #*4 asf *# sty m 

845 &W 86? 87? m *&f «V 

fiiT he a: ii a 



«*£ &fc? Stf6 8]6 88 6 8Q6 

^rp >* v> a n* -fP^E mi in 

<#/ 85/ &Q &JJ 887_ sp; 

* I si Si % M 



0# 858 &G8 8f$ 898 898 

flp £4 -o o* sOH *M 

/iHfr oAT ^ §§ 11 |'| 

&ft> Sft?^ s;o <9<90 <9p<? #30 



XVI 

90/ 9U^^ M 981 J> m W 95! 



*Q va* Ml*^ 9 S^ 






13 f 5 <* u s«r ;u 

90 ftW^ 92$ 9SS % 943 PS$ 

W ^ S /L W *** *** ^ 



til 




ft is f[' «&J ill 

UJ| »^ /VVAA^ ~S£1 III 



*r 






. 0/0 0& 9S0 940 fffiO 1 - 960^ 

n m *±i m £> ran 






XVII 

96/ 9V P& 99' 1001 ion 



fXX ^^ T* m* ^S^ OCT 

#K #2 002 £52 W£ //?/£ 

l^^-v <^\ s^r^ x^-s 0CT//T* 

^ ISS s ffi ^ ^c 

£tf# p/s 098 «» '** w 

964 974 9dI t 994 /<w /0, 4 

Y^ sfr c^6 xt;? O <£3§* 

*fi, X <c=> on I n -_* 

^ p# 98$ Q9$ roos n/d 

U 



"? . a 






CUf • ** 



p£6 P7& #?<5 Q96 t006 ro/6 

_ /% cs±3 n~ CI Jf 

^ 7^ ^^ 5=^ <=> ?* 

I • • 

<*? 07 W OS! ox? '<»7 «. 



!»* m ~& ^ ioGI $ 

#5» .$»/<? p*<9 SP* '006 1018 

9/*s ^ gg£ SSLf t© LI 

O* LL3T «aa» ^^T i I "'* 



/WVW. 



$59 PfP #&> W t<%>9 /0 'P 

f ? & ffl »= f© y 

P/0 4W #W /<?00 /0/<? «ri|| 

Yrr* ^1 oui x 

uJjJI ^ inn tt 



i!ki m 



XVIII 

It U ^ '»>'> 



mi /os/ m wif/ w/ /06i /o;/ 



/022 W2* /w *°& /m ^s>. *?* 

$ ^xm g B I ^ 

/oitf ^ W3 <.q 'W /0S 3 ^ ^gg *^ nn 

^ 4i ^ n ^ 

4 * k 



1 ■ • 



^ *fl *V if $ 



ha 
in 



** 

1 f 1 

ms /OSS' /04s toss /oes v/s 

/BS6 '036 101,6 «>S6 '066 Wf6 

hF ^4 ;Ak w ■■',' rot 

/<?2/ /^7 *># ^7 /<!? <7 / W r 

/02s /as* *# 'OSS '068 /<?/# 

f *J «*> *lfl XI f 

/030 /0*9 W /|(W /<? /' V " W 

V"! wtz- ■-/ 3: nnnn 2 9 



m 



XIX 

/OS! Wpi 7707 777/ 7727 1/87 

Ml — • r> . ■ « -• U, 

/0<P£ 7002 /M2 77/2 7/22 7732 

' '' £ <k kG & - 9 - ^ 



7083 /OPS "03 777$ 772$ 7783 



K 



T <n fo £ i 






I 

^ /^ /AOf ///^ //££ //^ 

i «-^a rsl rr ^ ^L 



w 


109$ 


7/0$ 


///$ 


7/2S 


77SS 


11 


? 


a 


TT 


~ o 




ro86 
111 


'096 


7/06 

Info 


7776 


7/2,6 
■ i i 


7736 

9 


/0$? 


m 


no? 

'CI A 

• • • 

• • • 


//// 


7/2/ 


//&? 


— 


1 1 1 


3? 


i i i 


if 


ma 


7098 


7708 


7778 


//28 


/738 


— • 


9 


S? 


7^ 


^O 


<ul> 


/OSQ 


/OOP 


//op 


/77P 


//29 


7/S9 


**r 


ro 


flfr 


^o 


J/VW\ 




wpo 


//oo 


7770 


//20 


7/30 


7/lfO 



*i St - q -*■* *<w/i. 



XX 

iHt f/s/ r/Gi JJ7I "HI "91 



hfl S S> 1I¥1 



//*s //«. //« //r^ //#a "^ 

^ v DU „ err a,-—- 

J£ ^l CD ^ L£ *m 

' IM III 

//** /W 7/ ^ #/* "** 'W 

ail u« a?™ d wo >s 

i i i 

//44 nsif "V "74 v** 'W 



9 V 



;<- & t 



\?/Jf nss I,6S 7/ 7 s //ss //gs 

Imt &\ v_/ t'T 3= 5 

/?*• >» "** f W /7 * 6 W 

ai *^ x y W. 



// "* 



W7 "§7 //6 7 "77 "*} "97 



A±±W 



//££ /«» ^8 «7» "00 '<0* 

//^ "*? "eg mo "89 "99 



//#? //-w ///» «» <W> /5W 



SB ill tff* 



XXI 

not nil mi mi 1*1,1 rui 



mim & i 



AAAAAA 



'2°t nn /222 ms tatz nss, 



$tsj\m ~f -A* ^i 



/naaaa 

O 

* • • I » f 



/zos im tm ms 1243 hiss 






AAAA^v — «>- ^^ 

15 "jf #* 22* rr? 

/*ty /2# /22f / ? S0 /? ^ /a ^ 

9 M ~\ ~<5>* /SAAAAv 

^vsaaa, 

Aaaw 

2 — * • • 

ms iw ms nss M,? nss 



*y sf- fa-^ 



*- '/ft I 5 X2S, ^w 



/V\AAAA 



I I I 

/20f /*/* '2$<S 12S6 m$ Z<256 

'20/ /£// mr my mj my 

*' Li* Iter 2 

/W /2/S /&& /^ /f ^ /;2 ^ 

t.u m Jamil ^ 1 

'm /sip aw m9 nif9 nsp 

*J ly^l AAAA| -<ff> 

/2/<? /220 mo IfyO mo /26o 



/NAAAAA 
A«AAA\ 



/VWA -+►- ~~£ 



XXIt 

/26t np /28r ngi fSP/ /sit 



I ■ I 



/26Z I2?2 /282 &9Z /SO 2 t&f% 

1263 /S/S &83 **98 /SOS '*«* 

i y l »■ Iff* 

/W 1274 /Sty *W 'Wt I9U, 

s m n xr j x 

1265 /*Y# /s #* M9$ 120$ ?3W 

s m :S V! A fr 

/2tftf /2/tf /*£<? /5P5" /«?0<J /5/5 

£ err ?( X = fv 

/2«/ «,#■ «^ iS97 tS°7 !S, f 



£\. 






-£ -V 



/*<?$ /^<9 «$* '3P* '#?* /SIS 



jjj^" 99^ 



I26p /2/S> WW /299 /sop nig 

ill ? «= ^ t 



?tyo + mo /290 *soo wo mo 

i 



> i-[ f| = ^r </- 



XXIII 

mi mi /#/ w/ , 3$l IS7I 

~^ £ 

rm m% /st& ;ssz mz rs& m ~ 

" 1-1 : • 



/Wvw\ 



a J 



'*** /£&? /A$* /iW /^ tm 

U -* "■ fflT ss 



yvww\ 



/S2$ ms 



i*4L 



mt 


m^ 


s#6f 


^ 


• • • 


tf 


If 


*** 


JSJfS 


ms 


ms 


/S?ffi 




I* 


if 


~ 



ms me tty$ jsss /M6 /$& 



<f> <~> i~* 1* 



^7 /&?/ ^/ /W7 /^^ /^ 

ms ms . ms iss8 ms tsj» 

^ 5 Sftt .? '* 



I ■ 



nil u iii Lie AVVVN 



«y /5»p 40? /**> /869 /s%> 

-^l ^ ni —* rrr * 

/#?0 /«*0 ■ /WW /<?«#? /^ /jgp 



// a «*• DJa 






XXIV 

/ser ism ttioi /411 mi it,3t 

% ti a: t« :f| T1 

£862 1892 Ik0% tyZ /422 W% 

«r? ri ¥ w rtl 

/#£? /fttf Z003 /?/£ 4&? #8* 



^ ?hh! m a 



#«$ £K£ /00J /#* Z0ty /W 

I 

I 
I 



/VVAA 



/3SS 139S- fl,0$ WS WS /ASS 



* 



9? £ T¥?m y 



a 



«AA<^A 



13S6 £896 11,06 W& £426 ££36 

* a *(* m s it § 

tssf &# tyOf /4/f my my 



I u 7? a 4- 



AWV\ 



III A 



'w? ma £$o& /41& m$ q$$ 

in n *a "1 hmt s 

/£&> /## /409 W9 W9 ?W9 

i\ tit* W fl 1JT ** 

Z000 /^/0 /^0 /£#0 /^(J 



S& ^T ft tDt 



a o 



. 






XXV 

/#/ /4s/ we/ qjt/ ^8/ w, 

1442 #S2 i$6Z /4J2 /4S2 /49ft 

/m /0S 1463 /4fi /4Q 3 fm 

* t m y % l , w 

/4H ifs^ im /#4 m /m 

/us ms- 146$ sip iwp 'm 

TA t £_ ~ ™ /I ^ 

▼•.«« * ••• ^ JJ <*L 

^<s /^jy ^r^ /#/<? @ /^<r /^ptf 

/#/ /^ w/ it;? i4$; my 

/ #* l * ^^ ^<? /## W* -^p^ 

m /+ « % a w 

'449 AfW /469 /4?p - z^ zr* 

s f SI I *i* f 

i t i 

##? 1460 14/0 148Q /49<>ii Mo 

m H U x* I - 



xxvi 

ijFoi mi mi tm /st/i t$5i 



WJ IB s m ism 



im isn 'sm 'sn t%2 !5 & 
/sob rs?3 ??n ?m '*48 tS5 z 

3 */ RfF W !? (T 

/^ /a# &M ®*4 ^M m * m 

rsros 15ft m$ ®8? ms> ,sss 

**i m li £lt *7 u 

7S06 MI6 K26 W6 &4§ K*6 

f » Mi ■** *F I'tJ 

/J»/ «7/ -tf2/ «3/ W "V 

"=v i" nr *^n ttv u 

_^J &£. j£*£ ^V «*^ ■■• 

AS08 ZiW* ^ s * /,f5 * /,f <* /ia8 

j^£ fp SFT ;RfR W& [IS 

/jop /^/p ^2p ^3?P 7 ^P wp 

OT I E ^ I IT 

/J70 AF20 -W0 >^ ?S50 *S60 

«j£ I #rr i& » ftl 



XXVII 

aw /s?, tsar ts?, jsoi tsu 

'*?s /«^g /£** /^>s /<so* /tf/i 

til £ £ i *f I 

III <--> 

*w yaoor /«& /sg$ i6o& /m 



ih A i* 



/*e? /^ /^ /^ ,^ /<r/ ^ 

iff •* JrtP ^ ^ ~ 

I a • A 

arw /«%> /##$- /^ tcos /s/s- 

/4W i^hr /^ /.#<j /8»5 /«<%r 

rl #£ s 3j ^ H 

SSSf r$?t f$8f 1§ gy /e0 p /6/ y 



<& 



* £ * 



*W /£/<? /^$ /^ /60S /6/8 



/«T<# /^f/p /sag tSMjQ^ /6og r6/9 

m *- s k * & 

i ■ i 

/•9"0 /<£#0 /^(? /<J00 /tf/0 /^^ 

«Wf .% ? ^ LL j-i 



16SI mi . I6W ies ' mi m ' 



IS 6% /s 7* 



m% 



168* /6 ** i6S% 



I 

/WW 



f ?$ — ~< m «** 

w im «# "* *• ^ 

#j *4 H 3 s ^ 

/<544 /*»* >**♦ /5 /^ 
^ III Qu -V-^ 



// 



/$«*- ^W 



II V 



/tf&T /«8* *W /(5 ^ 

* . is II ^ T* 

««5 *»<? /64<! **« "** "^ 

•^ he JL <£ ou* ^ 

III m ' " « — - * 

/«? «r /d # ' ss} ,Mr » ' 67i 



AA/WVy 



/<>2p AJ3? 



/<** aw -*w ** 7 ^ '** 

--- ,_* =: 1A *— ." '*** 

^T7 Lr* ZJ££ /JT rTT i - 

z<r-f^ /<*#> /tf *P 7 W 

S^ ^ '/5* ^<^ f-f^fh 

mo r&fo r«SO rseo <>fo "*J-£ 

*~ — fe m (t rttm % 



XXIX 

7681 ~£ Mgi I7 ° l '*" /7V * 7Sl 

t<$8% j~ /<fp2 i?o% yn /pz tf3% 

| ^ ^ f ^ I 

W3 /tys f?02 ff/S //2S ?/33 

£ « & t +" ^ 

/<?«? /5p^ /Mf w //?* 7^ 



/68S /SpJ /JOS tJ/S //$$ /J3S 

* «& ~ \»f ^ •• 

i i i f 

/<?*<? /6£<5- /^?<f ///(J /^5tf //«?<? 

it ii> l! V *> 

t*8J /6^/ //(^ //// //2/ //,?/ 



I 9 « 






Hi ^V 4T5t¥ ^- 



^/ww^ '<#P //«? W W l?& 



< ■ • 



wo /foo r//o t?so //SO s/40 

as W& <! aVI £ I 



XXX 



//*/ >pi '?& '77* WW *7& 

9 



//^2 //3* //** '/7* '/** l 79% 



'rT 47 Utf i*ti> m * 



O" 



//#£ #£? 7»5 W /^srs W - 

//?# //3* W *?74 '7*4 *7M 

-- i* S /ft t'f* ^ 

111 K 

/^j- //«$? //<ftr J7^r //#* '#* 

3p M fe* £« « fc- 

, , ' ||; III III ,fc N.C23 ' £V 



/#rS IJ36 17** ' r * 6 W"fr V* 6 * 796 

•2a tf *! ft /• W? 

i » • I e\_ 

W W W W '7*7 W 

//^ //^» */*> W* *7 8a *f& 

— m ^T tf it *t 



W ^P W '//£ - W W 

•^C LL* 

s; K « IT ¥ - 

//^ /;6o w < s R Vrs /; ^ /wo 

*■ i* ififf ne f 5 



XXXI 












ieoi 


mn 


mzi 


I8$l 


mi 


rasi 


t^AA^V 


n 


1 1 i 


-rar <ti 


^l 




tstz 

j. 


l#2& 


11 


• IB 




teos 


?&8 


rm$ 


/<m 


/^3 


1853 


VMk ri 


m w 


v*/ 


;i 




J8a£ 


Wif 


/*tf ^ 


/<&g$ 


/<P# 


mif 


*jf 


I ' 


MWA 

/VSAA/V\ 


4* 


-4 




/<5fctf 


W5 


/«fcr 


m$ 


TSlfS 


1855 i 


I IP 




^ v 


n 






1806 


1616 


I8%G 


m6 


ffyS 


1856 


/WW* 


2£ 


.J^L^ 


I! I 


x££l 


*==£ 


m/ 


mj 


mj 


/<?£/ 


JSJ,] 


4? 


& 


I 


sr 


71 


Tiff 


me 


ma 


i6za 


/<m 


ma 


1858 



/<ft?p /tf/p /#§£ ?839 WW * as 9 



/<?/0 /#?0 7<?£0 /<S*0 /<5tf0 W0 

i.i ^ ^ z\ ! £ m 



XXXII 

/SGI W '**? /<9 9< ' *9Q1 Ml 

/ssa. «?* /SSi m% 7goi ' m 

\ft Lt1 t£ &"■**■ 1 

aw /^ *» /<w y *** ^ /5 

_»* /I ,aa w7 /VWV\ __fci_ 

/*B* »# /W» *» W ** 

~& 
If 



4/L ^* ^ ^ 5a "^ 



ms rsjs fsss tyf fpos *9> s 

/«<&5 /«/(f '*»? /«W ^ 0<y # 75 

w -^ tkU 4ML\ fltl 7 
■ i ■ 

/*^ /*# **»/• m *v mr 

^ A tit 8^i LI iui 

/*>« /<$7<9 '*»» ^P« #"* /p/ * 

rr ~oi ^ ti -/<=? « 

AAA* <=> ■ ■ B 

rap taso '*9<> mo <9'° >9*° 

<r«f*r XJZ2=1 ^M \ • * ^-. ass 

ffl l^f rf ^ * 



xxxnr 

W J9S1 194 1 Wtt 1961 '9?i 

1922 193% /e/ f Z fgs% 196% /$}>£ 

If! ~+ Sit S ^ g 

/0*3 /#?.? j^g /^JS 1968 W/S 

i « t 

/#$# ^ n mi we/, *m &?* 

*m <H^!> (IMP /wv'A 

//^ <=^ CZD S S& =5* 

m • ■ ■ ^ 

/p^<? /^&7 #fsr •#<©- /p«r jy/s? 

#=>*£ 5SKH j§' ^ IB ^EB 

W6 /#$# /K£tf /##£ 2»<SS /9 7 6 r^\ 



1927 1937 wq ipjjr /<?<*/• ip//(na\ 

'we mm m If apt I 

/*>«8 /y^«» /^« /ffSS IfiffS Jpf8 

ml ~zi g ffi si asr; 

-#30 /££tf fpSO &60 19/0 2 $ S0 J^ 



XXXIV 

rgs/ 1991 200/ mi 



a % D I & E 

jp&2 /&$% 2002 2Qi2 9fiZ% ^<s> m2 

/.PS3 J99S MM SOW SOtS 20SS 

t 1 i I S(l 

5*. ^ ■ ■ ■ 

/£«£ 1994 looif zctif zoiif 203If 

/^5 '£#" 2<JVJ " m * 20W 5W 9 

f^ A irtV nS^ /^wv oj n-jl^ 

uui -et =*-* <*-*" JL A &^ 



I s?t 



■#<?«. 



5m 

en 



^3K 



#Ptf 2.W6 2(?/ 6 2W 

A J| r==^ ,wwA ~**J 



/vw/> 



/pa; 200? 20// 203/ 

m ^ tf ^ r ' T 

/<?«« '£#* 2008 ZOW Z02S 

L III 



/pat/ W9 SOW noi'j 20Z9 

irir ~ F ~ T tf« l//L 






/p£<? £000 20/0. q ^^2f ww 



XXXV 



ALPHABET 



8 ? 6 .T 4 3 2/ 

16 u> r/f is i2 n to 9 

fp 51 ( w yj v-rf S // |°EA. 

20 ./# /s 



20 ^ /» /^ 



u\ n -^ . £ ^ eei.i. 

p # . / <f «? 4 3 5 / 

1 — t- *■ <r » « /% 

74 /^ '2 // jra 



r ;^ jfS '2 21 *° 

A..,.k III -<r< 



7 tf 



J- 4 3 



/* jj to 9 \M l 7 »• 

MM 



8/6 S 4 3 21 

,4 IS '* " tC 9 fMA^- 

Emily 6'Ji»rpe. 



XXXMI 

X Hi #** ***** :mc I —* 
+ (+> *» 3 j[ £ \ 



» rM 



8 ? 6 4 3 2 / \ 

v *» t r — **J 

/ <r s 4 > } * J 

& 8 ? € & 4 3 2 I 



/,* A? AT /^ /jf /S 



// A* 



20 /9 fd 

S i i 

£ ? 6 S 4 3 2 I 

f^ | ^ A c . ^ 

is is. 2i jo p r 1, In. 

^ fi i r ™ ) 

p a ? 6 S 4 3 % / 

(^ y^ C" ^ - I gXl HTi, 









V 




Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: June 2007 

PreservationTechnofogies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 1 6066 
(724)779-2111 






SX A 'c*- 
















<* 












</> 


./ 









,00. 






V 










^ (V 






^ ^ 










OQ 1 















1 \* 



*' 



^ x 















4 : 



,\\ .- V I 8 ,, 



V XV 



3 < 



-V 


















^ ^ 


















